WO2001067302A2 - Electronic book viewer connection to world watch live - Google Patents

Electronic book viewer connection to world watch live Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001067302A2
WO2001067302A2 PCT/US2001/004946 US0104946W WO0167302A2 WO 2001067302 A2 WO2001067302 A2 WO 2001067302A2 US 0104946 W US0104946 W US 0104946W WO 0167302 A2 WO0167302 A2 WO 0167302A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
video
ofthe
data
electronic book
camera
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2001/004946
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2001067302A3 (en
Inventor
John S. Hendricks
John S. Mccoskey
Michael L. Asmussen
Original Assignee
Discovery Communications, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Discovery Communications, Inc. filed Critical Discovery Communications, Inc.
Priority to AU2001247201A priority Critical patent/AU2001247201A1/en
Publication of WO2001067302A2 publication Critical patent/WO2001067302A2/en
Publication of WO2001067302A3 publication Critical patent/WO2001067302A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/21Server components or server architectures
    • H04N21/218Source of audio or video content, e.g. local disk arrays
    • H04N21/21805Source of audio or video content, e.g. local disk arrays enabling multiple viewpoints, e.g. using a plurality of cameras
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/422Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
    • H04N21/4223Cameras
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/426Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/45Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
    • H04N21/462Content or additional data management, e.g. creating a master electronic program guide from data received from the Internet and a Head-end, controlling the complexity of a video stream by scaling the resolution or bit-rate based on the client capabilities
    • H04N21/4622Retrieving content or additional data from different sources, e.g. from a broadcast channel and the Internet
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • H04N21/478Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application
    • H04N21/4782Web browsing, e.g. WebTV
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/16Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
    • H04N7/173Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
    • H04N7/17309Transmission or handling of upstream communications
    • H04N7/17318Direct or substantially direct transmission and handling of requests
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/16Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
    • H04N7/173Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
    • H04N7/17309Transmission or handling of upstream communications
    • H04N7/17336Handling of requests in head-ends

Definitions

  • This invention relates to the distribution of audiovisual signals through communications networks such as computer networks and servers and their subsequent storage in and display on an electronic book reader.
  • the invention has particular use with respect to global networks such as the Internet and "World Wide Web”.
  • the invention also relates to education. Particularly, the invention provides an alternative to in-person classroom instruction. Description Of Related Art
  • audiovisual presentations have begun to be used in the field of education. These systems may provide playback of a recording of a lecturer who provides apresentation on an educational topic. For example, students may learn about math from watching a videotape or television broadcast of a math professor' s lecture. Education can also occur on a more informal basis. For example, specialty channels in the United States such as the Discovery Channel® and The Learning Channel® (headquartered in Bethesda, Maryland, U.S.A.) broadcast educational programming that both entertains and educates a diverse viewership. The disadvantage of these audiovisual systems is that they are not interactive. Students are unable to ask questions, and the lecturer is unable to tailor the presentation of material to the specific needs ofthe current student audience. Consequently, the needs ofthe students are not met.
  • Cable and broadcast television are commonly known media which supply information to large numbers of viewers equipped with receivers known as “television sets.” By receiving abroadcast, cablecast or satellite signal, users are able to view scenes fromremote locations and observe newsworthy events which occur far from the user's location.
  • conventional television is a one-way media in which users cannot communicate with each other or the broadcaster.
  • me Internet is alarge computer network which connects host computers. Users with a computer, modem and telephone line commonly call via telephone to connect with a host. The host, being in communication with other hosts (connected to other users) is able to transfer information between users.
  • the Internet is used, for example, to transfer, data files, still images, sounds and messages between virtually any two points in the world with telephone access.
  • the use ofthe Internet has increased dramatically since 1981, when approximately 300 host computers were linked together. In 1989, the number of linked host computers was fewer than 90,000; but by 1993, over a million host computers were connected. Currently over 10 million host computers are linked (not including the personal computers people use to access these hosts via modems) and as many as 40 million people around the world may have access to the Internet medium. This number is expected to grow to 200 million by the end of 1999.
  • i- ⁇ formationwMchcanbetrarismitted include files containing prerecorded sequences of images. To view these images, users download a large data file, and after running appropriate software, see a sequence of images on the computer screen. These images typically are not provided in real time, and are not viewable while the user is accessing the Internet.
  • the electronic book selection and delivery system is a new way to distribute books to bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers.
  • the technological breakthroughs of this invention provide a secure electronic system for both delivering selected books and receiving payments.
  • the system has an unusual combination of features that provides the consumer with a daily use household appliance that has a high tech aura while being very practical, portable, and easy to use.
  • An advantage ofthe system is that it eliminates the distribution of any physical obj ect such as apaper book or computer memory device from any book or text distribution system.
  • the purchase of a book becomes a PAY-PER-READTM event avoiding the overhead, "middle-men," printing costs, and time delay associated with the current book distribution system.
  • Published material and text such as the President' s speech, a new law, a court decision on abortion, or O. J. Simpson's testimony canbe made immediately available to the consumer at a nominal fee.
  • books maybe made available free to the end use consumer, subsidized by advertisers who sponsor books or embed advertising within the books.
  • the system is a novel combination of new technology involving the television, cable, telephone, and computer industries. It utilities high bandwidth data transmissions, strong security measures, sophisticated digital switcliing, high resolution visual displays, novel controls, and user friendly interface software.
  • the primary components ofthe text delivery system are the subsystem for preparing the text for delivery and the subsystem for receiving and selecting text that was delivered.
  • An embodiment of the system includes additional components and optional features that enhance the system.
  • the system may be configured for use by bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers.
  • the system for consumer use is made up of four subsystems, namely: (1) an operations center, (2) a distribution system, (3) ahome subsystem including reception, selection, viewing, transacting and transmission capabilities, and (4) abilling and collection system.
  • Alternative configurations ofthe system are defined to allow for a variety of traditional and non-traditional delivery methods.
  • the operations center performs several primary functions: manipulating text data (including receiving, formatting and storing of text data), security encoding of text, cataloging of books, providing a messaging center capability, and performing uplink functions.
  • the system delivers the text from the operations center to consumer homes by inserting text data within analog video signals.
  • the insertion of text is generally performed with an encoder at an uplink site that is within or near the operations center.
  • the system can use several lines ofthe Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI), all the lines ofthe analog video signal, a digital video signal or unused portions of bandwidth to transmit text data.
  • VBI Vertical Blanking Interval
  • the top ten or twenty book titles may be transmitted with video during normal programming utilizing existing cable or broadcast transmission capability without disruption to the subscriber' s video reception.
  • the home subsystem performs at least four functions: connecting to the distribution system, selecting text, storing text, and transacting through a communicating mechanism.
  • the components ofthe home subsystem may be configured in a variety ofhardware configurations. Each function may be performed by a separate component, the components may be integrated, or the capability of existing cable set top converter boxes, computers, and televisions may be utilized.
  • a connector, library unit and viewer unit may be used.
  • the connector portion ofthe home subsystem receives an analog video signal and strips or extracts the text from the video.
  • the home library stores the text signal, provides a user friendly software interface to the system and processes the transactions at the consumer home.
  • the viewer provides a screen for viewing text or menus and novel user friendly controls.
  • Alternative embodiments are presented that support delivery of text using a variety of communication mechanisms.
  • the viewing device may be a portable book shaped viewer which stores one or more books for viewing and provides a screen for interacting with the home library unit.
  • a high resolution display is used to both read the books and to interact with the home library software, h one embodiment, an optional phone connector or return-path cable connection initiates the telephone calls and, with the aid ofthe library, transmits the necessary data to complete the ordering and billing portion ofthe consumer transaction.
  • Alternative embodiments are presented that support ordering and billing using a variety of communication mechanisms.
  • the user friendly controls include a bookmark, current book and page turn button.
  • the billing and collection system performs transaction management, authorizations, collections and publisher payments automatically.
  • a system similar to the system for consumer use may be used in bookstores, schools and public libraries.
  • video is collected at aremote site.
  • video includes stereophonic or monophonic audio signals whichmay accompany a video signal. Additionally, “video” is used broadly herein to include still images, groups of related still images, animation, graphics, pictures, or other visual data, including textual data.
  • the remote video information may be obtained from a video cassette, CD ROMs, television channels, one or more video cameras, or other well known sources. If video cameras are used, they may be connected to a computer so that they are remotely controllable, or they may be oriented such that a perception of control can be created for users.
  • the video may relate to remote sites of interest, such as a pyramid in Egypt, or the images may relate to an educational lecture being conducted at a remote site.
  • the collected video may be transferred to a web site, either in compressed or uncompressed form.
  • the video may be physically transported or may be transmitted through a communications medium to the web site.
  • the web site may contain a storage media that stores some or all ofthe video. Additionally, the web site may pass camera control commands, if applicable, to the remotely controlled cameras or may simulate the remote control of a camera.
  • One function ofthe web site is to pass video to aplurality of users, through a communication media such as the Internet, in response to user selections.
  • the video passed to the plurality of users may be live video being fed to the web site, or may be stored video .
  • a number of video servers may be used to output the video to the users through the communications media, such as the Internet.
  • the video may be tailored by the web site for the particular user's hardware, including data communication equipment, ormemory size, i.e. the data rate matches the highest speed which the user's equipment can handle.
  • Users receive and display the video sent from the web site. Many simultaneous video pictures may be received. The quality and frame rate ofthe video is dependent on the user's communications hardware. Users having electronic book viewers with high-speed modems or cable modems may receive higher quality video.
  • the users are able to send commands and/or queries to the web site. The commands and queries are forwarded to remote locations to control remote cameras or query remotely located instructors. Alternatively, the commands may cause the web site to change from among many video signals with different camera angles or locations (or to transmit a different portion of a wide angle image), causing the user to have a perception of remote camera control.
  • the user' s commands may also cause a different portion of a received wide angle image to be displayed, giving the user aperception of camera control.
  • Figure 1 a is ablock diagram ofthe primary components of an electronic book selection and delivery system.
  • Figure lb is a block diagram of an electronic book selection and delivery system that uses a composite video signal.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic showing an overview ofthe electronic book selection and delivery system.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic of a delivery plan for the electronic book selection and delivery system.
  • Figure 4 is a block diagram ofthe operations center.
  • Figure 5a is a flow diagram of processing at the operations center and uplink.
  • Figure 5b is a block diagram of a hardware configuration for an uplink site.
  • Figure 6a is a block diagram of a hardware configuration for a four component home subsystem.
  • Figure 6b is a schematic of a two unit home subsystem.
  • Figure 7 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a video connector.
  • Figure 8 is a block diagram for an example of a library unit.
  • Figure 9 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a library unit on the received data stream.
  • Figure 10 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a library unit on information requests from a viewer.
  • Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the components for an example of a viewer.
  • Figure 12 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a viewer on an information request from a subscriber.
  • Figure 13 is a chart depicting a menu structure and sequencing of menus in a menu system.
  • Figure 14a is a schematic of an introductory menu.
  • Figure 14b is a schematic showing an example of a main menu.
  • Figures 14c, 14d, 14e, 14f, 14g, 14h, 14i and 14j are schematics showing examples of submenus.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of an electronic book system for a bookstore or public library.
  • Figure 16a and Figure 16b are schematics ofhardware modifications or upgrades to a set top converter.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic showing a set top terminal that includes a data receiver and data transmitter.
  • Figure 18a is a schematic of a book-on-demand system.
  • Figure 18b is a schematic of an operations center supporting a book-on-demand system.
  • Figure 19 is a diagram depicting components used for delivery of electronic books over the Internet.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic of a page of an electronic book having electronic links
  • Figure 21 is a schematic of a page of an electronic book with the electronic links shown
  • Figure 22 is a schematic of a show links submenu
  • Figure 23 is an example of links in an electronic book
  • Figure 24 is a block diagram of an embodiment ofthe invention where remote video is provided to a web server by videocassette and by ordinary television.
  • Figure 25 is ablock diagram of an embodiment ofthe invention where remote video is provided by remotely located cameras and a communication network carries the video to the web server.
  • Figures 26a and 26b are ablock diagrams of an embodiment of he invention using the embodiments of Figures 24 and 25 with remotely controllable cameras.
  • Figure 27 shows remote cameras positioned around abuilding for perceived camera control.
  • Figures 28a - 28B show video images from specific cameras shown in Figure 27.
  • Figure 29 shows remote cameras deployed to follow a parade route.
  • Figures 30a and 30b show remotely controlled cameras at a remote location.
  • Figures 31a and 31b show a single remote camera at a remote location, where the camera has a 180 degree spherical (or other wide angle) lens.
  • Figures 32a and 32b are block diagrams of a server platform.
  • Figure 33 is a block diagram of communications paths from the server site to remote users.
  • Figure 34 shows a home page in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • Figure 35 shows a "society" page in accordance with another embodiment ofthe invention.
  • Figure 36 shows a "map" page of remote camera locations throughout the world.
  • Figure 37 shows a "watch" page containing live video feeds from five remote cameras.
  • Figure 38 shows a page directed to determining the user' s data rate.
  • Figure 39 shows a page of an interactive lecture.
  • Figures 40 and 41 show pages of an embodiment of he invention that combines live video, prestored video, graphics, and interactive questions.
  • Figure 42 shows a flow diagram of amethod of automatically monitoring andpanning an area using perceived camera control.
  • Figure 43 is an exemplary screen display ofthe present invention, showing video and also showing video data. Detailed Description Of Invention
  • Figure 1 a shows an electronic book distribution system 100 that may be used for distributing an electronic book.
  • a content provider 110 may publish hard copy versions of books or other printed media including newspapers, magazines, and product catalogs, for example.
  • the content provider 110 may convert printed materials to an electronic format and provide the electronic formatted materials to a distribution point, or center 120, over uplink path 115.
  • Theuplinkpath 115 maybe awired or a wireless path.
  • Theuplinkpath 115 may be a telecommunications network, for example.
  • the uplink path 115 may be a satellite relay path or a wireless telephone path.
  • the upHnkpath 115 may involve providing electromc books to the distribution center on a fixed media, such as a CD-ROM, for example.
  • the content provider 110 and the distribution center 120 are shown as separate components ofthe electronic book distribution system 100. However, the content provider 110 and the distribution center 120 may be co-located.
  • the distribution center 120 may convert printed matter into an electronic format. Alternately, the distribution center 120 may receive electronic files from an outside source, such as the content provider 110. The distribution center 120 may process and store electronic books.
  • the distribution center 120 distributes electronic books.
  • the distribution may be, for example, over distribution path 125, distribution network 130, and distribution path 135 to an electronic book subsystem or teiminal 140, which may include an electronic book viewer (not shown).
  • the terminal may also be a television, a set top terminal, apersonal computer, or similar device.
  • An apparatus and method for distributing electromc books is disclosed in greater detail later.
  • the distribution network 130 may be an electronic book store, an Internet web site, a wired or wireless telecommunications network, an intranet, a radio program delivery system, a television program delivery system, including cable television, satellite television broadcast, and over-the-air broadcast, for example.
  • the electronic book distribution network 130 could include direct delivery through amail delivery system of electronic books on a fixed media, such as a CD-ROM, for example.
  • Figure lb shows components of an electronic book distribution system 170 using a television program delivery system to distribute electronic books.
  • the components ofthe electronic book selection and delivery system 170 are an encoder 174, a video distribution system 178, a connector 182, and a text selector 186.
  • the encoder 174 places textual data on a video signal to form a composite video signal.
  • the composite signal may contain only textual data, it usually carries both video and textual data.
  • a variety of equipment and methods maybe used to encode text data onto a video signal.
  • the video distribution system 178 distributes the composite video signal from the single point ofthe encoder 174 to multiple locations, wliich have connectors 182.
  • the connector 182 receives the digital or analog video signal from the video distribution system 178 and separates, strips or extracts the text data from the composite video signal. If necessary, the extracted text data is converted into a digital bit stream.
  • the text selector 186 works in connection with the connector 182 to select text.
  • FIG. 18 shows another embodiment of an electronic book selection and delivery system 200.
  • the delivery system 200 includes: an operations center 250 including an uplink site 254, a video distribution system 208, an electronic book device, or home system 258 including a video connector 212, a library 262, a viewer 266, and a phone connector 270, telephone system 274, a lnternetweb site 279 and abilling and collection system 278.
  • the home system 258 may include connections to a television 259 and apersonal computer 261 may beusedto display menu screens, electronic books, electronic files, or any other information associated with the electronic book delivery system 200.
  • the television 259 and the personal computer 261 may provide control functions that replicate and supplement those ofthe viewer 266.
  • the operations center 250 receives textual material from outside sources 282 such as publishers, newspapers, and on-line services. Alternately, the outside sources may maintain electronic books at the Internet web site 279. The outside sources 282 may convert textual and graphical material to digital format, or may contract with another vendor to provide this service. The operations center 250 may receive the textual and graphical material in various digital formats and may convert the textual material to a standard compressed format for storage. In so doing, the operations center 250 may create apool of textual material that is available to be delivered to the home system 258. The textual material maybe grouped by books or titles for easy access.
  • outside sources 282 such as publishers, newspapers, and on-line services. Alternately, the outside sources may maintain electronic books at the Internet web site 279.
  • the outside sources 282 may convert textual and graphical material to digital format, or may contract with another vendor to provide this service.
  • the operations center 250 may receive the textual and graphical material in various digital formats and may convert the textual material to a standard compressed format for storage. In
  • book means textual, graphical or video information. Such information may be contained in any novels, encyclopedias, articles, magazines, newspapers, catalogues, periodicals, or manuals or any portion or section ofthe above. The information may also be provided as a video clip, for example.
  • title may represent the actual title assigned to a book, a video program, or any other designation indicating a particular group, portion, or category of textual information. The title may refer to a series of related textual, video or graphical information, a grouping of textual, video or graphical information, or a portion of textual, video or graphical information.
  • apictureofawrenchmaybeatitle for arepair book, a picture of a computer a title for a computer book, a graphical symbol of a telephone a title for a telephone book, a drawing of a dagger a title for a mystery book, a picture of a bat and ball a title for a sports book, and a picture of tickertape a title for a business book.
  • the operations center 250 includes the uplink site 254 for placing the text or other information onto a telecommunications signal and sending the telecommunications signal into a distribution system.
  • the uplink site 254 may include an encoder 204 (not shown in Figure 2) to encode the text onto the telecommunications signal.
  • Many analog and digital video distribution systems may be used with the electronic book dehvery system 200, such as cable television distribution systems, broadcast television distribution systems, video distributed over telephone systems, direct satellite broadcast distribution systems, and other wire and wireless video distribution systems. Nearly any distribution system which can deliver a telecommunications signal, including a video signal, will work with the electronic book delivery system 200. It is also possible to distribute the electronic book without using a telecommunications signal as described in the embodiments presented in Section VII below.
  • the home system 258 performs five functions: (1) connecting with a video distribution system; (2) selecting data; (3) storing data; (4) displaying data; and (5) handling transactions.
  • An important optional function ofthe home system 258 is communicating using, in one embodiment, a telephone commumcation system 274.
  • the home system 258 may be made up of four parts : a video connector 212 or similar type of connector for connecting with the distribution system 208, a library 262 for storing and processing, a viewer 266 for viewing menus and text and a telephone connector 270 for connecting with a telephone communications system 274. Additional embodiments are presented in Section VII that address alternative communication mechanisms.
  • the billing and collection system 278 may be co-located with the operations center 250 or located remote from the operations center 250.
  • the billing and collection system 278 may be in communication with the home system 258 using telephone-type communication systems (for example 274). Any of a number of communication systems as presented in Section VII, such as a cellular system or the Internet, will operate with the billing and collection system 278.
  • the billing and collection system 278 records the electronic books or video, orportions of text or video that are selected or ordered by the subscriber.
  • the collection system will charge a subscriber's credit account or bill the subscriber, hi addition, the billing and collection system 278 may monitor that amount due to publishers or other outside sources 282 who have provided textual data or other services such as air time to enable the text delivery system 200 to operate.
  • FIG. 2 Also shown in Figure 2 is an intranet 279 ' .
  • the intranet 279 ' may be used as apart of a private distribution network for distributing and circulating electronic books.
  • a university library may use the intranet 279 ' to circulate electronic books to university students and professors.
  • Figure 3 is an expanded overview of a delivery plan 301 for the electronic book dehvery system 200. It is a comprehensive delivery plan 301 to support various types of users and various billing systems.
  • Figure 3 shows that publishers 282 may provide text transfer 302 to the operations center 250' and receive payments 306 from the billing and collection system 278'.
  • Aseparatechanneluplinksite254' isshowninthisconfigurationreceivingdata310 from the operations center 250'.
  • the operations center 250' has three separate sections (318, 322, 326) one for text receiving, formatting and re-entry 318, a second for security encoding 322 and a third section for catalog and messaging center functions 326.
  • the collection and billing system 278' shown has two sections (330, 334) one for transaction management, authorizations and publisher payments 330, and the other for customer service 334.
  • the customer service section 334 provides for data entry and access to customer account information.
  • Transaction accounting information 338 is supphed to credit card companies 342 by the transaction management section 330 ofthe billing and collection system 278'.
  • the credit card companies 342 provide billing 346 to customers either electronically or by mail.
  • Methods for communicating between the subscriber base 348 and the billing and collection system278' include: by telephone switching 350 alone, cellular switching 354 and telephone switching 350 combined, and by use ofthe cable system 358 and the telephone switching 350.
  • the system shown supports both one-way 362 and two-way cable communication 366 with subscribers. Additional commumcation methods are presented in Section VII. Public libraries and schools 370 as well as bookstores 374 may use the delivery system 301.
  • the Operations Center Figure 4 is a schematic ofthe operations center 250, which includes the uplink 254.
  • the operations center 250 may gather text or books by receiving, formatting, storing, and encoding.
  • a data stream 302 containing text may be received at the operations center 250 by a data receiver 402.
  • the data receiver 402 is under the control of a processor 404.
  • the data stream is formatted using digital logic for foiniatting 406 which is also under the control ofthe processor 404. If any additional text is generated at the operations center 250 locally for insertion into the distributed signal, the text generation is handled through text generator hardware 410, which may include a data receiver and a keyboard (not shown) . Following processing by the text generator 410, the additional text can be added to the text received by the combining hardware 414 that includes digital logic circuitry (not shown).
  • the processing at the operations center 250 is controlled by aprocessor 404, wliich uses an instruction memory 416.
  • the processor 404 and instruction memory 416 maybe supphed by a personal computer or mini-computer, for example.
  • the operations center 250 uses a catalog and message memory 420 and the text generator 410 if necessary.
  • the data stream of text, catalog and messages may be encoded by security module encoding 424 prior to being sent to the uplink module 254.
  • Various encoding techniques may be used by the security encoding module 424 such as the commercial derivative of NS A's encryption algorithm (Data Encryption System (DES)) and General h strument's DigjCipher H
  • the encoded text may be stored in text memory 428 prior to being sent to the uplink 254.
  • a first-in-first-out text memory arrangement may be used under the control ofthe processor 404.
  • Various types of memory may be used for the text memory 428 including RAM.
  • the operations center 250 may use file server technology for the text memory 428 to catalog and spool books for transmission as is described below.
  • the operations center 250 may also store the electronic book as compressed data files.
  • the distribution system 208 may use high bandwidth transmission techniques such as those defined by the North American Broadcast Teletext Standard (NABTS) and the World System Teletext (WST) standard.
  • WST World System Teletext
  • afourhundredpagebook for example, maybe transmitted during regular television programming using four lines ofthe Vertical Blanking Interval at a rate of approximately one book every 1.6 minutes (63,840 bits per second).
  • books may be transmitted over a dedicated channel, which interrupts programming so that 246 lines of video can be used to transmit approximately 2,250 books every hour (3.9 Mbits per second).
  • a teletext type format is the simplest but possibly the slowest text format to use with the electronic book delivery system 200.
  • an encoder 204 may be used at an uplink site 254 to insert textual data into the analog video signal.
  • the delivery ofthe textual information may be completed using an existing cable television plant and equipment.
  • Alternative transmit formats and delivery systems are presented in Section VII.
  • Figure 5a is a flowchart of steps involved in processing text from the publisher or provider 282 that may occur at the operations center 250.
  • the publisher 282 processes data files of text for books, compresses, encrypts and sends the data files to the operations center 250 or uplink 254.
  • Text files for books maybe sent one book at a time.
  • the uplink 254 or operations center 250 receives and processes the data stream from the publisher 282.
  • part of this processing includes encryption and error correction.
  • Text files may be delivered for receipt by multiple home subsystems simultaneously, or to a specific individual home subsystem.
  • the electronic books are distributed to consumers using a video distribution system such as a cable television system.
  • the electronic books may also be packaged as data packets and distributed over other telecommunications networks such as a digital wireless telephone network, for example.
  • files are broken into smaller packets of information. Header information is added to the packets.
  • the bit stream is converted from a serial digital bit stream to an analog bit stream that is compatible with anNTSC video signal.
  • Block 512 shows the switching of analog data into the video lines of a video signal.
  • the analog data may be placed either in the VBI or the active video lines.
  • FIG. 5b is an example of a hardware configuration to perform some ofthe functions for blocks 508 and 512.
  • a video feed 516 is received and processed through a sync stripper 520.
  • the stripped sync signal 532 is used by the digital logic control 524.
  • the digital logic control 524 receives the sync signal 532 and a serial digital bit stream 528 for processing.
  • the digital logic control 524 passes the serial digital bit stream to the Digital to Analog converter 536 and outputs a control signal 540 for the video switch 544.
  • the video switch 544 integrates the video feed 516 and analog data stream 548 into a video feed with analog data signal inserted 552.
  • the public telephone system maybe used to transmit books to the subscribers. An average book would take about 7 minutes to transmit over the public telephone system. Using the telephone system, it is not necessary to combine video and text into a composite signal. In most other respects, the operations center would remain similar whether text delivery was by telephone or cable.
  • File server technology such as that described in U.S. Patent No. 5,262,875, entitled AI-roiO/VTDEOFJLESERV ⁇ RlNCLlJDINGDECOMPRESSION /PLAYBACKMEANS, issued to Mincer, et al., and, U.S. PatentNo.
  • the public telephone system may be used to provide access to the Internet, where the Internet web site 279 may be accessed. Electromc books may be ordered, paid for, and delivered directly from the Internet web site 279 over the telephone system.
  • the home system may receive data using any one or more standardprotocols including time divisionmultiple access (TDMA), code divisionmultiple access (CDMA), Global Systems for Mobile Communications (GSM) and Advanced Mobile Telephone System (AMPS) protocols.
  • TDMA time divisionmultiple access
  • CDMA code divisionmultiple access
  • GSM Global Systems for Mobile Communications
  • AMPS Advanced Mobile Telephone System
  • FIG. 6a The hardware configuration for a four component home system 258 is shown in Figure 6a.
  • Figure 6b shows a hardware configuration for a two component home subsystem.
  • the home system 258 performs several functions, such as receiving data and video transmissions, stripping (or extracting) the data from the video signal, screening and storing the data, providing user friendly interface controls and software, displaying menus and text, processing transactions, initiating telephone calls and transmitting billing data.
  • Various hardware configurations may be utilized to achieve the desired functions ofthe home system 258.
  • the home system 258 can be configured to utilize the reception and channel tuning capability ofthe current installed subscriber base of cable converter boxes and televisions 601 and networked computers.
  • the home system 258 can also be designed as an advanced set top terminal converter box with menu generation capability, electronic memory and a telephone modem as described in section V below.
  • the home system 258 can be configured to support alternate delivery and ordering methods as described in Section VII.
  • the electronic components, whichmake up the home system 258 canbe arranged in a variety of ways.
  • the viewer 266 and library 262 are wired together while the remaining components communicate through RF transceivers 604.
  • a simple version ofthe home system 258 there are only two units, a library 262 and a viewer 266.
  • Figure 6b shows a two unit home system 258 with certain optional features.
  • the viewer 266 is generally equipped with a high resolution viewing area 602, digital logic (including a key 605, security 606, and amicroprocessor 621), video graphics control and memory 607, power supply circuitry 602 (not shown), an optional battery 603 and an optional RF transceiver 604.
  • the hbrary 262 contains the connector function to the electronic book distribution system 208, comiector function to a public telephone communications system, and memory 600 (which may be removable and portable 600'). More specifically, the library 262 would include data stripping functions 617, digital logic 609, memory storage 600, power circuitry 610, optional connections 611 (including cellular or PCN 611'), optional battery (not shown), optional tuner module 613 and an optional RF transceiver 604.
  • the connector 212 and the public telephone system connection 270, as well as the removable portable memory unit 600 ofthe library 262 may be broken out into separate components.
  • the home system 258 may include an attached keyboard 267 or a wireless keyboard 268. Both the attached keyboard 267 and the wireless keyboard 268 may be used to communicate with the viewer 266 (not shown) or the hbrary unit 262.
  • the wireless keyboard 268 may communicate using radio frequency (RF) signaling, for example.
  • RF radio frequency
  • all functions of the home system 258 maybe incorporated into a single unit.
  • the functions ofthe hbrary 262, for example, may be carried out by a card or chipset in the viewer 266. All the communications devices needed to couple the home system 258 to various telecommunications networks may also be incorporated into the viewer.
  • the viewer 266 may include a communication device for receiving inputs from a separate keyboard.
  • the viewer 266 may also include a built-in video camera 608 " that may be used to transmit images ofthe subscriber. Using the transceiver 608, the camera 608 " and the speaker/microphone 608 ' , the subscriber may use the viewer 266 for video conferencing, for example.
  • the home system 258 may have as many as five separate components, which communicate with each other.
  • the two, three, four or five separate components which make up the home subsystem can communicate with each other in a variety of ways, including hardwired connection 615, RF transceiver 604 and other wireless methods.
  • RF communications may be used in the home, allowing separate components to be located throughout the home without restriction.
  • the data communicated between the units may be secure data.
  • the library 262 may provide power to the viewer 266 through the hard wire communication link 615.
  • a device such as a cable interface device or cable connector 212 is used.
  • the cable connector device includes a tuner 613, while the cable interface device makes use of existing tuning equipment in the home, hi either configuration, data is stripped from the video signal and stored at the subscribers location in the library 262.
  • the phone connector 270, optional connector 611, and modular connector 701 initiate communications and transmit ordering and billing information to the operations center 250 or billing and collection system 278.
  • a digital connector 619 is provided to communicate digital information with the set top 601.
  • the hbrary 262 is the intelligent component ofthe home subsystem, incorporating the hardware and software necessary to store the text data, generate menus and effect the purchase transactions.
  • the home library 262 also includes the necessary j acks and connections to allow the system to be connected to the viewer 266. As shown in Figure
  • the library 262 communicates the text data to the viewer 266 in a secure format, which requires a key 605 for decryption.
  • the text may be decrypted page by page just before viewing.
  • Figure 7 shows the flow ofthe processes performed by the video connector 212.
  • the video connector 212 receives the video signal 608, tunes to the channel containing the text data 612, strips the text data from the video signal 616, and communicates the text data stream to logic components in the library 620.
  • the connection to the video distribution system may be a cable connector to a cable television dehvery system, as shown in Figure 6b.
  • the cable connector includes a data stripper circuit 617, which accepts video input from either a set top converter, TV or VCR 601 , or an optional tuner block 613 that receives the CAIN signal through the cable connector 212'.
  • the data stripper circuit 617 strips data out ofthe video, and outputs a digital bit stream to the digital logic portion 609 of the library unit 262.
  • the data is embedded in the video signal either in the vertical blanking interval or the active video portion in an encrypted and compressed format.
  • the data stripper circuit 617 can be placed inside the set top converter box 601 , TV, or in the library unit.
  • the data stripper circuit 617 outputs the digital bit stream to be used by the library digital logic 609.
  • the video connector 212 may also contain a channel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped.
  • a channel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped.
  • the optional tuner module 613 Using the optional tuner module 613 , a set top converter, VCR, or TV tuner is not needed in the home subsystem.
  • the optional tuner module 613 would instead receive the CATV signal directly through the cable connector 212.
  • Additional connector options, wliich allow for the receipt of text files using alternative delivery methods, are presented in Section VII. This ubiquitous access is provided using the modular connector 700 as depicted in Figure 6b. b. Library
  • FIG. 6b An embodiment ofthe library 262 for a two unit home subsystem is shown in both Figure 6b and Figure 8.
  • the embodiment shown includes the following optional parts: the video connector 212, phone connector 270, RF transceiver 604, and battery pack 624 in addition to a removal portable memory 600', microprocessor 628, instruction memory unit 632, digital logic 636, and power unit 640.
  • the library 262 contains a digital logic section 609 (not shown in Figure 8) which includes the microprocessor 628, the digital logic 636 and the instruction memory unit 632.
  • the microprocessor 628 maybe a secure microprocessor such as the Mot SC21 device sold by Motorola.
  • the digital logic section 609 will receive the serial digital bit stream from the data stripper circuit 617 and process the data. Error correction will also be performed by the digital logic section 609 and the datawillbe checked forproper address. If the address ofthe data is correct and the library 262 is authorized to receive the data, the data will be transferred to the memory storage unit 600, 600 ' . Authorization to receive the data is provided by the cable headend or another distribution point. An authorization code may be sent in the serial digital bit stream.
  • the digital logic section 609 will send appropriate text and graphical data to the memory storage unit 600, 600 '. It transfers this data in a compressed and encrypted format and the data remains stored in a compressed and encrypted format. i. Memory Storage Unit
  • the memory storage unit ofthe library may be a removable portable memory unit 600 '
  • a hard disk drive such as an 80 megabyte, a 200 megabyte, a hard disk with removable platters, and CD ROM.
  • a hard disk drive unit 600' which contains removable platters, may also be used. This would provide virtually unlimited hbrary storage capacity.
  • Data will be stored in the memory storage unit in a compressed and encrypted format.
  • the data may also contain a key or unique ID number that matches the ID or key ofthe viewer 266. This matching of a unique key or ID number prevents unauthorized transfer of text data from the memory storage unit to an unauthorized viewer.
  • Small memory devices such as smart cards, electronic memory cards or PCM CIA cards (personal computer memory card industry association) may also be used to store the data.
  • the library 262 will accept power from AC wall power 610, DC power 640, or optional battery power 624.
  • the power circuitry 610, 640 may provide all the voltage necessary from either the battery 624 or AC unit for the various circuitry in the library.
  • the power circuitry 610, 640 may also provide power to the viewer through a single data cable when connected to the viewer.
  • the power circuitry 610, 640 will recharge the battery using AC power when in operation.
  • the library 262 With the optional battery unit 624 installed, the library 262 becomes a portable unit and can still provide power to the viewer 266. In order to extend battery life, power conservation measures may be utilized, such as shutting down the memory system when not in use.
  • connection to the telephone system may be provided by a connector device 611, wliich consists of amodem. Various available modems may be used to perform this function. As shown in Figure 6b, cellular phone or PCN phone connections 611' may also be provided.
  • the modem may be used to transfer the name and credit card information ofthe consumer to the billing and collection system 278.
  • the telephone connection 270 may be utilized each time an electronic book is purchased by a consumer to complete and record the transaction.
  • the telephone connection 270 may also be used to receive the text data from the operations center 250, bypassing the video distribution system 208.
  • the phone connection 270 may be aseparateunit as shown i Figure 6b.
  • alternate means exist to connect the home system 258 to the billing and collection system 278 or the operation center 250.
  • the modular connector 701 (shown in Figures 6b and 8) provides access to each communication network to provide a path from the home system 258 to the billing and collection system 278 or the operations center 250. These alternatives are presented in detail in Section VII. iv. Library Processing Figure 9 shows for one embodiment, an example of processing performed by the digital logic section 609 ofthe library 262 on the data stream 651 received from the video connector 212 or stripper circuit 617.
  • step S650 digital logic section 609 checks the data stream 651 for error correction . If an error is detected, in step S654 digital logic section 609 de-interleaves the data and in step S 658 runs a FEC (Forward Error Correcting) algorithm. In steps S650, S654 and S658, the digital logic section 609 performs the error correction needed on the data stream. If no error correction is necessary the digital logic section 609 proceeds to step S662 and checks data packets individually for packet address. If the address is a unique address, the process moves to step S666 and the digital logic section 609 checks whether the address ofthe packet matches the hbrary box ID number. The hbrary box ID number is aunique number associated with the hbrary 262.
  • the hbrary box ID is used to ensure security ofthe data.
  • the process then moves to step S670 and the digital logic section 609 determines whether an electronic file has already been opened into which the datapacketcanbe saved. Ifno data file has been opened, the digital logic section 609 opens a new data file for that packet. If an electronic file has been opened, the process moves to step S678 and the digital logic section 609 saves the packet in the electronic file on disk. The process moves to step 682 and the digital logic section 609 checks to see if this is the last packet for a particular book for a particular textual data block being received. If it is the last packet of information, the process moves to step 686 and the digital logic section 609 closes the electronic file and updates the directory of available electronic files.
  • step S682 or S686 the process returns to receive another data packet from the data stream received from the data stripper block. If the packet address is checked and the address is determined to be a broadcast address, the process moves to step S690 and the digital logic section 609 determines the type of message that is being sent.
  • the message may be an index of book titles, menu (and menu graphics) infonnation, announcements, special offerings, discounts, promotions, and previews, for example.
  • the process thenmoves to step S694 and the digital logic section 609 stores the message in an appropriate electronic message file. The process then returns to step S650to receive another data packet and perform another error check.
  • the library 262 is able to receive, store and update directories related to the textual data and graphical data (that can be used to depict pictures in a given book or to generate menus) . Variations ofthe processes are possible depending on the format ofthe data and operating system ofthe library 262.
  • Figure 10 shows an example ofthe processing of information requests from the viewer 266 at the library 262.
  • Information requests from the viewer 266 are received either through the cable connecting the viewer 266 to the library 262 or through wireless transmissions such as RF. It is possible in some embodiments for subscribers' requests to come from a set top converter box 602 (see Section V).
  • Information requests received from the viewer 266 generally fall into three categories : (1) directory data of books stored in the library 262, (2) index of all available books on the system, and (3) requests for a specific book (step S700).
  • the digital logic section 609 answers a request from the viewer 266 for a directory of data showing the books stored at the viewer 266. The directory of data is sent to the viewer 266 so that it may be displayed to the subscriber.
  • the digital logic section 609 handles requests from the viewer 266 for an index of all available books on the system.
  • the hbrary 262 will obtain an mdex of all the available books on the system and transmit that index, in step S712, with menu information to the viewer 266.
  • step S716 the digital logic section 609 replies to arequest from the viewer 266 for a specific book.
  • step S720 the digital logic section 609 opens an electronic file for the specific book requested by the viewer 266 and transmits the record or transmits the information on a packet-by-packet basis to the viewer 266. This process of transmitting the specific book, record, or packets to the viewer 266 continues until the last record or packet has been sent in step S724.
  • the library 262 also orders and receives specific books from the operations center 250 using the process as described in step S716. Following a request for a specific book which is not stored at the hbrary 262, the library 262 will proceed to deteimine the next available time the book will be on the video distribution system 208 or an alternative delivery system and ensure reception and storage of that book (process not shown). In performing this process the library 262 will transmit to the viewer information on when it will obtain the text data for the book so that the subscriber may view the book. In addition to timing information, price and other ordering information may also be passed by the library 262 to the subscriber, c. The Viewer
  • FIG 11 is ablock diagram of a viewer 266 showing its internal components.
  • the viewer 266 of Figure 11 is similar to the viewer 266 depicted in Figure 6b.
  • the viewer 266 is designed to physically resemble abound book.
  • the viewer 266 is made up of five primary components and seven optional components: (1) LCD display 602, (2) digital circuitry (not shown), (3) video graphics controller 607', (4) controls 740, (5) book memory 728, (6) optional power supply circuitry 736, (7) optional battery 603 ' , (8) optional RF transceiver 604, and (9) optional cellular or mobile connector (such as 611 ') (10) optional keyboards 267 and 268, and (11) an optional speaker/microphone 608', (12) optional alternative communication interface devices.
  • LCD display 602 (2) digital circuitry (not shown), (3) video graphics controller 607', (4) controls 740, (5) book memory 728, (6) optional power supply circuitry 736, (7) optional battery 603 ' , (8) optional RF transceiver
  • a high resolution LCD screen 602, ofVGA quality may be used by the viewer 266 to display text and graphic images.
  • the screen may be the size of one page of an electronic book.
  • a two page screen or two screens may also be used with the viewer 266.
  • Digital circuitry that includes a secure microprocessor 621 , instruction memory 732, and digital logic. Data is transferred to the viewer 266 in compressed and encrypted format.
  • the secure microprocessor 621 compares the ID number ofthe viewer 266 with the incoming data stream and only stores the text data if the ID number ofthe viewer 266 matches that within the mcoming data stream.
  • the viewer 266 may be configured to not output text data or other data and that the data is decompressed and decrypted only at the moment of viewing and only for the current page being viewed. These measures provide additional security against unauthorized access to data.
  • a video graphics controller 607 ' that is capable of assisting and displaying
  • VGA quality text and graphic images is included in the viewer 266.
  • the graphics controller 607 ' is controlled by the digital circuitry described above. Text may be displayed in multiple font sizes.
  • the viewer 266 of Figure 11 has touchpanel controls 740.
  • These unique and novel controls 740 allow the consumer to select stored electronic books and electronic books from catalogues, move a cursor, and turnpages in an electronic book.
  • the controls 740 include forward and reverse page buttons 742, 741 , a ball 743 for cursor movement, one or more selection buttons 745, a current book button 747 and a bookmark button 749 (see Figure 14a).
  • the controls 740 should be easy to use and conveniently located. Referring to Figure 14a, the controls for the viewer 266 may be located below the screen 602 at the bottom portion ofthe viewer 266.
  • the next page turn button 742 is the most used button 740 andis located towards the right edge ofthe page.
  • the subscriber is likely to use right hand thumb movements to work the controls particularly the page turn buttons 741 , 742. Therefore, the buttons may be arranged in such a manner that the buttons are easily controlled by a subscriber's right thumb. Generally, this can be accommodated either on the lower portion of the viewer 266 (as shown) or along the right hand margin ofthe viewer 266 (not shown) .
  • the current book button 747 and bookmark button 749 are usually the least used ofthe controls 740.
  • buttons 747, 749 are located on the inside portion to wards the binder of the viewer 266 Locating the ball 743 or other cursor movement device (such as four pointer arrows not shown) in the bottom center ofthe viewer 266 is both easier for the subscriber to use and easier in manufacturing the viewer 266.
  • the selection buttons for the cursor 745 may be located below the middle diameter ofthe cursor ball 743 on the right and left sides ofthe ball as shown. If pointer arrows are used for cursor movement, a selection button 745 may be located in the center ofthe four arrow buttons (not shown) . Again, the most used controls 740 should be located where a subscriber' s right hand thumb would normally rest.
  • Book memory 728 for at least one electronic book or more of text is included in the viewer 266.
  • the memory 728 stores text and any graphics, which represent pictures in a book.
  • the memory 728 can also store menu graphics data.
  • Two different memory 728 devices may be used in the viewer 266, one for the instructions for the microprocessor 621 in H e digital circuitry andasecondtypeofmemorymaybeusedforthebookmemory 728 (and graphics).
  • Various memory devices available on the market may be used such as, ROM, RAM or a small hard disk. Since an electronic book requires approximately 0.6 megabytes of storage, a small hard disk providing approximately 60 MBytes of storage provides memory to store approximately 100 electronic books.
  • Text for electronic books maybe displayed in various font sizes.
  • a variety of fonts are stored in instruction 732 or book memory 728.
  • larger or smaller fonts maybe recalled from memory 621, 728 to create displays desired by the subscriber.
  • Power supply circuitry 736 in the viewer 266 will accept power from either an AC power source or from an optional battery 603 ', or the library 262.
  • the power supply circuitry 736 provides the necessary voltages to accommodate the various systems within the viewer 266.
  • An optional battery 603 ' is provided in one embodiment.
  • the battery 603 ' is automatically recharged when AC power is available.
  • An optional RF transceiver 604 which provided two-way data linkbetween the viewer 266 and other components ofthe home subsystem can also be included in the viewer 266.
  • the viewer 266 may include a cellular transceiver (not shown) for mobile communications.
  • the optional wired (attached) keyboard 267 and wireless (e.g., RF) keyboard 268 maybe used with the viewer 266 to provide communications between the subscriber and the viewer 266.
  • the optional speaker and microphone 608 ' allow the viewer 266 to provide audio signals to the subscriber, and allow the subscriber to provide an audio input.
  • the speaker and microphone 608 ' may be used in conjunction with the cellular transceiver 608 or other telecommunications equipment to provide for reception and transmission of telephony and data.
  • the optional alternative communication interface devices allow the viewer 266 to make use of a variety of communication paths.
  • the viewer 266 of Figure 11 has parts available for providing connections to: a hbrary 744, electronic cardmemory 748, CD ROM units 752, and aportable memory unit 756 (such as that shown in Figure 6b as 600').
  • Various electronic memory cards such as PCMCIA can be used with the viewer 266 to supply and store electronic books.
  • Security, low power consumption and excellent display technology are desired features ofthe viewer 266 design.
  • the viewer 266 should be lightweight and portable.
  • the viewer 266 contains a software operating system that allows electronic books to be stored, read and erased and includes the capability to order electronic books and retain them in memory 728 for a predefined period of time determined by the system operator.
  • the software can be configured to allow the electromc book to be read during aperiod of time (i.e., two weeks) and then automatically erased, read once and erased, or held in memory permanently.
  • Each viewer 266 may have a unique key 605. All ofthe data storage may be encrypted with the key 605 for an individual viewer 266 to prevent more than one viewer 266 accessing the text file or electronic book file.
  • Figure 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes executed by the microprocessor
  • the viewer 266 may receive inputs from the subscriber through touch panel controls 740.
  • hi step S800 the subscriber's information requests are then processed by the microprocessor 621.
  • step S804 if the subscriber requests a menu of available electronic books, the microprocessor 621 will select an electronic book menu. Instep S808, the microprocessor 621 will open the electronic files that list the electronic books which are available (related to the category of topic ofthe menu) and display the menu with the names ofthe available electronic books.
  • step S812 the microprocessor 621 will process the selection and detein ine the electronic file that contains the specific electronic book.
  • step S816 the microprocessor 621 will open the file for that specific electronic book and normally access the firstpage. (If apointer has already been set in that books electronic file, the process may default to that page.)
  • step S820 the microprocessor 621 will then determine which page needs to be displayed. That is, the microprocessor 621 will detein-ine whether a next page, previous page or a bookmarked page needs to be displayed.
  • step S828 the microprocessor 621 will move the pointer and obtain the previous page of data from the stored file. Otherwise, in step S 824, the microprocessor 621 will normally obtain the next page of text from the stored electronic file.
  • step S832 the microprocessor 621 will decrypt and decompress the text data and send the data to the video display.
  • the video display will generally have a video display memory associated with it.
  • step S832 the microprocessor 621 will send the data directly to that video display memory. The circuitry for the display then completes the process of displaying the page of text.
  • step S 836 the microprocessor 621 imtiates power off.
  • step S840 the microprocessor 621 saves the pointer in memory to the page number in the book that the viewer 266 is currently reading
  • step S 844 the microprocessor 621 closes all the electronic files and signals the power circuitry to shut down the power to the various circuits in the viewer 266.
  • the electronic book system 200 may have amenu system 851 for selecting features and books from the electronic book system 200.
  • the operating software and memory required for the menu system 851 may be located at the viewer 266 (e.g. , the instruction memory 732 and/or book memory 728) . However, it can also be located at the library 262 (e.g., the instruction memory 632) or the library 262 and the viewer 266 can share the software and memory needed to operate the menu system 851. Since the menus are usually displayed on the viewer, and since the viewer 266 maybe capable of operating in the absence ofthe library 262, the basic software and memory to create the menus is more conveniently located at the viewer 266.
  • the menu system 851 allows sequencing between menus andprovides menu graphics for graphical displays such as on the LCD display 602 ofthe viewer 266.
  • these menus may also be displayed on a television screen
  • hi an electronic book system that uses a computer these menus may also be displayed on the computer monitor
  • hi an embodiment the menus provide just basic text information from which the subscriber makes choices
  • hi other embodiments the menus provide visual displays with graphics and icons to assist the subscriber and allow for subscriber interaction and real-time ordering of electronic books or other content available to the subscriber.
  • Figure 13 depicts the menu system 851 with sequencing.
  • the primary menus in the menu system 851 are an introductory menu 850, amainmenu 854 and various submenus 858.
  • Each level of submenus 858 may consist of multiple possible menus for display. The particular menu displayed depends on the selection by the subscriber on the previous shown menu. An example of this tree sequence of one to many menus are the help submenus 887, 888. Depending upon the specific help requested, a different level two help menu is displayed to the subscriber.
  • FIG 14a An example of an introductory menu 850 is shown on Figure 14a.
  • the introductory menu 850 introduces the viewer 266 to the system andprovides initial guidance, announcements and instruction.
  • the introductory menu 850 is followed by amainmenu 854, an example ofwhich is shown in Figure 14b.
  • the main menu provides the viewer 266 with the basic selection or features available in the system.
  • Figure 14b is an example of amammenu 854 offering many additional features and submenus 858 to the subscriber.
  • Figure 14b shows that the viewer 266 is able to choose by apoint and click method, many options including: (1) free previews, (2) books you can order, (3) books in your library, (4) your current book, (5) help, (6) on-line services and (6) other system features.
  • Figure 13 shows fourteen available primary or first level submenus. Theyare(l) account set up 862, (2) free previews 866, (3) book suggestion entries 855, (4) books in your library 872, (5) books you can order 878, (6) your current book 884, (7) help 887, (8) available features 890, (9) messages 893, (10) account information 896, (11) outgoing message submenu 898, (12) show links submenu 970, (13) create links submenu 980, and (14) show interactive files submenu 990.
  • Figure 14c is an example of a first level submenu for books in your library 872.
  • This "Book In Your Library” example submenu 872 shows six available books by title and author and provides the subscriber with the ability to check a different shelf of books 874 or return to the main menu 854.
  • Figures 14d and 14e show example submenus 858 for books that may be ordered using the "Books You Can Order" submenu 878.
  • Figure 14f is an example of a confirmation menu which confirms a subscribers order.
  • the subscriber is required to enter a PIN number to complete the subscriber's order. Any alpha-numeric or similar password may be used to ensure the subscriber is an authorized subscriber, hi one embodiment, the subscriber confirms an order with a PJN or password and then receives a final confirmation screen.
  • the final confirmation screen is primarily text and may state:
  • FIG. 14g Examples ofthe "Account Set Up Menu” 862 and further submenus 858 related to account set up (which provide instructions and account input 864) are shown in Figures 14g and Figure 14h. These submenus 858 allow initiahzation of an account at the operations center 250 and orders to be charged to credit cards.
  • the submenus 858 include the ability to enter data related to your desired PIN number or password, credit cards, phone numbers, etc. hi one embodiment, the account set up be performed using the telephone system.
  • a confirmation menu verifies that the account has been properly set up with the desired PIN or password and credit card.
  • Additional set-up methods are presented in Section VII.
  • Free previews for books 866 are also provided by submenus (868, 870). Examples ofthe free preview menus are shown in Figure 14i and Figure 14j .
  • Figure 14i shows a menu depicting various books for which previews are available for viewing. Following a book selection, a screen submenu showing an excerpt ofthe selected book cover's description is provided along with an excerpt from a critic's review of the selected book.
  • this preview screen for aparticular book also allows the subscriber to selecta submenu which provides information aboutthe author.
  • the book preview suhrnenu may also include a still video picture or graphics portraying abook cover or a scene from the book.
  • FIG 14j depicts apreview screen 870 about the author.
  • the author's preview screen 870 shows a picture ofthe author, provides a short biography, and may allow the subscriber to order the author ' s books.
  • the price for ordering the authors various books may also be shown on the menu.
  • the electronic book system 200 provides the subscriber with abook suggestion feature (see 855). This is accomplished using the menu system 851 and the processor with associated memory located at the viewer 266, library 262 or at the distribution point (1020 or 250). When necessary, information for the book suggestion feature is sent in the text data ofthe signal to the home system 258. With this feature, books or authors are suggested to a subscriber based upon historical data ofthe subscriber's previous orders, demographics or mood ofthe subscriber, other indicators, and/or by text word searches.
  • text word searches of preview information (such as book cover descriptions, critics reviews and biographies about the author) and/or text of books or other titles are performed by the library 262 using databases stored in the library memory 600.
  • Personalized book or author suggestions are made to the subscriber by obtaining information from the subscriber indicative of general subscriber interests.
  • Subscriber entries may be solicited from the subscriber using the book suggestion entry submenu 855. The system uses these subscriber entries either directly or indirectly to search for books or authors to suggest to the subscriber.
  • the electronic book suggestion methods may be categorized into two categories, either responsive methods (which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries), or intelhgent methods (which analyze data to suggest abook).
  • responsive methods which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries
  • intelhgent methods which analyze data to suggest abook.
  • the system 200 determines a list of suggested titles or authors and creates a second or third level submenu 856, 857 to suggest the titles for subscriber selection.
  • Responsive methods of suggesting titles include, for example, the use of mood questions, searching for authors, andkeyword searching.
  • the operations center' s 250 processor 404 and instruction memory 416 assign each title mood indicators (and sub-indicators) from a group such as light, serious, violent, short, long, dull, exciting, complex, easy-read, young theme, old theme, adventure, romance, drama, fiction, science-fiction, etc. These indicators are sent to the home system 258 with the text data and are stored in library memory 600.
  • the processor Based upon the subscriber entries, the processor associates a set of indicators with the subscriber' s request and a set of books with matching indicators are located for suggesting to the subscriber. Responsive searches for authors or keywords (a search word provided by the subscriber) are generally performed by the library processor 628 and instruction memory 632 on data stored in the library memory 600. For example, a keyword given by the subscriber may be searched for a match in library memory 600 storing the book reviews, critics and previews databases. Thus, if a subscriber provided an entry ofthe word "submarine" on an appropriate submenu, the title ' ⁇ unt For Red October' ' may be located by the microprocessor 628 using instruction from a routine in instruction memory 632.
  • Intelligent methods of suggesting programs include analyzing personal profile data on the subscriber and/or historical data about the subscriber such as past books ordered by the subscriber (or buy data). This method maybe performed at the distribution point or operations center 250 by the on-site processor 404 using subscriber databases stored in memory 428.
  • the home system 258 receives the text data mcluding program suggestion infonnation from the distribution point or operations center 250 and generates the program suggestion submenus 855, 856, 857usmgthesametextdatareceiving212 and viewer menu generation hardware (e.g., 607, 621) described above.
  • Software routines and algorithms stored in instruction memories e.g. 632, 732 are used to analyze historical data and book ordered data to determine a line of books to suggest to the subscriber.
  • submenus 858 are shown on the "Books In Your Library” submenu 872 and may be broken into shelf numbers with submenus for each shelf 874, 876.
  • the submenus 858 for the "Books You Can Order” submenu 878 is similarly broken out into submenus by shelves 880, 882. These shelves may each be a category or genre of books. Books may be grouped into categories such as best sellers, novels, fiction, romance, etc. See Figure 14d.
  • the submenu 858 for "Your Current Book” 884 allows a subscriber to select a current book 884 and then determine what page to view. This selection is confirmed with a level two submenu 885.
  • the help submenu 887 provides the subscriber with additional help screens 888.
  • the submenus 858 for available features 890 maybe broken out into a sequence of separate submenus for each feature 891, 892.
  • messages can also be sent with the electronic book selection and delivery system 200.
  • a level one message screen provides the subscriber with the ability to select from various messages the subscriber has pending 893. Each message is then shown on a separate submenu screen 894, 895.
  • the message may contain text and graphics.
  • account information is shown on a level one submenu 896 and then follow-on submenus 858 show the recent orders and your account balance 897.
  • level one submenu for outgoing messages 898 wliich has a follow-on submenu used as an input screen 899.
  • many other variations and features are possible.
  • the billing and collection system 278 (shown in Figures 2 and 3) utilizes the latest technology in electronic transaction and telephone switching to track orders, authorize deliveries, bill consumers, and credit publishers automatically.
  • the telephone calls initiated by the phone connector 270 are received by the billing and collection system 278 which responds immediately without human intervention by placing the order and charging the consumers credit card account. Data is compiled periodically and publishers 282 are credited for sales of their books or other text.
  • the billing and collection system 278 may also connect with subscribers through two-way cable connections, cellular, or other communication means. These additional methods are detailed in Section VII.
  • the billing and collection system 278 communicates with the operations center to track changes in available books and to provide statistical data to the operations center 250.
  • the electronic book system canbe modified to be used at public libraries, schools, bookstores, newsstands, or stand-alone kiosks.
  • Figure 15 shows one possible arrangement of components for the distribution location.
  • the main unit is the file server 900.
  • the file server 900 is a large electronic memory unit that can store thousands of books, newspapers, or periodicals.
  • Various electronic storage means maybe used in the file servers, such as hard disks, read-write CD ROMs and read-only CD ROMs.
  • the system comprises five components; the file server 900, a converter or video connector 904 or connector capable of interfacing to one ofthe alternative delivery systems presented in Section VII,' a controller 908, a viewer 912, and a catalog printer 916.
  • the software for controlling the system is primarily located in the controller 908.
  • the converter or video connector 904 is similar to those described above, hi this configuration the controller unit 908 monitors the data being transferred to the file server 900 by the converter 904.
  • the controller 908 may be provided with a viewing screen and several control buttons. When it is necessary to have a larger screen to perform more sophisticated controlling ofthe system a viewer 266 may be connected to the controller 908 and the viewer screen and controls 740 may be used.
  • the controller 908 is only able to download books to public viewers 912 which are authorized to receive books from the particular file server 900. Also for security reasons it is not desirable that the public viewer 912 have access to more than one file server 900. In this way, security can be maintained over the text data for books.
  • the public viewer 912 may be limited to receiving one or two books at a time from the controller 908. When the user ofthe public viewer 912 needs a new or additional book, the user returns the viewer 912 to the school or public library where the user receives a new book from the controller 908.
  • the titles ofthe available books may be printed on a catalog printer 916.
  • the catalog printer 916 is connected to the library controller 908 and the titles ofthe books are downloaded to the catalog printer 916.
  • the coded text for any of the electronic books may not be authorized for printing using the controller 908 and catalog printer 916.
  • none ofthe electronic book data may be allowed to be downloaded to the printer 916.
  • the bookstores can rent the public viewer 912 to customers with the text for one or two books loaded onto the public viewer912.
  • the pubhc viewer 912 may beprovided with an automatic timeout sequence.
  • the timeout sequence would erase the textual data for the books after a certainperiod of time, for example, two weeks. It is expected that after aperiod of time (perhaps within two weeks) the renter would return the public viewer 912 to the bookstore and receive additional books for viewing.
  • the bookstore to (permanently) sell a viewer 912 to a regular customer. The customer then returns to the bookstore from time to time to receive textual data for a book which the customer can then store pennanently on the customer's own viewer 912.
  • Various other configurations are possible for bookstores, schools and public libraries using the file server 900 and public viewer 912 described.
  • Figures 16a and 16b are examples ofhardware modifications or upgrades.
  • a port is used to attach hardware upgrades described below to a set top terminal.
  • Two upgrades are possible to set top converters 601 to assist in receiving and selecting electronic books, a menu generation card upgrade ( Figure 16a) and an information download unit ( Figure 16b).
  • Each of these upgrades maybe connected to the set top terminal unit through an upgrade port.
  • a four wire cable, ribbon cable, FireWire (IEEE 1394B) interface connector, USB connector, or the like may be used to connect the upgrade to the set top converter 601.
  • a card addition 950 to a set top converter 601 is depicted in Figure 16a.
  • the card 950 shown provides the additional.functionality needed to utilize the book selection system with existing set top converter 601 technology.
  • the card 950 may be configured to slip inside the frame of a set top terminal and become part ofthe set top te ⁇ ninal, an advanced set top terminal.
  • the primary functions the card 950 adds to the set top converter 601 are the interpreting of data signals, generating of menus, sequencing of menus, and, ultimately, the ability ofthe subscriber to select a book using either the television or a viewer 266.
  • the card 950 also provides a method for a remote location, such as the cable headend, to receive information on books ordered.
  • the books ordered information and control commands may be passed from the cable headend to the card 950 using telephone lines or alternative ordering methods as presented in Section VII.
  • the primary components ofthe card 950 are a PC chip CPU 952, a VGA graphic controller 954, a video combiner 956, logic circuitry 958, NTSC encoder 960, a receiver 962, demodulator (not shown), and a connector 611 ', which consists of a dialer.
  • the card 950 operates by receiving the data text signal from the cable headend through the coaxial cable.
  • the logic circuitry 958 ofthe card 950 receives data 964, infrared commands 966, and synchronization signals (not shown) from the set top converter 601.
  • Menu selections made by the viewer 266 on the remote control are received by the set top converter' s 601 IR equipment andpassed through to the card 950.
  • the card 950 interprets the IR signal and determines the book (or menu) the subscriber has selected.
  • the card 950 modifies the IR command to send the h-formation to the set top converter 601.
  • the modified IR command contains the channel information needed by the set top converter 601.
  • the card 950 is able to transmit electronic books ordered information to the cable headend. It is also possible to receive the electronic books over the telephone lines and other telecommunications networks, mcluding wireless networks, and by-pass the video distribution system.
  • IR commands 966 are transferred from set top tenninal 601 to hardware upgrade.
  • Hardware upgrades may include a microprocessor, interactive software, processing circuitry, bubble memory, and a long-term memory device. In addition to these basic components, the hardware upgrade may make use of an additional telephone modem or CD- ROM device.
  • An information download hardware upgrade 1001 shown in Figure 16b allows the subscriber to download large volumes of information from the operations center 250 or cable headend using a set top terminal 610.
  • the hardware upgrade 1001 will enable subscribers to download data, such as electronic books and electronic magazines, to local storage.
  • the hardware upgrade 1001 is an additional local storage unit 1003 (e.g., hard disk, floppy, optical disk or magnetic cartridge and may include a microprocessor 1005, instruction memory 1007, and arandom access memory 1009, as shown in Figure 16b).
  • a small portable viewer may also provided with the upgrade 1001 to enable downloaded text to be read without the use of a television.
  • the downloadable information may be text or graphics supplied by the operations center 250 or cable headend.
  • electronic books may be downloaded and read anywhere with the viewer 266. Usmg the upgrade 1001, electronic books maybe downloaded and stored in compressed form for later decompression. The electronic books may be decompressed only at the time of viewing. Important text that the public desires immediate access may made available through this system. Text such as the President's speech, a new law, or a recent abortion decision rendered by the Supreme Court may be made immediately available.
  • electronic book ordering information is stored at each set top terminal 610 until it is polled by the cable headend using apolhng request message format.
  • a polling request message format consists of six fields, namely: ( 1 ) a leading flag at the beginning ofthe message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end ofthe message.
  • P/F polling command/response
  • a similar response frame format for information communicated by the set top tem-inal to the cable headend in response to the polling request may be used.
  • Figure 17 shows components of a set top terminal 610'.
  • the components include a data receiver 617' and a data transmitter 1011.
  • the data transmitter provides upstream data communications capability between the set top te ⁇ nhial 610' and the cable headend. Upstream data transmissions are accomplished using the polling system described and, using a data transmitter 1011. Both receiver 617' and transmitter 1011 may be built into the set top terminal 610' itself or added through an upgrade module. Regardless ofthe specific hardware configuration, the set top tennina! s data transmission capabilities may be accomplished using the hardware shown in Figure 17.
  • FIG 17 shows RF signals, depicted as being received by a data receiver 617' and tuner 613 working in unison. Both of these devices are interfaced with the microprocessor 1013, which receives inputs 1015, from the subscriber, either through a set top terminal' s keypad, aremotecontrolunitorviewer266. Generally, all cable signals intended for reception on the subscriber's TV are accessed by the tuner 613 and subsequently processed by the processing circuitry 1017.
  • This processing circuitry 1017 typically includes additional components (not shown) for descrambling, demodulation, volume control andremodulation on a Channel 3 or 4 TV carrier. Data targeted to individual set top terminals is received by the data receiver 617' according to each set top terminal's specific address or ID.
  • each addressable set top terminal 610' only receives its own data.
  • the data receiver 617' may receive set top terminal 610' specific data in the information field ofthe signal frame described or on a separate data carrier located at a convenient frequency in the incoming spectrum.
  • the received data includes information regarding electronic books and menus available for selection.
  • the subscriber may enter a series of commands 1015 using a keypad or remote control in order to choose an electronic book or menu.
  • the set top terminal' s microprocessor 1013 instructs the tuner to tune to the proper frequency of the channel carrying data and subsequently instructs the processing circuitry 1017 to begin descrambling of this data.
  • the microprocessor 1013 Upon selection of an electronic book, the microprocessor 1013 stores any selection information in local memory (not shown) for later data transmissionback to the cable headend.
  • the set top terminal' s microprocessor 1013 coordinates all CATV signal reception and also interacts with various upstream data transmission components.
  • the data transmitter 1011 operates in the return frequency band between 5 and 30 MHZ. In an alternative embodiment, the frequency band of 10 to 15 MHZ may be used. Regardless, however, ofthe frequency band used, the data fransmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field ofthe response frame described.
  • the data fransmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field ofthe response frame described.
  • the electronic book system 200 described may also be configured in abook-on- demand style.
  • Figure 18a shows one example of a configuration for a book-on-demand system.
  • a book on demand system requires more powerful two-way communications between the consumer's home, bookstore, school or public library and either the operations center 250 or a distribution site 1020 such as the cable headend, h one embodiment, this type of two- way communication can be provided by the hardware shown in Figure 17 and described above. Additional methods related to alternative communication paths are presented in Section VII.
  • the subscriber selects the book to be download from an available menu ofbooks (see for example Figures 14d and 14e) .
  • the data for menus of available books is usually sent to the subscriber location by the distribution site 1020.
  • information about the subscriber selection (or request) is then communicated to either a distribution point 1020 (such as a cable headend) or the operations center 250.
  • a distribution point 1020 such as a cable headend
  • the operations center 250 Upon receipt of this request, the needed textual and graphical information for the book is spooled and sent to the subscriber, h this manner, electronic books are only sent when requested by the subscriber and are sent nmediately upon demand for the electronic book (or text).
  • the text delivery and distribution must be conducted on a strong nodal architecture distribution system, such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system, through use of individual telephone calls on the public telephone system or cellular phone system, tlirough the use ofthe hitemet, or anumber of other data network options.
  • a strong nodal architecture distribution system such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system
  • the book-on-demand system allows for a greater selection of electronic books to the subscriber and limits the amount of communicated book data that is unnecessary or unneeded. It also provides the electronic book to the subscriber in a much timelier fashion.
  • a book-on-demand system requires a distribution point 1020 to have more sophisticated equipment to access and "spool out" the textual information.
  • file server technology 1024 for storing the books and distribution technology such as ATM 1028 or telephone-type switching (not shown) to distribute the textual information.
  • the file server 1024 and distribution technology that can be used in configuring such a book-on-demand system is described in U.S. Patent No. 5,262,875 and U.S. Patent 5,218,695, cited above.
  • Figure 18a shows an embodiment for a book-on-demand system that utilizes file server technology.
  • the embodiment of Figure 18a will support distribution of nearly any digital data.
  • Books or textual files are received from publishers 282 and other sources through local feeds 1032, ATM 1028, or by satelhte dish 1036, for example.
  • the data is then stored in memory 1040 at the file server 1024.
  • the distribution point 1020 is a cable headend that receives requests from subscribers and delivers text to subscribers over a two-way communication system (such as a video-on-demand system (VOD) 1044).
  • VOD video-on-demand system
  • the hbrary 262 can be connected to either abasic premium-type service cable system 1048, a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052) or a video- on-demand cable system 1044. In connecting with either of these three systems the library 262 may access the cable directly or may access the system through a set top terminal 601 ' , 601 " , or 601'".
  • a basic premium-type service cable system 1048 a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052) or a video- on-demand cable system 1044.
  • PSV pay-per-view
  • the distribution point 1020 transmits a list of available books through the cable dehvery system to the library 262.
  • the library 262 displays the list of available books on amenu or similar format.
  • the hbrary 262 may use menus which list categories of available books to form its request from the distribution point 1020. After selecting a book the library 262 then sends a request signal on the two-way communication system 1044 back to the distribution point 1020. This request signal can be handled in two ways.
  • the hbrary 262 either initiates the request or the distribution point 1020 polls the various libraries on to the two-way system 1044. Upon receiving the request for the book title, the text associated with that book title is transmitted to the library 262 using the two-way cable system 1044.
  • Figure 18b is an expanded view of an operations center 250 that supports a regional or national book-on-demand system.
  • the operations center 250 shown supports distribution of nearly any digital data.
  • the operations center 250 supports multiple feeds to receivedigitalinfonnationbytape 1060, 1060', ATM 1028, orsatellite 1036.
  • the information is processed through an input MUX 1064 and a small file server 1068 before reaching the master file server 1072.
  • Digital data such as books received from publishers 282 is then stored on the master file server 1072.
  • the digital data may be stored compressed in a standard format such as MPEG2.
  • a system controller 1076 provides control over the regional or national book-on- demand system. Books may be packaged into groups to provide feeds to various cable headends.
  • book buy data is received at the operations center 250 through a multiplexer 1082.
  • Book buy information can be provided by the operation center 250 to the billing and collection system 278.
  • the operations center 250 is also equipped to insert messages or advertisements into the file server. These messages or advertisements will eventually be received by the subscribers.
  • the master file server 1072 uses an output multiplexer 1080 and ATM 1028 as well as satellite connections to distribute digital data, hi one embodiment, cable headends receive text data onbooks from the master file server 1080 through the output multiplexer 1028 and an ATM system 1028. After receiving the digital book data, the cable headends store the books in a local file server 1024.
  • Figure 18a's distribution point 1020 is an example of a cable headend which may receive data from the operations center 250 of Figure 18b tlirough an ATM hookup 1088 or satellite hookup. VII. Alternative Delivery And Ordering Methods
  • Electronic books and related data may be provided to subscribers by use of an on-demand delivery system in which electronic books are delivered after an order is received by the delivery system.
  • the delivery system may supply the electronic books in real time or near-real time (i.e., near on-demand), or after a delay period that allows the delivery system to process, package and transmit the electronic book.
  • the delivery system may broadcast one or more electronic books in a continuous fashion, m this alternative, the subscriber indicates a desired electronic book from a list ofthe broadcast electronic books.
  • the delivery system may include a billing system that debits a subscriber's account, or debits a credit card, for example, upon delivery ofthe electronic book.
  • the dehvery system may provide a local authorization code that allows the subscriber to decrypt, store and view the desired electronic book.
  • Alternative delivery systems and methods are disclosed in pending U.S. Application Serial No. 09/289,956 entitled, ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY METHODS, filedApril 13, 1999, andU.S. Application SerialNo.09/427,938 entitled, VIRTUAL ON- DEMAND ELECTRONIC BOOK, filed October 27, 1999, the disclosure of wliich are incorporated by reference. a. Internet Delivery Methods
  • Figure 19 is an alternate dehvery plan 301' that provides for electromc book delivery using the Internet.
  • the publishers 282 provide the electronic books to be posted at the Internet web site 279.
  • the publishers may convert the text and graphical data to digital format, compress the digital data, and upload the compressed digital data to the Internet web site 279.
  • the publishers 282 may arrange for an outside conversion activity 283 to convert the text and graphical data to digital format.
  • the conversion activity 283 may then provide the digital data to the Internet web site 279.
  • a large on-line bookstore could gather pubhcations in electronic form from a variety of publishers, or could convert hard- copy books to electronic form, and post the electronic books on the Internet such as at the Internet web site 279.
  • the electronic books may then be transferred using a public switched telephone network (PSTN), for example, or other communications systems, directto asubscriber285, a library 286 and abookstore 287.
  • PSTN public switched telephone network
  • the library 286 and the bookstore 287 may also provide electronic books to the subscriber 285.
  • the billing and collecting functions may be incorporated into the Internet web site 279.
  • a subscriber may pay for an electronic book selection by entering a credit card number into a data field of apage ofthe Internet web site 279.
  • a separate billing and collection system may not be required.
  • the Internet web site 279 may communicate info ⁇ nation with the billing and collection system 278.
  • Electronic book dehvery over the Internet may be handled using a number of methods.
  • the electronic book may be downloaded to the requesting home system 258 immediately after the order hasbeen processed.
  • the electronic book may be e- mailed to an e-mail address that is entered as part ofthe ordering process.
  • the subscriber is provided with location and authorization information that allows the subscriber to retrieve the ordered electronic book at the subscriber's convenience.
  • the Internet web site 279 can dehver the latest version ofthe product to the subscriber automatically immediately upon logon by the subscriberto the Internet web site 279.
  • Electronic book data may also be embedded into continuous multicast streaming video, audio, or data feeds.
  • Delivery methods that allow for dedicated, full time delivery can be used to provide continuous distribution of electronic book data including requested electronic books from subscribers, electronic books to be broadcast to all subscribers, updated menu contents, and updated advertising.
  • the operations center 250 may manage the timing and delivery of content by delivering the electronic book only when requested, or periodically, to ensure dehvery for those home systems that may not be able to receive the delivery.
  • delivery methods that are capable of two-way communication may be used to provide a return path to the operations center 250 or billing and collection system 278 for the purpose of ordering or requesting updated electronic book information.
  • Two-way communications paths may be used to allow linldng from an electronic book home system 258 or viewer 266 to external nodes that provide world watch live content.
  • the home system 258 is presented as an independent device that directly interfaces with the delivery system 200, the home system 258 may connect to the delivery system 200 tlirough a set top terminal, TV, PC, radio, or any other device capable of receiving the signal provided by the delivery system 200. Additionally, the home system 258 may not be an independent apparatus, having some or all of its functionality supported vvithin the set top terminal, TV, PC, radio, or any other device capable of receiving the signal provided by the delivery system. b. Alternative Ordering Methods
  • the modular connector 701 may be used to provide the specific protocol foimatting and transmission processing to allow the home system 258 to use the communication path.
  • the modular connector 701 includes the phone connector 270 and the modem 611 as depicted in Figure 6b .
  • the modular connector 701 includes the cellular phone or PCN phone 611' as depicted in Figure 6b.
  • a feature provided by delivery methods using a wireless broadcast system, satellite broadcast system, wireless personal communication system, orterrestrial television broadcast system is mobility ofthe electronic book home system 258 or viewer 266.
  • This mobility allows for ordering and receiving electronic book data anytime or anywhere, from sitting on a beach in Florida to sitting on a bus in New York City.
  • This mobility allows for the delivery of electronic book data subscription products such as daily newspapers, monthly magazines, or books from book-of-the-month clubs. These subscription products may be delivered automatically to the appropriate home system 258 or electronic book viewer 266.
  • Enhanced end-to-end e ⁇ or correction techniques can be added to the transmission system to ensure liigherprobabihtyofreceiptfor esemobileenviroiiments.
  • transmissionmethods may be implemented that resend packets of electronic book data, changing their delivered order on each resend, to improve likelihood of receipt.
  • an electronic book file may be broken up into packets and the packets sent a limited number of times. If the electronic book file is not received completely, the electronic book viewer 266 may initiate a request to the operations center 250 to resend only that portion ofthe electronic book file yet to be received.
  • Electronic Book Link System Electronic book links allow the subscriber to use the electronic book viewer 266 to traverse pre-defined paths between content in their currently viewed electronic book to related information contained either elsewhere in the electronic book, elsewhere on the viewer 266, or external to the viewer 266, including in the library unit 262 or in a connected Internet web site. These links provide an organized and methodical method for the subscriber to quickly access related topic areas or seek clarification ofthe currently viewed material.
  • An electronic book includes first locations, or components, such as words, phrases, sentences, sections of text, paragraphs, pages, chapters, figures, drawings, maps, video clips, and audio clips.
  • Links to second and subsequent locations, or components, contained in the same electronic document or in another related electronic document, file, or database canbe associated with each of these first components.
  • First components with underlying links canbe highlighted and displayed on the viewer display 602 or on the connected television 259 or a personal computer 261 (see Figure 2).
  • First components that have underlying links associated with them may be identified by assigning them a unique identifier.
  • the unique identifier can be a word or phrase, an alpha-numeric value, a coordinate point, or other unique identifier.
  • each such first location may be assigned an identifying index value.
  • the use ofthe index value allows the first components to maintain links with other components, even if the electronic book is altered. For example, a subscriber may use a cut andpaste edit feature to move ablock of text containing a first component. Cutting andpasting will not affect the status ofthe first component and its links to other components. Similarly, changing font style or font size will not affect the status ofthe links.
  • the electronic book may undergo aprocess thatmaps identifying index values to each ofthe first components. These index values can then be accessed by software directives that drive the presentation of alternative or linked material (e.g., material at one ofthe second locations) once a selection is made.
  • these index values maybe contained in ahidden table that maps the identifying index values of all first components with underlying links to the location of the linked material (the second location).
  • each such first component may be linked to one or many linked material locations. That is, the first component may be linked to a second component, a third component and so on.
  • An example of a hidden table is presented below.
  • a first location “Cezzanne” has an identifying index value 135.
  • "Cezzanne” has three links.
  • a link to a second location is to an art encyclopedia.
  • a link to a third location is to an electronic dictionary that provides a pronunciation guide.
  • a link to a fourth location is to an audio file that plays a short biography ofthe artist.
  • Each ofthe second, third and fourth locations have their own index valueiinked material location information (i.e., the location of second and subsequent components) can include source location, book name, chapter, page, line, and word as identified by their index value.
  • the source location will provide the delivery system 200 the necessary information to contact the operations center 250, the Internet web site 279 (see Figure 2) or another electronic database and request the appropriate material for retrieval and download if it currently does not reside on the viewer 266 or the home system 258.
  • the location information in the hidden table allows the operations center 250 or home system 258 to retrieve the desired material from the Internet web site 279 or from the electronic database.
  • the processor in the viewer 266 can cause the linked material to be displayed without any communications with an outside source.
  • the first component is the name "Cezzanne" and the linked material, or second location, is in an electronic dictionary stored i the viewer 266, the viewer 266 can display the electronic dictionary entry for "Cezzanne.' '
  • This linked material may be displayed full screen, in a pic ture-in-picture window, or as an overlay, for example. The entry can also remain hidden, until a user ofthe viewer 266 commands the entry to be displayed.
  • the software directive dete ⁇ nines the identifying index values associated with the selected component, searches the table for the index values ofthe selection made, looks up the corresponding linked location, accesses the location, and displays the linked material on the viewer 266.
  • the linked material can be displayed on the viewer 266 in place ofthe original source material, or simultaneously with the original source material by displaying the linked material in a picture-in-picture window, via a split screen, or via a screen overlay.
  • Figure 20 shows a portion of a page of electronic text having one or more electronic links.
  • the display 602 may include a show links button 606 and ahelp button 612.
  • the show links button 606 may be used to display alinkmenu971 (see Figure 13 and Figure21).
  • the viewer 266 can be commanded, via the show links button 606, to display all components that have underlying links.
  • the components may be displayed in a highlighted mode, in a different color, in a unique font, bold or italic typeface, underlined, outlined, or in reverse background mode, for example.
  • the cursor 745 is used to identify the desired selected item.
  • the ball 743 is used to guide the cursor 745 across the page to the desired selected item, and the selection button is used to make the selection.
  • cursor movement for screen navigation can be provided via devices such as a fingerpad, mouse, or joystick. Selection can also be made by incorporating a touch-sensitive screen into the viewer 266.
  • Figure 20 depicts the display before commanding the viewer 266 to show links.
  • Figure 21 shows the display once the request has been made to display all underlying links .
  • Figure 21 shows the link menu 971 , a help button 612, and a multi-function button, or pull-down menu, 614.
  • the multi-function button 614 can be used as a return button, ahide active links button, and a restore active links button, for example. Alternately, several additional buttons may be provided to select these features .
  • the multi-function button 614 may be active when the show links button 606 has been operated, hi Figure 21 , the components having underlying links are "PorchScene by Cezzanne” and “Cezzanne.”
  • the component “PorchScene by Cezzanne” is shown with one link and the component “Cezzanne” is shown with three links.
  • the link menu 971 that lists the links, or components, the link number and a description ofthe linked material.
  • the material linked to the component "PorchScene by Cezzanne” is a JPEG video file showing the painting.
  • an on-screen return button 614 allows the subscriber to return from the linked material back to the originally viewed text.
  • the show links button 606 (see Figure 20) can be displayed on the viewer 266 either at all times that an electronic book is open, any time an underlying link exists, or only when commanded to do so from the viewer's menu system 851.
  • the subscriber can command the linked material to be placed in a hidden state by operating the hide active link button 614 or by use ofthe menu system 851.
  • the restore active link button 614 is displayed. Operation ofthe restore active link button 614 will display the material linked by the active link.
  • the on screen "Help" menu 887 provides access to further assistance when selecting links.
  • the Help menu 887 is accessed by operation ofthe on- screen help button 612. Related link options will be available for display on the viewer 266 by selecting the Help menu 887, using the cursor 745 to do so.
  • the "Help" function allows the subscriber to select wliich specific links to be displayed on-screen. The links when displayed maybe simply l ighhghted portions of text, or text in different colors. All links for the displayed page can be selected to be displayed. Alternatively, by selecting a range of content in an electronic book that may have multiple underlying links, only links associated with the components within the selected range will be presented on the viewer 266 for the subscriber to select the specific link desired.
  • a fixed number of links maybe selected to be displayed on the screen at a time.
  • only a certain type of link may be selected to be displayed.
  • the types of links that are available for display may be listed in apop-up menu. The subscriber can choose from this pop-up menu which ofthe links to display.
  • the pop-up menu could list links for a dictionary and links to an Internet web site. The subscriber could choose to display only the dictionary links.
  • Figure 22 depicts the menu screen 981 used to manage the subscriber's filtering of links to view.
  • Figure 23 is a logical representation ofthe components and links for the example first component "Cezzanne" shown in Figure 20.
  • the text block (page) 602' containing the first component Cezzanne 980 is shown linked to components in other electronic files or documents.
  • a first link 981 links Cezzanne 980 to areference material component 982, which is an encyclopedic entry related to the artist.
  • a second link 983 links Cezzanne 980 to a dictionary entry 984 that includes apronunciationkey for the artist's name.
  • a third link 985 links Cezzanne 980 to an audio clip 986, wliich provides an audio file describing the artist's life.
  • the audio file will ⁇ nmediately begin playing and will be broadcast on a speaker in the viewer 266, or the attached television or the attached personal computer, as applicable.
  • the subscriber can stop the playback by operating the hide active link button 614.
  • a biography of Cezzanne could include a link to the JPEG file showing PorchScene.
  • the JPEG file PorchScene could be one of several still videos ofthe artist's work.
  • This JPEG file could be linked to an appropriate section ofthe Cezzanne biography.
  • the subscriber could display the link to the biography and, upon activating the link, have displayed that portion ofthe biography that discusses PorchScene.
  • the same link is used to display either the JPEG file or text from the biography.
  • the same hidden table can be used with the two electronic files (i.e., the biography and the JPEG file). Alternately, each electronic file may have its own hidden table. In this alternative, the same link may be referenced in each ofthe hidden tables.
  • each first component is linked to one or more other components.
  • the other components i.e., the second and third components, for example
  • other components linked to one first component may be crossed-linked to other components that are linked to a second first component (identifying secondary or tertiary cross-links).
  • the JPEG file of PorchS cene referred to in Figure 21 may be cross-linked to the audio file-biography shown in Figure 21. Displaying the JPEG file will result in a cross-link being identified that links the JPEG file to the audio file.
  • the cross-link may be indicated by ghhghting, underhnmg, outlining, using abold or an italics typeface, using a different font, and using different color text. If the cross-linked material is selected, that material will then be displayed, h the example described above, the JPEG video file that shows the painting PorchScene can be cross-linked with Cezzanne and its identity would be displayed on the viewer 266.
  • the video file could be displayed full screen or in a picture-in-picture format.
  • the video file could also be displayed on the attached television 259 or the personal computer 261 (see Figure 2) .
  • the video file could be printed by sending the video data and a print command to a printer 262 attached to the home system 258 or to the personal computer 261.
  • each electronic book may be provided with a hidden table, hi this alternative, the many hidden tables could form a relational database of linked material.
  • several different electronic medical text books could each be provided with its own hidden table.
  • An electronic general medical encyclopedia could also be provided with ahidden table. Terms that are listed in one ofthe several medical electronic text books could then be linked, in a relational fashion to the electronic medical encyclopedia.
  • the several electronic medical text books could also be relationally linked to each other, to on-liiie databases and to other electronic files.
  • an electronic medical text book couldbe electronically linked to electronic books, databases and other electronic files maintained at a medical school's library.
  • the hidden table (either for many electronic books, or individually for each electronic book) may be provided by the central provider or distributor as an additional feature that is paid for separately from purchasing an electronic book.
  • the distributor may offer many different levels of service, such as only linking material (components) stored on a viewer, only linking material wilhin a particular electronic book, or linking one or more electronic books to electronic files outside the home system 258 (e.g. , linking an electronic book to a database maintained by the distributor at an Internet web site).
  • Downloading the most current links table for an electronic book from the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 refreshes the hidden links table, that is, any new links that have been generated by the operations center 250, for example, are added to the hidden links table.
  • the current links table maybe downloaded in conjunction with downloading anew electronic book. Alternately, the current links table may be provided periodically by the operations center 250.
  • links wilhin electronic books maybe self-contained in nature, where all the material to be linked to is resident within the same electromc book file. Additionally, links may also be provided between material residing on the viewer 266. Also, links may be provided to material that currently resides on the home system 258, if separate from the viewer 266. Finally, links may be provided to material that must be accessed tlirough a communications network. For example, material that is ordered or downloaded from the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 may be linked to the electronic book.
  • On screen menus can also be supported on the viewer 266 in the form of electronic book files, serving as abook or product catalog or service catalog that allows the subscriber to link to the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 to order additional electronic books or products and services at any time by selecting the desired component from the text.
  • the viewer 266 may prompt the subscriber to decide whether to : 1) retrieve the corresponding material immediately from the home system 258, the operations center 250, or the Internet web site 279; 2) wait until the next communication opportunity with the home system 258 or operations center 250 to retrieve the material; 3) commence direct outside communications with another communications system (e.g., a telephone in aPSTN); or 4) stop.
  • the first components on the viewer 266 are a Table of Contents and List of Figures for a book. Making a selection from the Table of Contents and List of Figures automatically links to and displays the selectedpage within the electronic book file, hi another embodiment, the first components on the viewer 266 may be an Index of an electronic book.
  • the first component is a footnote or endnote. When the footnote is selected, the viewer 266 provides a display of material that further addresses the reference.
  • the first component is a word or phrase that has a further definition or clarification associated with it. By selecting the first component, the corresponding dictionary definition, foreign translation, or glossary entry will be displayed on the viewer 266.
  • the dictionary definition or foreign translation may also be provided via an audio file.
  • electronic books can be bundled with other standard reference material or alternatively, stand-alone reference material like dictionaries or encyclopedias may be accessed from within multiple electronic book files.
  • the first component is a reference to another electronic book altogether. By selecting the first component, the selected book is displayed on the viewer 266. hi another embodiment, on-screen menu buttons will be displayed on the viewer screen 602 that allow for a quick link to the Table of Contents, Index, glossary, and other key electronic book sections by simply selecting the item on the viewer screen 602 with the cursor 745.
  • the selected first component links the subscriber to a book review or series of book reviews, providing additional information to assist in the decision of selecting a new electronic book.
  • the selected first component is a book title, chapter title, or text in the body of a book that is linked to an audio file that serves as an audio narration ofthe selection that is played on the viewer 266.
  • the selected first component links to a video file (JPEG or MPEG) that can be displayed on the viewer screen 602. Another embodiment is a first component that links to textual annotations and notes that have been created by the subscriber.
  • One embodiment includes first or subsequent components that are electronic book titles that, when selected, links the subscriber to the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 to allow for the ordering ofthe selected book.
  • the selected • component consists of a product that, when selected, link the subscriber to the operations center 250 site or an Internet web site to allow for the ordering ofthe selected product.
  • the selected component is a topic on wliich there is a link to an Internet-based discussion group that addresses the topic in more detail.
  • Another embodiment is a link to a world watch live server/site.
  • a link When a link is provided to link a word or phrase to a foreign language dictionary, the viewer 266 may display a foreign language selection feature. The subscriber may then indicate which language to use when activating the link. For example, an Enghsh word or phrase in the electronic book may be linked to a French, Spanish or German dictionary. The subscriber may specify which of these foreign language dictionaries to link to. IX. Connection To World Watch Live The viewer 266 may also be used to display live or recorded video. The video may be distributed using a telecommunications system, mcluding dehvery using the hitemet. Access to video may be provided using links within an electronic book or on an electronic book menu display.
  • A. Obtaining Video From Remote Sites, Communicating the Video to a Web Site, and Streaming the Video To Users.
  • Figure 24 shows a system that provides video, audio and text data from remote video sources such as videocassettes and television programs.
  • Figure 24 shows remote sites 2102, remote cameras 2104, videocassette 2106, compression devices 2108,2114, digital storage device 2110 and web site 2112.
  • a video camera 2104 is used to film activity at remote site 2102.
  • numerous video cameras at a single remote site may be used to obtain different views, text, and audio (for example, stereophonic) ofthe remote site from different angles and orientations.
  • numerous remote sites, each with its own video camera may used as shown at 2102', 2102" and 2104' and 2104".
  • the video cameras film events at the remote sites, and record the events on videocassette 2106 or other suitable media.
  • the recorded information is then transported to a web site 2112, or to a site in communication with the web site 2112.
  • the recorded mformation from video tape 2106 is then compressed in compression unit 2108 and stored in digital storage media 2110.
  • Many compression algorithms may be used, such as MPEG- 1 , MPEG-2 and Wavelet. Compression systems currently available from The Duck Corp, Xing Technology Corp., Indeo, Digital Video Arts, Ltd., VDOnet Corp. and Intel Corp., maybe used with the system.
  • the digital storage media may be any known storage device, such as a hard disk, CD ROM, digital video disc (DVD), digital tape, video file server or other media.
  • the stored and compressed data may then be provided on a number of streamed audio-video outputs 2116 from the web site 2112.
  • This enables many users to access the stored video, text, and audio, and allows for one user to receive numerous audio-video signals, i.e. split the display into numerous "camera” feeds.
  • the web site In addition to providing streamed audio and video from videocassette, the web site
  • the 2112 may provide audio, text, and video from television channels.
  • the television signals are received by a conventional television receiver (not shown in Figure 24), and digitally compressed by the compression unit 2114 and fed through the web site 2112 to the streamed output. It is not nonnally necessary to store the television programs in a digital storage unit (such as the storage unit 2110), since the audio, text, and video is constantly incoming and changing. However, certain segments of broadcast television may be stored in a storage device, such as the digital storage unit 2110, for recall by a user.
  • Figure 25 shows another system for supplying video, audio and text data, where similar reference numerals indicate items that correspond to the items shown in Figure 24.
  • the system of Figure 25 uses remote cameras and a communication network to provide remote video to the web site.
  • Figure 25 shows remote sites 2102, video cameras 2104, compression unit 2118, data communication network 2120, web site 2130, digital storage unit 2132, and streamed video 2116.
  • the remote sites 2102 are filmed by cameras 2104 (as in Figure 24). However, in this system, the outputs ofthe cameras 2104 pass through a compression unit 2118. The compressed audio, text, and video is communicated over the data communication network 2120 to the web site 2130.
  • the data communication network 2120 may be any network currently known to one of ordinary skill in the art, such as land-leased lines, satellite, fiber optic cable, microwave link or any other suitable network. These and other delivery systems are described in more detail in Section VII.
  • Suitable networks maybe cellular networks or paging networks.
  • the cameras 2104 may be connected to apaging device and/or digital storage media or paging transmitter for communication ofthe video (including text and still images — as used hereinafter, video refers to moving and still images, and to text data) to the web site 2130.
  • the following publications hereby incorporated by reference, disclose relevant systems: PCT Publication No. WO 96/07269, published March 7, 1996 by Jambhekar et al.; PCT PublicationNo. WO 96/21173, pubhshed July 11, 1996by Harris et al.; PCTPubhcationNo. WO 96/21205, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al.
  • the web site 2130 in this example is adapted to receive info ⁇ nation from the data communication network 2120.
  • the web site may pass the video from cameras 2104 to users at streamed video outputs 2116.
  • the web site may contain a decompressor to decompress the video prior to streaming it to users, or change the compression scheme ofthe video to one wliich is compatible with the connected user.
  • the video may be compressed at the streamed video output and users who connect to the web site 2130 may run decompression software.
  • the web site 2130 may store the audio and video received over data communication network 2120 in digital storage unit 2132 before providing it to the streamed outputs 2116.
  • the audio and video may be directly passed to the streamed outputs 2116.
  • Figure 26a shows another embodiment ofthe invention that combines the embodiments of Figures 24 and 25 and adds remote camera control.
  • Figure 26a shows remote sites 2102, cameras 2104, computer 2134, video path 2122, 2129, control path 2124, 2126, 2128, compressors 2108, 2114, 2118, 2136 data communication network 2120, web site 2140, digital storage means 2132, and streamed video 2116.
  • remote sites 2102 are filmed by the cameras 2104.
  • the web site 2140 is able to receive data from the video tape 2106, compress the audio and video in the compression unit 2108, and store the compressed audio and video in the digital storage unit 2110. Audio and video from television stations may also be compressed by the compression unit 2114 and stored or passed as streamed video 2116, as in Figure 24.
  • the cameras 2104 may be connected to the compression unit 2118 (as in Figure 25) and communicate compressed audio and video to the web site2140 via the data communicationnetwork2120.
  • the functions performed by the systems shown in Figures 24 and 25 may be combined in a variety of manners at the single web site 2140.
  • Figures 26a and 26b add the additional feature of camera control to the previously described systems.
  • the computer 2134 is connected to the remote cameras 2104.
  • the computer is able to control a mechanical or electrical device on the cameras 2104, to alter the cameras' orientation (including position and/or angle). Audio and video from the camera 2104 passes to the computer 2134.
  • the video may be processed and stored in the computer.
  • the computer may be connected to multiple remote cameras 2104' and 2104" so that multiple users may each control a camera.
  • the computer 2134 may either contain a compressor or be connected to an external compression unit 2136.
  • the video from cameras 2104' and 2104" is compressed and provided to data communications network 2120. This compressed video is subsequently received by the web site 2140.
  • the remote cameras 2104', 2104" ( Figure 26b) maybe controlled by control signals passed from the computer 2134 on the path 2124.
  • the control signals are received by the computer 2134 from the data communications network 2120 overthe camera control path 2126.
  • the web site 2140 provides the control information to the data communications network 2120 over path 2128.
  • the web site 2140 in this system is adapted to pass control signals to the cameras 2104 and to store video images in the digital storage unit 2132.
  • the web site 2140 provides a number of streamed video outputs 2116.
  • the system shown in Figure 26a allows remote users to control the angle or orientation of cameras 2104', 2104". Users are connected to the web site2140 andreceivethe streamed video 2116 from the cameras 2104', 2104".
  • the users may enter auser command (such as "panright") at their te ⁇ ninal.
  • the tenninal maybe an electronic book home system 258, apersonal data apparatus (PDA) or a personal computer, for example.
  • the command is received by the web site 2140, and formatted, if necessary .
  • the command is outputted to the data communication network 2120 as a control signal through the camera control path 2128.
  • the computer 2134 receives the camera control signals from the communication network 2120 over the camera control path 2126.
  • the remote computer 2134 may be adapted to control multiple cameras at multiple locations 2102, or multiple cameras at the same location 2102.
  • the user may enter commands using the viewer 266.
  • the viewer 266 may display command options in a "soft key" format.
  • the user initiates a command through use of a touch screen device or a pointing device such as a track ball, for example.
  • the user interface aspects ofthe viewer 266 will be described later in more detail.
  • the home system 258 and the viewer 266 may be adapted to display data from the world watch live web site 2140 by the addition of software routines.
  • the software routines may be contained on a computer-readable medium, such as a floppy disk, for example. Alternatively, the software routines may be downloaded to the home system 258 and the viewer 266 over the Internet from the web site 2140.
  • the computer 2134 is connected to the remote camera 2104 by a camera control path 2124.
  • This path allows control commands from the computer to travel to the cameras 2104', 2104" and confrol the cameras 2104', 2104".
  • the cameras 2104', 2104" may have computer- controlled swivel motors (not shown) for panning left and right, may have a computer- controlled pivot motor (not shown) for panning up and down, and may have a computer- controlled motor (not shown) for moving a zoom lens. These motors are known to the artisan and are currently available. A number of cameras may be provided at a single site to allow multiple users to have camera control at the same time.
  • This system of obtaining and/or storing video at a web site is extremely flexible.
  • the system allows for perceived camera control by multiple cameras, actual camera confrol of one or more cameras, perceived camera control via a wide-angle lens on a single camera, and for the generation of comprehensive interactive programs.
  • FIG. 27 -29 users are given the perception of camera control.
  • a plurality of fixed cameras 2104, 2150, 2152, 2153, 2154, 2156, 2158, 2160, 2162 are disposed around aremote site 2102. hi accordance with this embodiment, it appears to users that they are controlling the angle or position of a camera when hi actuahty they are merely being fransferred to the video output of a different camera.
  • Figures 27 - 29 show this concept in greater detail.
  • abuilding2146 isbeing prepared for demolition.
  • the computer 2135 is connected to a commumcation network2120 (not shown).
  • the video from cameras2104,2150,2152,2153,2154, 2156, 2158, 2160, 2162 is digitized and preferably compressed prior to communication over network 2120, either by compressors connected to the cameras (not shown) or by a compressor connected to the computer 2135 (not shown).
  • the cameras may be digital cameras or analog cameras connected to an analog-to-digital converter.
  • the cameras specifically identified around the periphery are cameras 2150, 2152, 2153,2154, 2156,2158,2160, and2162.
  • thebuilding contains the letter "A” and the letter "B” on two sides as shown at 2144 and 2148 in Figures 27 and 28a - 28d.
  • a number of additional cameras 2104 are disposed about the periphery ofthe building in a circular pattern. The pattern and number of cameras are not critical, but will confrol how the user perceives movement ofthe "camera”.
  • a video camera 2150 faces side A
  • a video camera 2152 is between sides A and B
  • a video camera 2153 faces side B
  • a video camera 2154 is between sideB and the side opposite side A.
  • the video cameras 2156, 2158, 2160 and2162 are disposed closer to the building, as shown. All the video cameras contain audio pickups (preferably stereo) . Additionally, all the video cameras are connected to a computer 2135 which outputs compressed audiovisual signals to the communication network 2120 and consequently to the web site.
  • the system shown in Figure 27 may be implemented by the systems shown in either Figure 25 or Figures 26a and 26b. Any number of users in communication with the web site 2130, 2140 may receive the audio and video from these cameras.
  • Figure 28a shows atypical screen view 2150 ofthe video presented on the viewer 266 to remote users who are connected to the web site ofthe present invention.
  • the user is observing live video from camera 2150, which provides a view of the building on side A.
  • a "toolbar” of commands 2151 is presented to the user, mcluding apan left command “ ⁇ -", a pan right command “- “, a pan up command “T” and a pan down command "1".
  • An “autopan” command is used in conjunction with another command (such as pan right). The “autopan” command is used to automatically move the picture position in the direction previously entered.
  • “autopan” is entered after “pan right,” then the picture will keep panning right until another key is pressed or a default key (such as the ESCape key) is pressed.
  • the speed ofthe “autopan” function is controlled by the "speed” command, which is used in conjunction with the "+” and “-” commands. Additionally, the "+” and “-” commands, when used alone, control a “zoom-in” and “zoom-out” function, respectively.
  • the “toolbar” commands are selected via a user input device, which may be a touch sensitive screen, a keyboard, mouse, trackball, and a remote control.
  • pan right command " ⁇ " which is fransmitted to the web site 2130, 2140 ( Figures 25 and 26a and 26b).
  • the web site receives the command, and in response, causes the video from the camera positioned to the right ofthe camera 2150, in this case the video camera 2152 ( Figure 27) to be transmitted to the user.
  • the user observes the picture appearing in Figure 28b, wliich appears to be a view to the right from the previous position (camera 2150). If the user continues to pan right, the user is presented with the Figure 28c view, received from the camera 2153. The user may continue to pan right all away around the building in this manner.
  • users may obtain different views ofthe building 2146 as if they were remotely controlling the positioning of a single remote camera.
  • the users may observe the demolition of the building from many exciting perspectives.
  • This "perceived" camera control is advantageous because it allows any number of users to "control” a camera.
  • a single camera which is remotely controllable is only confroUable by a single user.
  • the present invention is suitable for large audiences. The realism of this perceived control is directly dependent upon the number of cameras and their distances from the viewed object.
  • any number of users may pan around the building in real time as if they were actually present at the site.
  • the video cameras pick up, preferably in stereo, the sounds ofthe demolition. Users who have loudspeakers connected to their computer may experience the demolition almost as if they were present.
  • Figure 29 shows a deployment of a number of cameras 2104 which are arranged in a linear fashion around a point of interest, each camera connected to computer 2135 as in Figure 27.
  • this embodiment uses "perceived" camera control which may be achieved by the systems shown in Figures 25, 26a and 26b.
  • the remote location and point of interest is a parade, such as a New Year's Day Parade.
  • a user may traverse the length ofthe parade without actually being present. Users may view whichever part ofthe parade they are interested in, for as long as they desire, without worry that they have missed an interesting band or float.
  • the camera deployment merely follows the parade route.
  • Parents who have children in a band or float may search for the child and follow the child throughout the parade route, rather than having to monitor every moment ofthe parade on television in the hopes that the child wiU pass the reviewing camera when the parents are watcliing.
  • the parents merely "move" from different cameras along the parade route as their children progress in the parade.
  • 2164, 2166 are provided. These cameras are in direct communication with and are controlled by computer 2170. Although it is possible to form aring of cameras to perform "perceived" camera control (as in Figures 27 - 29), the embodiment shown uses four cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 which contain motors 2105 ( Figure 30b) for controlling the camera' s positioning. The motors are controlled by computer 2170. Either a single computer 2170 or a number of computers 2170 may be used.
  • the remote location and point of interest shown in Figures 30a and 30b are, for example, a watering hole or desert oasis. Users who access the web site 2140 are able to observe live video of wildlife behavior at the watering hole.
  • the cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 are disposed at an island in the middle ofthe watering hole.
  • the toolbar 2151 of Figure 28a is also used in this embodiment and enables users to choose camera confrol commands to spin the cameras around or perform other camera functions, such as zoom. Users are therefore able to receive different views and angles, and observe the entire watering hole.
  • Figure 30b shows the control and video paths ofthe Figure 30a system combined with system shown in Figures 26a and 26b .
  • the video from cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 is communicated to computer 2170, in compressed or uncompressed form on path 2122.
  • the computer 2170 communicates the video to communications network2120 for reception by the web site 2140 ( Figures 26a, 26b) .
  • the video is digitized and compressed by either the cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166, the computer 2170, or an external analog-to-digital converter (not shown) and compressor 2136 ( Figures 26a, 26b) prior to transfer to the communications network 2120.
  • Camera control commands are received by the computer 2170 on control line 2126, as shown in Figures 26a, 26b and 30b.
  • the commands are formatted, if necessary, by computer 2170 and transferred to confrol units 2105 attached to cameras 2160,2162,2164, 2166.
  • the confrol units 2105 are connected to spin, zoom, or otherwise confrol the cameras as directed by the user.
  • Communications links 2124 and 2122 may be wired, wireless, digital or analog, and computer 2170 may be located nearby or remote from the site 2102.
  • the system of Figures 30a and 30b are unlike the systems shown in Figures 27 - 29, because each user is assigned a remote camera in the Figure 50a, 50b embodiment. Since each user must be assigned their own controllable camera, users will have to contend for available cameras.
  • the number of controllable cameras may range from a single camera to any number, and is preferably statistically determined to correlate to the average number of users who access the web server 2140 at any given time or at peak times .
  • the number of cameras may be reduced by using known systems which utilize queuing, reservations, and time limits.
  • a camera 2180 has a spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182, which provides a 180°, spherical or other wide-angle view.
  • This view which is communicated to a computer 2184, contains distortion.
  • the computer 2184 communicates and compresses the distorted video back to the web site 2130 or 2140 wliich stores and may process the image.
  • a simple transmitter maybe used to convey the entire spherical video to the web site 2130, 2140 ( Figures 25 and 26a and 26b).
  • the web site removes the barrel distortion and stores data relating to the entire spherical view. Users may then access different portions of the 180 ° sphere.
  • the toolbar 2151 of Figure 28a is also used.
  • users may move across the spherical view and obtain the "perception" of camera control.
  • This embodiment is advantageous in that it can provide the perception of camera control to any number of users simultaneously using only one remote camera.
  • Figure 31b shows alternative embodiments ofthe system shown in Figure 31a.
  • the spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182 is used with video camera 180", which conveys video information to computer 2184.
  • Computer 2184 communicates the video over communications network 2120 to the web site 2130.
  • the web site 2130 may store or process the received video, and make the video available to users at user te ⁇ ninals 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310 by communicating the video over communication network 2125.
  • Communication network 2125 is explained in more depth below with respect to Figure 33.
  • processing is conducted on the distorted image to remove the distortion from a segment ofthe image.
  • This processing may be performed at the computer 2184, or the web site 2130. Alternatively, the processing may be performed at the user terminals 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310.
  • the web site 2130 has available wide angle video for sending to users. Users display and view only a segment ofthe wide angle video at a time. Then, by using toolbar 2151 ( Figure 28a), the user may select adjacent segments ofthe video for view. When auser selects an adj acent segment ofthe video for display, the adj acent segment is processed to remove distortion and then displayed. Displaying the adjacent segment gives the appearance that the camera was physically "moved" to the adjacent side ofthe original segment.
  • the speciahzed hardware is removed and the hardware functionality is implemented in software at the computer 2184 or web site 2130, but preferably the software is loaded into the user terminal 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310.
  • a spherical (or other wide-angle) image is supplied to the user' s terminal, which executes appropriate software (which maybe a "plug-in" for a browser application program) for displaying a segment ofthe image (or video) without distortion.
  • appropriate software which maybe a "plug-in" for a browser application program
  • the distorted spherical image (or video) may be saved to a storage medium, either at the user' s terminal or at the web site, for future loading and viewing.
  • Figure 31b also shows how to remove the lens distortion without special processing.
  • a spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182 is in optical communication with a video camera 2180'.
  • a nonlinear imaging sensor 2186 is placed between the spherical lens 2182 and the video camera 2180'.
  • the imaging sensor is designed to provide a distorted output which cancels out the distortion ofthe spherical lens 2182, and thus an undistorted wide-angle image is provided to video camera 2180'.
  • imaging sensor 2186 may itself provide a digital output, making it unnecessary to use a camera 2180' . hi this case, the imaging sensor 2186 would be directly connected to computer 2184. Examples of imaging sensors 2186 are disclosed in U.S.
  • PatentNo.5,489,940 issued onFebruary 6, 1996 to Richardson et al, and in PCT publication WO 96/12862, published June 13 , 1996 to Richardson et al. , each incorporated herein by reference.
  • Other suitable imaging sensors may be used with the present invention.
  • the image obtained by the imaging sensor 2186 maybe undistorted and not require furtherprocessing. A segment ofthe image may thenbe selected for display by simply passing the image data to a display device. If the imaging sensor is imperfect, further processing may occur to correct for defects in the sensor. Additionally, furtherprocessing for "zoom” and ' "unzoom” functions may occur. This further processing may take place at the web site 2130 or at the user's terminal 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310.
  • Figures 48a through 5 lb maybe used in conjunction with either live audio and video or prerecorded video data (with audio) (shown in Figures 24 - 26b) .
  • a connected user may access a stored audio and video clip of a lion attack which occu ⁇ ed the day before.
  • the stored audio and video preferably includes all camera angles (or a wide-angle view), such that the ability to pan and zoom is preserved.
  • E. Web Site Configuration Figures 52a and 52b show a more detailed view ofthe web site, listed as web site
  • the web site 2140 ( Figure 28a), but whichmay also correspond to web sites 2112 ( Figure 24) and 2130 ( Figure 25).
  • the web site 2140 is connected to a data communication network 2120, the hitemet 2242, and direct connections 2244.
  • the web site contains transmission equipment 2210,receive equipment 2220, 2220', two compression units 2108, 2114, aweb server 2200, a router 2230, and communication equipment 2240.
  • the web server 2200 itself contains a digital matrix switch 2250, aplurality of digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'", a firewall access control unit 2254, a database server 2256, an audio and video storage unit 2258, a data storage unit 2260, an administrative unit 2262, a digital matrix switch 2264, a camera control unit 2268 and a digital video matrix switch 2270.
  • the web site 2140 is connected to the data communication network 2120 by transmission equipment 2210 and receive equipment 2220. As shown, multiple receivers 2220, 2220' may be used. Also, as shown, the receivers may have more than one video output.
  • Audio and video signals may also be input to the web server 2200 by videocassette (or other suitable recorded media) or simply by feeding in television programming. As with Figures 24 and 26a, these signals are preferably compressed by compression units 2108, 2114.
  • the web server 2200 is connected to remote users by a router 2230 and communication equipment 2240, wliich in turn are connected to the Internet 2242 or directly connected 2244 to users.
  • the communications equipment 2240 outputs the video streams 2116 through a number of input/output ports.
  • the web server 2200 contains a digital matrix switch 2250, a plurality of digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252,”' a firewall access control unit 2254, a database server 2256, an audio and video storage unit 2258, a data storage unit 2260, an a ⁇ ninistrative unit 2262, a digital matrix switch 2264, a camera control unit 2268 and a video matrix switch 2270.
  • the digital matrix switch 2250 receives aU mcoming compressed video signals from the receivers 2220, 2220' and the compressor units 2108, 2114.
  • the matrix switch 2250 also receives compressed video data from database server 2256.
  • the digital matrix switch 2250 Under control of the administrative unit 2262, the digital matrix switch 2250 outputs the input compressed video signals to digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'". hi this manner, any input signal can be transferred to any video server as directed by the admin unit.
  • stored programming from the database server 2256 is routed to the digital matrix switch 2250 to be switched as if it were incoming live video.
  • the outputs ofthe digital matrix switch 2250 also connect to the database server 2256, so that anything at the inputs, such as mcoming hve audio and video, can be stored in the database server 2256.
  • the compressed input video is passed into various digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'" for formatting. Users who connect to web server 2200 preferably run their own decompression software so that the no decompression need occur at the web server 2200. As an alternative, the digital video servers may decompress the input video.
  • the audio and video from the video servers 2252 are passed through a second digital
  • the second video matrix switch 2270 is not required, but is desired for maximum flexibility. It is also optimal where the number of users exceeds the number of video inputs, as one input may be channeled to numerous connected users.
  • the matrix switch 2270 may contain a processor that j oins different frames of video and audio such that each output contains frames for multiple video pictures (including audio). This enables users to receive split screen images of video and select an audio track for playback (see Figure 37, discussed below) .
  • the split-screen images may be formed by using known methods, which may differ depending on the type of compression used. For example, digital images may be decompressed, combined with other decompressed images, and then re- compressed; or the images may be decompressed and converted to analog, combined, and then converted to digital and compressed for transmission.
  • the signals switched by the video matrix switch 2270 are preferably digital. This is because the communicated video streams 2116 are preferably digital. It is preferred to process all the signals in the web server in the digital domain to improve simplicity and maintain maximum flexibility.
  • the various streams of video output from the video matrix switch 2270 are passed to the firewall access control unit 2254 for output to the router 2230 and the communication equipment 2240.
  • any user may receive any signal present at any input, including stored signals within audio and video database 2258 or data storage unit 2260. Additionally, any compressed digital signal present at the input to digital matrix switch 2250 may be stored hi the audio and video storage unit 2258 or data storage unit 2260. This is advantageous in the perceived camera control embodiment ( Figures 27 - 3 lb) where the web server 2200 must output a different video picture to the user upon user request.
  • the administrative unit 2262 directs the matrix switches 2250 and 2270 to output the correct video stream to the user. If the user is requesting stored video, the administrative unit directs the database server 2256 to provide the video to digital matrix switch 2250.
  • the administrative unit 2262 directs the database server 2256 to output the text or graphics to digital matrix switch 2264.
  • the database server 2256 maybe implemented by using several servers and/or multiport servers.
  • the audio and video storage unit 2258 and data storage unit 2260 may be implemented by using many storage media of different types, such as optical storage devices (i.e. CD-ROM), magnetic disks, magnetic tape, or memory circuits (i.e. R-AIVI ROM). The number of units depends on the amount of stored data, the number of users, and the desired output speed.
  • the database server 2256 may be one or multiple units.
  • the audio and video storage unit 2258 stores (preferably compressed) audio and video presentations, mcluding aU relevant camera angles.
  • the video servers 2252 may also be implemented as one or more servers and/or multiport servers.
  • the data storage unit 2260 is used to store information relating to audiovisual displays. This information relates to the menu structure and screen displays communicated to connected users . The stored information may also relate to specifically to the audio and video which is cu ⁇ ently being displayed and heard. For example, in the demolition embodiment of Figure 28a, a user may click on a "more info" icon, to obtain information on demolition. Such information, wliich could include statistics on dynamite, for example, wouldbe stored as text or graphics in data storage unit 2260. The "more info" command wouldbe transmitted to the communications equipment 2240, pass through the router 2230, and the firewall access control 2254 to administrative unit 2262.
  • the a ⁇ ninistrative unit 2262 then directs the database server 2256 to recall the relevant information, such as statistics on dynamite, from data storage device 2260 and pass the information to digital matrix switch 2264.
  • the recalled information is then passed to the firewall access control unit 2254, the router 2230, and the communication equipment 2240 for transmission to the proper subscriber.
  • the data may be combined with audio and video in the firewall access control unit 2254, or be a separate transmission.
  • the communication equipment 2240 forwards the user's command (such as "pan right") to the router 2230, which detects the command and forwards it to the firewall access control unit 2254, which passes it to the administrative unit 2262.
  • the administrative unit 2262 controls the video being fed to each connected user.
  • the acmiinistrative unit 2262 also responds to user commands by histructing eitherthematrixswitcl ⁇ 2250or thematrix switch2270 topass adifferent audiovisual signal from another source (i.e. camera, for example, the camera to the right ofthe present camera) to the connected user. If the user is receiving a stored image from database 2258, the administrative unit instructs the database server 2256 to recall the appropriate video signal.
  • another source i.e. camera, for example, the camera to the right ofthe present camera
  • commands from the user are received by the communication equipment 2240 and forwarded to the router 2230.
  • the commands enter the web server 2200 via the firewall access confrol unit 2254, and are passed to the administrative unit 2262.
  • the commands may be stored in the administrative unit 2262 or passed to the database server 2256. Either way, the commands pass through the camera control unit 2268 which formats the commands as necessary for remote camera control.
  • the formatted commands are passed to the transmission unit 2210.
  • the transmission unit 2210 provides the commands to data communication network 2120 for reception at remote cameras and CPU 134 ( Figure 26a).
  • the administrative unit 2262 detein ines which segment or quadrant ofthe audiovisual image is to be supplied to the user in response to the user' s command.
  • the spherical image may be stored in database 2258 prior to being output to digital matrix switch 2250.
  • the image is split into a number of sections, which when combined form the entire 180 ° sphere. By using suitable image processing software, the distortion is removed or imnimized in each segment.
  • the administrative unit 2262 in response to a user command, determines which segment ofthe sphere should be sent to the user.
  • the administrative unit then directs the database server 2256 to retrieve and output the correct segment to the digital matrix switch 2250.
  • the administrative unit 2262 is able to ensure that the user receives the correct segment ofthe spherical image.
  • the communication equipment 2240 may be designed to automatically determine the maximum data rate at which information can be fransmitted to the coimected users.
  • the data rate depends on the type of connection the web sites has with the user, and the type of equipment the user is operating.
  • the commumcations equipment may use the maximum data rate possible as sensedfromtheuser'scommunications. Alternatively, users may enter their data rates when prompted by a menu screen, as shown in Figure 38 and described below. The data rates are then stored in communications equipment 2240.
  • the communications equipment may remove video frames, preferably prior to compression, such that the resulting data rate is reduced to be compatible with the user.
  • Figure 32b is identical to Figure 32a, but contains an input interface 2225 and an output interface 2235.
  • the input interface 2225 is used to obtain digital video from other sources, such as a paging system, cellular system, cable television system, etc.
  • the output interface connects the web site to other communications systems such as paging systems, cellular systems, or cable television systems.
  • the input interface com ects to an analog system, it contains suitable analog to digital converters (not shown).
  • the output interface connects to an analog system, it contains suitable digital to analog converters
  • the input interface 2225 may obtain images or video from a paging system, and the output interface 2225 maybe connected to apaging system to broadcast video or images to a selective call receiver.
  • the following publications are incorporated by reference, each of wliich relates video/images to selective call receivers : PCT Publication No. WO 96/07269, published March 7, 1996 by Jambhekar et al., PCT Publication No. WO 96/21173, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al, andPCTPublicationNo. WO 96/21205, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al.
  • Figure 33 shows how the users are connected to the web site using home system 258, and shows an example of a communications network 2125 (Figure 31b) in detail.
  • the connections shown in Figure 33 apply to the web sites of the previous figures, including the web site 2112 ( Figure 24), 2130 ( Figure 25) and 2140 ( Figures 26a and 32a) .
  • Figure 33 shows a server platform 2200, the Internet 2242, two direct connection 2244, two traditional Internet hosts 2272, 2274, two cable Internet hosts 2276, 2278, a satellite-based Internet host 2280, a telephone dialup 2282, an ISDN channel 2284, a cable plant 2286, 2288, a satellite system 2290 and aplurality of connected user terminals.
  • the user terminals shown in Figure 33 are home systems 258 including electronic book viewers 266.
  • the user termhials can be any electronic device capable of receiving and displaying digital data including personal computers, for example.
  • the web sites 2112, 2130, 2140 may communicate over the Internet
  • the traditional Internet host 2272, 2274 may be connected using a telephone line 2282 or an ISDN channel 2284 to a plurality of home system 258.
  • the cable Internet host 2276 may be connected using a cable plant 2286 to a home system 258.
  • the web site is connected using a direct connection 2244 to a cable headend Internet host 2278 or satellite-based Internet host 2280.
  • the cable headend Internet host 2278 communicates to a cable plant 2288 andahome system 258.
  • the satellite-based Internet host 2280 communicates using a satellite 2290 to ahome system 258.
  • the communications equipment 2240 may enable commumcations with any type of user terminal, including the home system 258, no matter what the data rate or system. User terminals with higher data rates will receive higher quality audio and video images.
  • Figures 34-39 show examples of display pages that are shown at the home system 258.
  • the pages and menus are stored in data storage unit 2260 ( Figure 32a) as graphical and/or textual information.
  • the world watch live menu may be accessed using the menu system 858 shown in Figure 13.
  • Figure 34 shows an example of a home page 2400 that contains a number of advertisements 2402, numerous web links 2404, a society link 2406, options for viewing television programming 2408, aplurality of rapid access entry options 2409 mcluding a world watch live option 2410, and options for clubs 2412.
  • the advertisements 2402 are useful for the page provider to generate revenue.
  • the system is designed such mat television programming canbe supplied over the Internet. Users may view television programming by selecting the home page television option 2408.
  • the Magazines 2404 are used to provide information concerning specific topics to the user. Users may j oiti a society, having additional membership benefits, through the "society" selection 2406.
  • the world watch live feature 2410 part ofthe rapid access entry options 2409, is selected when users wish to watch live video from remote sites.
  • the clubs shown in the club option 2412 are selected by users who wish to obtain information related to common areas of interest.
  • Figure 35 shows a society menu 2406, selected from the Figure 34 home menu page.
  • FIG. 35 there are options for world watch live 2420, is an advertisement 2402, subscription information 2424, and numerous club options 2422. This screen and all the functions selected in response to the displayed options may be provided on a subscription or temporarily free basis.
  • Figure 36 shows one example of a world watch livemenu 2440. Thismenumaybe used to select remote locations from which to observe live or prerecorded video.
  • a map ofthe world is presented with sites that are available to select for observing live video.
  • the screen indicates sites that are active 2442 or under construction 2444.
  • This menu also contains two advertisements 2402.
  • the world watch live embodiment allows connected users to visit virtually anyplace in the world to learn more about its culture, geography, or environment. Coupled with perceived or actual camera control and associated prestored video, textual and graphical information, a powerful and inexpensive learning tool is realized. This is more closely shown in Figure 37.
  • Figure 37 shows amenu2450 that corresponds to the Egyptian site in Figure 36.
  • This screen concerns "Giza, Egypt", and contains live video from five cameras.
  • camera one 2452 there is camera one 2452, cameras two through five 2454, a "Map” option 2456, an "About This Site” option2458, an "About Egypt” option 2460, an "Upcoming Events” option 2462 and a "Remote Control” option 2464.
  • Camera one 2452 is the default for the main viewing camera. The user may select video image sizes and the number of images to be displayed, limited by the equipment the user is operating. Video from cameras two through five are supphed along with that from camera one to provide alternative sites and viewpoints about the topic ofthe screen (i.e., Egypt).
  • the information presented in Figure 37 may be accessed by activating a link in an electronic book.
  • the link may exist in an electronic book devoted to the history and geography of Egypt.
  • the link may exist in an elecfronic encyclopedia.
  • the link may exist as atext address (e.g., aHTML address).
  • the link may also exist as alocation or an icon in the electronic history book or the electronic encyclopedia.
  • video feed either live or delayed, may be provided to the user's terminal (e.g., the viewer 266, the personal computer 261 , or the television 259, shown hi Figure 2).
  • the video may be accompanied by audio data, text data and geographical data.
  • the "Map” option 2456 brings the user back to the world map ( Figure 36) to select additional sites.
  • the "About This Site” option 2458 brings up text, graphics or additional video concerning the site of Giza, Egypt. For example, aprofessor appears and talks about the origin ofthe Sphinx (shown by camera 1). The embodiment shown in Figure 39 and described below (interactive lecture) maybe combined with the "About This Site” option. Additionally, other video may be displayed in response to selection of "About This Site". Such video may be a documentary ofthe Sphinx or discussion about the technology that historians estimate was used to construct the Sphinx.
  • the "AboutEgypt” option 2460 brings up graphics, text or additional video concerning
  • Upcoming Events 2462 brings graphics, text or video concerning new events in Egypt. For example, text and newspaper articles concerning the construction of new irrigation canals is displayed.
  • this single screen relating to Egypt provides a wealth of information at a single Internet address (or web site).
  • the user may, but need not, "link" to other locations on the Internet.
  • Audiovisual presentations are displayed, which give the user insight into the people and culture of Egypt. Text, graphics, and additional stored video is available to further educate the user.
  • Camera confrol (actual or perceived) gives the user the feeling of walking around different locations in Egypt.
  • Figure 38 shows a screen 2470 that asks users about their equipment in order to determine the appropriate data rate for communications.
  • the screen is not needed and the data rate is determined by communication equipment 2240 automatically.
  • an advertisement 2402 is also shown on this screen.
  • Figure 39 shows an interactive lecture system.
  • live video 2500 of an astronomy professor ' s lecture is transmitted to connected users.
  • the users are able to ask the professor questions 2510 and receive answers 2512.
  • the live video 2500, questions 2510, and answers 2512 are shown to all connected users .
  • the users may enter questions via keyboard or microphone. However, if suitable data rates are available, the user may ask a question via video.
  • a spht screen video showing both the person asking the question and the lecturermay be presented toaU users simultaneously.
  • the answers are preferably given by the lecturer, who may observe the question on a remote display.
  • the answers may be supplied by the web site as text, graphics, or prestored video .
  • the answer may pass through a closed captioning device, be encoded, and displayed on the screen in an answer box 2512.
  • a closed captioning device may be encoded, and displayed on the screen in an answer box 2512.
  • Other techniques for two-way video communication are described in co-pending U. S . Patent Application Serial No.09/391,461 entitled VIDEO CONFERENCING USING AN ELECTRONIC BOOK VIEWER, filed September 8, 1999, the . disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the web site 2140 receives the question at the communications equipment 2240 and forwards the question through router 2230 and the firewall/ access control unit 2254 to the administrative unit 2262.
  • the administrative unit 2262 deteimines whether the question can be answered by playing stored video or showing stored text or graphics. If so, the administrative unit 2262 directs the database server 2256 to recall the appropriate information. The information is then output through the matrix switches 2250, 2270 or 2264, under confrol ofthe administrative unit, as appropriate.
  • the ability ofthe administrative unit to answer questions depends upon the complexity of its software. Simple, prestored answers to frequently asked or standard questions may be provided in a basic system.
  • More advanced systems may utilize an interpreter to analyze the question before providing an answer. For example, frequently asked questions in the astronomy fieldmay be "what is a star”? or “how was the galaxy formed”? In response to these questions, wliich may be provided on a menu or list, the administrative unit recalls prestored answers in either video, text, or graphics.
  • the question proceeds to the remote lecturer in a similar fashion as the camera confrol signal ( Figure 26a) discussed previously.
  • the camera control unit 2268 Figure 32a
  • Transmitter 2210 then transmits a question signal to the location ofthe remote lecture via the datacommunicationnetwork2120 and mecommunicationpaths 2126,2128.
  • the lecturer has a display which shows questions received over the data communication network.
  • the lecturer or anumber of assistants may select from among many prestored answers in response to a question.
  • the remote lecturer has a computer and monitor (not shown) which displays the questions and the available prestored answers.
  • the lecturer or assistants then match answers with the questions.
  • the prestored answers are preferably forwarded to the individual who asked the associated question, i order for others to learn from the questions, the questions and answers may be provided to all connected users.
  • Figures 40 and 41 show a system that uses a combination of live video, stored video, stored graphics, camera control and interactive questioning.
  • the live video 2550 of camera 1 shown in Figure 40 relates to a geological site, i.e., the geyser, "Old Faithful." Since the site is located on aNational Park, the display screen has been customized to allow for the selection "About National Parks" 2604. When this is selected, the user's command is communicated to the web server 2112, 2130, 2140 for analysis by the administrative unit 2262.
  • the Administrative unit 2262 determines that prestored video and graphics are required, and instructs the database server 2256 to output the correct information: video to the matrix switch 2250, and graphics to the matrix switch 2264.
  • the matrix switches, 2250, 2270, and 2264 under control ofthe administrative unit 2262, forward the video and graphics to the user through the communication equipment 2240.
  • Figure 41 shows the result at the user terminal.
  • the communicated prestored video 2560 of a Park Ranger appears on the screen.
  • the Park Ranger discusses the topic of National Parks. The discussion occurs in conjunction with a graphical display ofthe locations of all National Parks, shown at the screen location 2570.
  • the user may select other options, such as "Map 600" to return to the map of all remote sites, "About This Site” 2602 to learn more about the site currently viewed, "More About National Parks” 2614 for even more information about National Parks, "Upcoming Events” 2606 for a schedule of upcoming events, "Remote Confrol” 2608 for remote (either actual orperceived) control ofthe camera (i.e. camera 1), "Ask Questions” 2610 for asking questions (as in Figure 39) to an on-line Park Ranger, and "Other Topics” 2612, for a list of other topics and/or options.
  • the remote camera systems discussed above may be used in a surveillance or tracking system.
  • a researcher may place a video camera in the center of a watering hole, preferably connected to a video recorder for storing many hours of activity at the watering hole.
  • Multiple cameras or a wide-angle lens may be used such that virtual camera control (as described previously) may be performed on the video.
  • virtual camera control as described previously
  • the surveillance system allows for automatic scanning ofthe surveyed area, without the need for moving any cameras.
  • AdditionaUy viewing multiple segments ofthe area under surveillance may be viewed at the same time in a split-screen or multi-screen image.
  • AU that needs to be done is the removal of distortion in multiple segments ofthe video (if using a wide-angle lens).
  • automatic monitoring an(i or fracldng may be performed.
  • researchers and photographers wait through long periods of inactivity before a desired event occurs .
  • a photographer may wait for hours for a lion or other wildlife to approach the photographer's position.
  • the system maybeusedto automatically monitor a remote region for activity.
  • a processor may monitor the multiple cameras or the digital wide- angle video for pixel changes indicating the desired event. For example, an approaching lion in an otherwise inactive desert environment will cause a moving pattern to form on a camera' s output or in the wide angle image.
  • a processor may detect the pattern and alert a wildlife researcher that an event is occurring.
  • the processor may automatically and continually display the relevant camera output, or the segment ofthe wide angle image containing the lion, thereby tracking the hon.
  • the present invention may employ tracking techniques, known in the prior art, to the obtained digital image.
  • the monitoring and fracking embodiment distortion may be removed from the wide angle image prior to performing the processing to determine whether an event is occurring.
  • the type of event being monitored and nature ofthe object being tracked controls whether monitoring and/or fracking may be performed on the distorted or undistorted image.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will choose the system best suited for the particular monitored event or tracked object.
  • Figure 42 shows a flow diagram of a monitoring and fracking system.
  • the software necessary to perform the momtoring/fracking functions maybe located at the web site or at the user's terminal, such as the home system 258 and viewer 266.
  • the image/video signal to be processed for monitoring and/or tracking may be a live video feed or be played back from stored video.
  • a wildlife scientist may leave multiple video cameras running overnight (or a single video camera with a wide-angle lens) and when the video tape is played back, the segments/cameras containing activity are displayed.
  • an "input frame of reference” routine 2700 is executed. This routine is optional, and is used to establish a frame of reference direction, such as north. The frame of reference may detemiine the first segment of a wide-angle image to view, or the first camera to view.
  • a "reset segment counter” routine 2710 is executed. This sets the segment or camera to be first displayed.
  • a "reset timer' ' routine 2715 is executed to reset the interval when segments or cameras are switched.
  • the "obtain image" routine 2720 is executed.
  • This routine obtains the wide angle image (live or prerecorded), or images from all the cameras (in the multiple cameraperceived control embodiment of Figures 27 - 28d).
  • the obtained image from a wide-angle lens may be processed to remove the distortion or not, depending on what is being monitored.
  • the obtained image is processed to determine active areas (cameras or segments). Active areas are areas where the processor determines that activity is taking place, either by changes in the pixels at those locations, by using other known image/video processing techniques, or by using external sensors.
  • the processing is performed as known in the art and is not described further herein.
  • the processing occurs during the "process for activity" routine 2730. This routine uses the frame of reference to determine which segment(s), relative to the normal (i.e., north) is/are active.
  • the "display active segments” routine 2750 displays the active segments or cameras on a display. Distortion from the relevant segments is removed in the wide-angle lens embodiment. If more than one segment is active, a split screen display may show each segment simultaneously. The spht screen display may make reference to the frame of reference that was previously entered during routine 2700. The "reset timer" routine 2710 is then executed so that the last segment under view is returned when activity is no longer present. If activity is notpresent, the "display current segment” routine 2760 is executed. This routine displays the current segment or camera until the timer expires, at which point the next segment or camera is displayed. The display may make reference to the frame of reference which was previously entered during routine 2700.
  • the "time limit exceeded” routine 2770 is executed. If the time limit has not been exceeded, a branch to the "obtain image” routine 2720 occurs and processmg continues until the time limit is exceeded, or until activity occurs.
  • the time limit value maybe increased by pressing the "-"buttonin conjunction with the "speed” button ( Figure 28a), for a slower autopan, and the time limit may be decreased by pressing the "+” button in conjunction with the "speed” button ( Figure 28a) for a faster autopan.
  • the segment (or camera) counter is incremented by the "increment segment counter” routine 2780. If the counter is greater than the maximum number of cameras or segments, the "counter > max” routine 2790 branches to the "reset segment counter” routine 2710, to restart the automatic panning. Ifthe counter is not greater than allowed, abranch occurs to the "reset timer" routine 2715 so that the next segment or camera may be displayed, and processing for activity continues.
  • Monitoring and automatic panning may be combined. When combined, all active segments or cameras are automatically panned for a brief timeframe. Thus, if a lion and zebra are both moving towards the camera from opposite direction, each would be displayed for a brief timeframe before switching to a display ofthe other. This is an alternative to the split screen display previously described.
  • Display of Video Data the user may select or be provided data concerning the video currently displayed. For example, superimposed on the video may be the date and time the video was recorded, a name ofthe image location, remaining time for the video, or data pertaining to the segment (or camera source) ofthe video which is currently being viewed.
  • This segment/camera data may be a compass heading (such as north) or angle from a reference (such as 40 degrees), or coordinate information (such as X/Y, X/Y/Z, R/ ⁇ , and X/R/ ⁇ ) relating to the location ofthe center ofthe segment/video currently displayed in relation to the wide angle image or other cameras.
  • a graphical representation ofthe lens may show which segment ofthe wide angle image (or camera) is being displayed.
  • a frame of reference may be adopted, especially for a spherical lens. The frame ofreference would be either generated by a processor at the web site or user ' s terminal, or entered by a user or operator.
  • the user may select which direction is "north" or position the axis of a coordinate system if a coordinate display is to be used for a particular lens.
  • the display of image data may be used in aU embodiments ofthe present invention, and are preferably updated when the displayed image changes.
  • Figure 43 shows a display 2800 showing a coral reef 2805 where users have virtual camera control using multiple underwater cameras.
  • the date 2810 is displayed along with the time 2820.
  • the location is shown at 2830 and the remaining time of the program at 2840.
  • the magnification is shown at 2850 and the density and colors at 2860.
  • the segment camera field 2870 shows that the user is viewing camera no. 3.
  • This segment/camera data may be shown graphically, as depicted at 2880.
  • Field2880 is atop view ofthe coral reef 2805 and the layout ofthe cameras, in this case cameras 1 through 10.
  • the square around camerano.3 indicates that this camera is the source of the picture on the display 2800.
  • the frame ofreference (north) is indicated at 2890 for the graphical segment data and 2895 for the video data.
  • the images, video, and image data may also be stored at the user's terminal.
  • the wide angle distorted image may be stored, along with the image data, if present. Storage ofthe image and image data enables the user to retrieve the image and view a segment at a later date.
  • the entire interactive presentation may be stored at the user's terminal (including associated graphics, text, video, data, or other information), although all the pertinent files and data would have to be received by the user.
  • ThedisclosureofPCTPublicationNo. WO 96/08105, published March 14, 1996by Labun, incorporated herein by reference is related to storing images and may be used with the present invention.
  • the video or image may be stored in either its distorted or undistorted state. Storing the video or image in its undistorted state has the advantage in that tall and/or wide pictures may be stored in their most viewable state, and in that editing may be performed on the images more easily if they are retrieved with the distortion removed.
  • the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate that other aspects ofthe patent applications, patents and publications incorporated herein by reference may be applied to the present invention. As such, the patent applications, patents and publications are incorporated herein in their entirety.
  • the terms and descriptions used herein are set forth by way of iUustration only and are not meant as limitations. Those skilled hi the art will recognize that numerous variations are possible within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined in the following claims.

Abstract

An electronic book selection and delivery system (200) distributes electronic text and graphics to subscribers. The system contains an operations center (250), a video distribution system (208) or a variety of alternative distribution systems, a home subsystem (258), and a billing and collection system (278). The operations center and/or distribution points perform the functions of manipulation of text data, security and coding of text, cataloging of books, message center, and uplink functions. The home subsystem connects to a video distribution system or variety of alternative distribution systems, generates menus and stores text, and transacts through communicating mechanisms. A portable book-shaped viewer (266) is used for viewing the text. The viewer can receive digital video data from a variety of sources, including the Internet by wired or wireless connections (274, 279). The viewer may use the Internet connection to control and receive multiple line video feeds such as from a world watch live system. Users may be able to view a plurality of remote locations in real time and remotely control a video picture of a distant location. The remote control may be either actual control of a remote video camera or perceived remote control by the manipulation of audiovisual data streams. Text, graphics, and other video information supplement one or more video pictures to provide an educational and entertaining system. Information is accessible to users who are viewing multiple video pictures. The information relates and describes what is being viewed. Users who have different types of equipment, with different data rates, are able to access and use the system of the present invention. Users may interactively communicate with a video lecturer by asking questions and receiving answers.

Description

ELECTRONIC BOOK CONNECTION TO WORLD WATCH LIVE Related Applications
This application is a continuation-in-part of U. S . Application S erial No .07/991 ,074 entitled TELEVISION PROGRAM PACKAGING AND DELIVERY SYSTEM WITH MENUDPJVEN SUBSCRIBER ACCESS, filedDecember 9, 1992, U.S. AppUcation Serial No.08/336,247 entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK SELECTION AND DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed November 7, 1994, U.S. Application Serial No. 08/160, 194 and PCT/ US93/11606 entitled ADVANCED SET-TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEMS, filed December 2, 1993, U.S. Application Serial No. 08/906,469 entitled REPROGRAMMABLE TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON ATELEVISIONPROGRAMDELIVERY SYSTEM, filed August 5, 1997, U.S. Application SerialNo.09/191,520 entitled DIGITAL BROADCAST PROGRAM ORDERING, filed November 13, 1998 and U.S. Application SerialNo. 08/923,091 entitled APPARATUS FOR VIDEO ACCESS AND CONTROL OVER COMPUTER NETWORK, INCLUDING IMAGE CORRECTION, filed September 4, 1997. These applications are incorporated by reference herein. Also incorporated by reference are co-pending U.S. Application Serial No.09/237,827 entitled ELECTRONIC BOOKHAVING LIBRARY CATALOG MENU AND SEARCHING FEATURES, filed January 27, 1999; U.S. Application SerialNo.09/237,828 entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ELECTRONIC LINKS, filed January 27,. 1999; U.S. Application Serial No. 09/391,461 entitled VIDEO CONFERENCING WITH ANELECTRONICBOOK VIEWER, filed September 8, 1999; and U.S. Application Serial No. 09/289,956, entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY METHODS, filed April 13, 1999. Field Of The Invention This inventionrelates to the distribution of audiovisual signals through communications networks such as computer networks and servers and their subsequent storage in and display on an electronic book reader. The invention has particular use with respect to global networks such as the Internet and "World Wide Web". The invention also relates to education. Particularly, the invention provides an alternative to in-person classroom instruction. Description Of Related Art
There is a constant desire to improve education and knowledge at all levels. It is thought that true human progress can only be achieved if people' s understanding of each other is improved and if people's understanding of nature and the environment is improved. Traditionally, education and knowledge have been obtained in schools from classroom instruction and from the reading of books.
The disadvantage of current classroom instructional systems is that students must be physically present in the classroom to participate in the educational process. Therefore, students who are geographically displaced from the location ofthe classroom often cannot attend class instruction as often or as timely as students who are nearby to the classroom.
The disadvantage of textbooks is that they are often not kept current with recent events or technological changes. Textbooks are usually only updated on a yearly or less frequent basis, while important changes may occur monthly or more frequently. Also, to save funds, schools may not purchase new textbooks even though the textbooks have been updated. Therefore, the new knowledge, although available, is not communicated to students.
Recently, audiovisual presentations have begun to be used in the field of education. These systems may provide playback of a recording of a lecturer who provides apresentation on an educational topic. For example, students may learn about math from watching a videotape or television broadcast of a math professor' s lecture. Education can also occur on a more informal basis. For example, specialty channels in the United States such as the Discovery Channel® and The Learning Channel® (headquartered in Bethesda, Maryland, U.S.A.) broadcast educational programming that both entertains and educates a diverse viewership. The disadvantage of these audiovisual systems is that they are not interactive. Students are unable to ask questions, and the lecturer is unable to tailor the presentation of material to the specific needs ofthe current student audience. Consequently, the needs ofthe students are not met. Cable and broadcast television are commonly known media which supply information to large numbers of viewers equipped with receivers known as "television sets." By receiving abroadcast, cablecast or satellite signal, users are able to view scenes fromremote locations and observe newsworthy events which occur far from the user's location. However, conventional television is a one-way media in which users cannot communicate with each other or the broadcaster.
Recently, the advent ofthe Internet, and the World Wide Web, in conjunction with the proliferation of personal computers, has allowed people to exchange i-aformation and ideas on aglobal and inexpensive basis. Generally speaking, me Internet is alarge computer network which connects host computers. Users with a computer, modem and telephone line commonly call via telephone to connect with a host. The host, being in communication with other hosts (connected to other users) is able to transfer information between users. The Internet is used, for example, to transfer, data files, still images, sounds and messages between virtually any two points in the world with telephone access. The use ofthe Internet has increased dramatically since 1981, when approximately 300 host computers were linked together. In 1989, the number of linked host computers was fewer than 90,000; but by 1993, over a million host computers were connected. Currently over 10 million host computers are linked (not including the personal computers people use to access these hosts via modems) and as many as 40 million people around the world may have access to the Internet medium. This number is expected to grow to 200 million by the end of 1999.
Users on the Internet are able to transfer text, graphics, and still pictures between remote locations. Othertypes of i-αformationwMchcanbetrarismitted include files containing prerecorded sequences of images. To view these images, users download a large data file, and after running appropriate software, see a sequence of images on the computer screen. These images typically are not provided in real time, and are not viewable while the user is accessing the Internet.
Therefore, even though the Internet is a two-way communication medium, it is not currently being utilized to provide video information and audiovisual presentations. This is a disadvantage, in that a large number of people have been accustomed to television audiovisual presentations, and prefer an audio-video presentation to a textual or graphical presentation. Summary Of Invention The electronic book selection and delivery system is a new way to distribute books to bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers. The technological breakthroughs of this invention provide a secure electronic system for both delivering selected books and receiving payments. The systemhas an unusual combination of features that provides the consumer with a daily use household appliance that has a high tech aura while being very practical, portable, and easy to use.
An advantage ofthe system is that it eliminates the distribution of any physical obj ect such as apaper book or computer memory device from any book or text distribution system. The purchase of a book becomes a PAY-PER-READ™ event avoiding the overhead, "middle-men," printing costs, and time delay associated with the current book distribution system. Published material and text such as the President' s speech, a new law, a court decision on abortion, or O. J. Simpson's testimony canbe made immediately available to the consumer at a nominal fee. Alternatively, books maybe made available free to the end use consumer, subsidized by advertisers who sponsor books or embed advertising within the books.
The system is a novel combination of new technology involving the television, cable, telephone, and computer industries. It utilities high bandwidth data transmissions, strong security measures, sophisticated digital switcliing, high resolution visual displays, novel controls, and user friendly interface software.
The primary components ofthe text delivery system are the subsystem for preparing the text for delivery and the subsystem for receiving and selecting text that was delivered. An embodiment of the system includes additional components and optional features that enhance the system. The system may be configured for use by bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers. In one embodiment, the system for consumer use is made up of four subsystems, namely: (1) an operations center, (2) a distribution system, (3) ahome subsystem including reception, selection, viewing, transacting and transmission capabilities, and (4) abilling and collection system. Alternative configurations ofthe system are defined to allow for a variety of traditional and non-traditional delivery methods.
The operations center performs several primary functions: manipulating text data (including receiving, formatting and storing of text data), security encoding of text, cataloging of books, providing a messaging center capability, and performing uplink functions. In one embodiment, the system delivers the text from the operations center to consumer homes by inserting text data within analog video signals. The insertion of text is generally performed with an encoder at an uplink site that is within or near the operations center. The system can use several lines ofthe Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI), all the lines ofthe analog video signal, a digital video signal or unused portions of bandwidth to transmit text data. Using the VBI delivery method, the top ten or twenty book titles may be transmitted with video during normal programming utilizing existing cable or broadcast transmission capability without disruption to the subscriber' s video reception. Using the entire video signal, thousands of books may be transmitted within just one hour of air time. Nearly any analog or digital video or data distribution system may be used to deliver the text data. The text data may also be transmitted over other low and high speed signal paths including a telephone network (e.g., a public switched telephone network) having ahigh speed connection such as a digital subscriber line (DSL) connection and the Internet, for example. The home subsystem performs at least four functions: connecting to the distribution system, selecting text, storing text, and transacting through a communicating mechanism. The components ofthe home subsystem may be configured in a variety ofhardware configurations. Each function may be performed by a separate component, the components may be integrated, or the capability of existing cable set top converter boxes, computers, and televisions may be utilized. A connector, library unit and viewer unit may be used. In one embodiment, the connector portion ofthe home subsystem receives an analog video signal and strips or extracts the text from the video. The home library stores the text signal, provides a user friendly software interface to the system and processes the transactions at the consumer home. The viewer provides a screen for viewing text or menus and novel user friendly controls. Alternative embodiments are presented that support delivery of text using a variety of communication mechanisms.
The viewing device may be a portable book shaped viewer which stores one or more books for viewing and provides a screen for interacting with the home library unit. A high resolution display is used to both read the books and to interact with the home library software, h one embodiment, an optional phone connector or return-path cable connection initiates the telephone calls and, with the aid ofthe library, transmits the necessary data to complete the ordering and billing portion ofthe consumer transaction. Alternative embodiments are presented that support ordering and billing using a variety of communication mechanisms. The user friendly controls include a bookmark, current book and page turn button. The billing and collection system performs transaction management, authorizations, collections and publisher payments automatically.
A system similar to the system for consumer use may be used in bookstores, schools and public libraries.
In one aspect ofthe invention, video is collected at aremote site. The term "video," as usedherein, includes stereophonic or monophonic audio signals whichmay accompany a video signal. Additionally, "video" is used broadly herein to include still images, groups of related still images, animation, graphics, pictures, or other visual data, including textual data. The remote video information may be obtained from a video cassette, CD ROMs, television channels, one or more video cameras, or other well known sources. If video cameras are used, they may be connected to a computer so that they are remotely controllable, or they may be oriented such that a perception of control can be created for users. The video may relate to remote sites of interest, such as a pyramid in Egypt, or the images may relate to an educational lecture being conducted at a remote site.
The collected video may be transferred to a web site, either in compressed or uncompressed form. The video may be physically transported or may be transmitted through a communications medium to the web site. The web site may contain a storage media that stores some or all ofthe video. Additionally, the web site may pass camera control commands, if applicable, to the remotely controlled cameras or may simulate the remote control of a camera. One function ofthe web site is to pass video to aplurality of users, through a communication media such as the Internet, in response to user selections. The video passed to the plurality of users may be live video being fed to the web site, or may be stored video . A number of video servers may be used to output the video to the users through the communications media, such as the Internet. The video may be tailored by the web site for the particular user's hardware, including data communication equipment, ormemory size, i.e. the data rate matches the highest speed which the user's equipment can handle.
Users receive and display the video sent from the web site. Many simultaneous video pictures may be received. The quality and frame rate ofthe video is dependent on the user's communications hardware. Users having electronic book viewers with high-speed modems or cable modems may receive higher quality video. The users are able to send commands and/or queries to the web site. The commands and queries are forwarded to remote locations to control remote cameras or query remotely located instructors. Alternatively, the commands may cause the web site to change from among many video signals with different camera angles or locations (or to transmit a different portion of a wide angle image), causing the user to have a perception of remote camera control. The user' s commands may also cause a different portion of a received wide angle image to be displayed, giving the user aperception of camera control.
In addition to video, the web site provides information, such as graphics and text, which may be related to the video or may be a separate program. This information may be automatically supplied, or provided upon user request. Therefore, the user may be provided with a comprehensive set of information concerning remote sites, remotely located documents, or other information or data, enabling the user to be quickly educated about the remote site of interest. Brief Description Of Drawings Figure 1 a is ablock diagram ofthe primary components of an electronic book selection and delivery system.
Figure lb is a block diagram of an electronic book selection and delivery system that uses a composite video signal. Figure 2 is a schematic showing an overview ofthe electronic book selection and delivery system.
Figure 3 is a schematic of a delivery plan for the electronic book selection and delivery system.
Figure 4 is a block diagram ofthe operations center. Figure 5a is a flow diagram of processing at the operations center and uplink.
Figure 5b is a block diagram of a hardware configuration for an uplink site.
Figure 6a is a block diagram of a hardware configuration for a four component home subsystem.
Figure 6b is a schematic of a two unit home subsystem. Figure 7 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a video connector.
Figure 8 is a block diagram for an example of a library unit.
Figure 9 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a library unit on the received data stream.
Figure 10 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a library unit on information requests from a viewer.
Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the components for an example of a viewer.
Figure 12 is a flow diagram of processes performed by a viewer on an information request from a subscriber. Figure 13 is a chart depicting a menu structure and sequencing of menus in a menu system.
Figure 14a is a schematic of an introductory menu.
Figure 14b is a schematic showing an example of a main menu. Figures 14c, 14d, 14e, 14f, 14g, 14h, 14i and 14j are schematics showing examples of submenus.
Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of an electronic book system for a bookstore or public library. Figure 16a and Figure 16b are schematics ofhardware modifications or upgrades to a set top converter.
Figure 17 is a schematic showing a set top terminal that includes a data receiver and data transmitter.
Figure 18a is a schematic of a book-on-demand system. Figure 18b is a schematic of an operations center supporting a book-on-demand system.
Figure 19 is a diagram depicting components used for delivery of electronic books over the Internet.
Figure 20 is a schematic of a page of an electronic book having electronic links; Figure 21 is a schematic of a page of an electronic book with the electronic links shown;
Figure 22 is a schematic of a show links submenu;
Figure 23 is an example of links in an electronic book;
Figure 24 is a block diagram of an embodiment ofthe invention where remote video is provided to a web server by videocassette and by ordinary television.
Figure 25 is ablock diagram of an embodiment ofthe invention where remote video is provided by remotely located cameras and a communication network carries the video to the web server.
Figures 26a and 26b are ablock diagrams of an embodiment of he invention using the embodiments of Figures 24 and 25 with remotely controllable cameras.
Figure 27 shows remote cameras positioned around abuilding for perceived camera control.
Figures 28a - 28B show video images from specific cameras shown in Figure 27. Figure 29 shows remote cameras deployed to follow a parade route.
Figures 30a and 30b show remotely controlled cameras at a remote location.
Figures 31a and 31b show a single remote camera at a remote location, where the camera has a 180 degree spherical (or other wide angle) lens. Figures 32a and 32b are block diagrams of a server platform.
Figure 33 is a block diagram of communications paths from the server site to remote users.
Figure 34 shows a home page in accordance with an embodiment of the invention. Figure 35 shows a "society" page in accordance with another embodiment ofthe invention.
Figure 36 shows a "map" page of remote camera locations throughout the world.
Figure 37 shows a "watch" page containing live video feeds from five remote cameras. Figure 38 shows a page directed to determining the user' s data rate.
Figure 39 shows a page of an interactive lecture.
Figures 40 and 41 show pages of an embodiment of he invention that combines live video, prestored video, graphics, and interactive questions.
Figure 42 shows a flow diagram of amethod of automatically monitoring andpanning an area using perceived camera control.
Figure 43 is an exemplary screen display ofthe present invention, showing video and also showing video data. Detailed Description Of Invention
Figure 1 a shows an electronic book distribution system 100 that may be used for distributing an electronic book. A content provider 110 may publish hard copy versions of books or other printed media including newspapers, magazines, and product catalogs, for example. The content provider 110 may convert printed materials to an electronic format and provide the electronic formatted materials to a distribution point, or center 120, over uplink path 115. Theuplinkpath 115 maybe awired or a wireless path. Theuplinkpath 115 may be a telecommunications network, for example. The uplink path 115 may be a satellite relay path or a wireless telephone path. The upHnkpath 115 may involve providing electromc books to the distribution center on a fixed media, such as a CD-ROM, for example. In Figure 1 a, the content provider 110 and the distribution center 120 are shown as separate components ofthe electronic book distribution system 100. However, the content provider 110 and the distribution center 120 may be co-located.
The distribution center 120 may convert printed matter into an electronic format. Alternately, the distribution center 120 may receive electronic files from an outside source, such as the content provider 110. The distribution center 120 may process and store electronic books.
The distribution center 120 distributes electronic books. The distribution may be, for example, over distribution path 125, distribution network 130, and distribution path 135 to an electronic book subsystem or teiminal 140, which may include an electronic book viewer (not shown). The terminal may also be a television, a set top terminal, apersonal computer, or similar device. An apparatus and method for distributing electromc books is disclosed in greater detail later. The distribution network 130 may be an electronic book store, an Internet web site, a wired or wireless telecommunications network, an intranet, a radio program delivery system, a television program delivery system, including cable television, satellite television broadcast, and over-the-air broadcast, for example. The electronic book distribution network 130 could include direct delivery through amail delivery system of electronic books on a fixed media, such as a CD-ROM, for example.
Figure lb shows components of an electronic book distribution system 170 using a television program delivery system to distribute electronic books. In the embodiment shown in Figure lb, the components ofthe electronic book selection and delivery system 170 are an encoder 174, a video distribution system 178, a connector 182, and a text selector 186. The encoder 174 places textual data on a video signal to form a composite video signal. Although the composite signal may contain only textual data, it usually carries both video and textual data. A variety of equipment and methods maybe used to encode text data onto a video signal. The video distribution system 178 distributes the composite video signal from the single point ofthe encoder 174 to multiple locations, wliich have connectors 182. The connector 182 receives the digital or analog video signal from the video distribution system 178 and separates, strips or extracts the text data from the composite video signal. If necessary, the extracted text data is converted into a digital bit stream. The text selector 186 works in connection with the connector 182 to select text.
Using the connector 182 and text selector 186 combination, various methods of selecting and retrieving desired text from a composite or video signal are possible. Text may be preselected, selected as received or selected after being received and stored. One method is for the connector 182 to strip or extract all the text from the video signal and have the text selector 186 screen all the text as received from the connector 182. The text selector 186 only stores text in long term or permanent memory if the text passes a screening process described below. Figure 2 shows another embodiment of an electronic book selection and delivery system 200. The delivery system 200 includes: an operations center 250 including an uplink site 254, a video distribution system 208, an electronic book device, or home system 258 including a video connector 212, a library 262, a viewer 266, and a phone connector 270, telephone system 274, a lnternetweb site 279 and abilling and collection system 278. Also as shown in Figure 2, the home system 258 may include connections to a television 259 and apersonal computer 261 may beusedto display menu screens, electronic books, electronic files, or any other information associated with the electronic book delivery system 200. In addition, the television 259 and the personal computer 261 may provide control functions that replicate and supplement those ofthe viewer 266. The operations center 250 receives textual material from outside sources 282 such as publishers, newspapers, and on-line services. Alternately, the outside sources may maintain electronic books at the Internet web site 279. The outside sources 282 may convert textual and graphical material to digital format, or may contract with another vendor to provide this service. The operations center 250 may receive the textual and graphical material in various digital formats and may convert the textual material to a standard compressed format for storage. In so doing, the operations center 250 may create apool of textual material that is available to be delivered to the home system 258. The textual material maybe grouped by books or titles for easy access.
As used herein, "book" means textual, graphical or video information. Such information may be contained in any novels, encyclopedias, articles, magazines, newspapers, catalogues, periodicals, or manuals or any portion or section ofthe above. The information may also be provided as a video clip, for example. The term "title" may represent the actual title assigned to a book, a video program, or any other designation indicating a particular group, portion, or category of textual information. The title may refer to a series of related textual, video or graphical information, a grouping of textual, video or graphical information, or a portion of textual, video or graphical information. For example, "Latest Harlequin Romance", 'TourCMldReadmgBool s(Ages lO-12),""Encyclopedia,BRITANNICA'TM,""President's Speech," "Instruction Manual," "Schedule of 4th of July Events," "Pet Handbooks," "Roe v. Wade," and "The Joy of Cooking," are suitable titles. Also, the title may be a graphical symbol oricon. Thus, apictureofawrenchmaybeatitle for arepair book, a picture of a computer a title for a computer book, a graphical symbol of a telephone a title for a telephone book, a drawing of a dagger a title for a mystery book, a picture of a bat and ball a title for a sports book, and a picture of tickertape a title for a business book.
The operations center 250 includes the uplink site 254 for placing the text or other information onto a telecommunications signal and sending the telecommunications signal into a distribution system. The uplink site 254 may include an encoder 204 (not shown in Figure 2) to encode the text onto the telecommunications signal. Many analog and digital video distribution systems may be used with the electronic book dehvery system 200, such as cable television distribution systems, broadcast television distribution systems, video distributed over telephone systems, direct satellite broadcast distribution systems, and other wire and wireless video distribution systems. Nearly any distribution system which can deliver a telecommunications signal, including a video signal, will work with the electronic book delivery system 200. It is also possible to distribute the electronic book without using a telecommunications signal as described in the embodiments presented in Section VII below. The home system 258 performs five functions: (1) connecting with a video distribution system; (2) selecting data; (3) storing data; (4) displaying data; and (5) handling transactions. An important optional function ofthe home system 258 is communicating using, in one embodiment, a telephone commumcation system 274. The home system 258 may be made up of four parts : a video connector 212 or similar type of connector for connecting with the distribution system 208, a library 262 for storing and processing, a viewer 266 for viewing menus and text and a telephone connector 270 for connecting with a telephone communications system 274. Additional embodiments are presented in Section VII that address alternative communication mechanisms.
The billing and collection system 278 may be co-located with the operations center 250 or located remote from the operations center 250. The billing and collection system 278 may be in communication with the home system 258 using telephone-type communication systems (for example 274). Any of a number of communication systems as presented in Section VII, such as a cellular system or the Internet, will operate with the billing and collection system 278. The billing and collection system 278 records the electronic books or video, orportions of text or video that are selected or ordered by the subscriber. The collection system will charge a subscriber's credit account or bill the subscriber, hi addition, the billing and collection system 278 may monitor that amount due to publishers or other outside sources 282 who have provided textual data or other services such as air time to enable the text delivery system 200 to operate. Also shown in Figure 2 is an intranet 279 ' . The intranet 279 ' may be used as apart of a private distribution network for distributing and circulating electronic books. For example, a university library may use the intranet 279 ' to circulate electronic books to university students and professors. Figure 3 is an expanded overview of a delivery plan 301 for the electronic book dehvery system 200. It is a comprehensive delivery plan 301 to support various types of users and various billing systems. Figure 3 shows that publishers 282 may provide text transfer 302 to the operations center 250' and receive payments 306 from the billing and collection system 278'. Aseparatechanneluplinksite254' isshowninthisconfigurationreceivingdata310 from the operations center 250'. The operations center 250' has three separate sections (318, 322, 326) one for text receiving, formatting and re-entry 318, a second for security encoding 322 and a third section for catalog and messaging center functions 326.
The collection and billing system 278' shown has two sections (330, 334) one for transaction management, authorizations and publisher payments 330, and the other for customer service 334. The customer service section 334 provides for data entry and access to customer account information. Transaction accounting information 338 is supphed to credit card companies 342 by the transaction management section 330 ofthe billing and collection system 278'. The credit card companies 342 provide billing 346 to customers either electronically or by mail.
Methods for communicating between the subscriber base 348 and the billing and collection system278' include: by telephone switching 350 alone, cellular switching 354 and telephone switching 350 combined, and by use ofthe cable system 358 and the telephone switching 350. The system shown supports both one-way 362 and two-way cable communication 366 with subscribers. Additional commumcation methods are presented in Section VII. Public libraries and schools 370 as well as bookstores 374 may use the delivery system 301.
Public libraries and schools 370 could have a modified system to allow the viewer to be checked-out or borrowed while bookstores 374 would rent or sell the viewer and sell electronic book data. The bookstores 374 as well as the public libraries and schools 370 may be serviced by cable 378. Optional direct broadcast systems (DBS) 382 can also be used with the system 200. I. The Operations Center Figure 4 is a schematic ofthe operations center 250, which includes the uplink 254. The operations center 250 may gather text or books by receiving, formatting, storing, and encoding. A data stream 302 containing text may be received at the operations center 250 by a data receiver 402. The data receiver 402 is under the control of a processor 404. After reception, the data stream is formatted using digital logic for foiniatting 406 which is also under the control ofthe processor 404. If any additional text is generated at the operations center 250 locally for insertion into the distributed signal, the text generation is handled through text generator hardware 410, which may include a data receiver and a keyboard (not shown) . Following processing by the text generator 410, the additional text can be added to the text received by the combining hardware 414 that includes digital logic circuitry (not shown).
The processing at the operations center 250 is controlled by aprocessor 404, wliich uses an instruction memory 416. The processor 404 and instruction memory 416 maybe supphed by a personal computer or mini-computer, for example. To perform the catalog and messaging functions, the operations center 250 uses a catalog and message memory 420 and the text generator 410 if necessary.
The data stream of text, catalog and messages may be encoded by security module encoding 424 prior to being sent to the uplink module 254. Various encoding techniques may be used by the security encoding module 424 such as the commercial derivative of NS A's encryption algorithm (Data Encryption System (DES)) and General h strument's DigjCipher H Following encoding, the encoded text may be stored in text memory 428 prior to being sent to the uplink 254. A first-in-first-out text memory arrangement may be used under the control ofthe processor 404. Various types of memory may be used for the text memory 428 including RAM. The operations center 250 may use file server technology for the text memory 428 to catalog and spool books for transmission as is described below. The operations center 250 may also store the electronic book as compressed data files.
In an embodiment, to transmit textual data, the distribution system 208 (see Figure 2) may use high bandwidth transmission techniques such as those defined by the North American Broadcast Teletext Standard (NABTS) and the World System Teletext (WST) standard. Using the WST format (where each line ofthe Vertical Blanking hiterval contains 266 data bits), afourhundredpagebook, for example, maybe transmitted during regular television programming using four lines ofthe Vertical Blanking Interval at a rate of approximately one book every 1.6 minutes (63,840 bits per second). Alternatively, books may be transmitted over a dedicated channel, which interrupts programming so that 246 lines of video can be used to transmit approximately 2,250 books every hour (3.9 Mbits per second). A teletext type format is the simplest but possibly the slowest text format to use with the electronic book delivery system 200. In either event, an encoder 204 may be used at an uplink site 254 to insert textual data into the analog video signal. In many other respects, the delivery ofthe textual information may be completed using an existing cable television plant and equipment. Alternative transmit formats and delivery systems are presented in Section VII.
Figure 5a is a flowchart of steps involved in processing text from the publisher or provider 282 that may occur at the operations center 250. As shown in block 500, the publisher 282 processes data files of text for books, compresses, encrypts and sends the data files to the operations center 250 or uplink 254. Text files for books maybe sent one book at a time. As shown in block 504, the uplink 254 or operations center 250 receives and processes the data stream from the publisher 282. Generally, part of this processing includes encryption and error correction. Text files may be delivered for receipt by multiple home subsystems simultaneously, or to a specific individual home subsystem.
In Figure 5a, the electronic books are distributed to consumers using a video distribution system such as a cable television system. However, the electronic books may also be packaged as data packets and distributed over other telecommunications networks such as a digital wireless telephone network, for example. In one embodiment, as shown in block 508, files are broken into smaller packets of information. Header information is added to the packets. The bit stream is converted from a serial digital bit stream to an analog bit stream that is compatible with anNTSC video signal. Block 512 shows the switching of analog data into the video lines of a video signal. The analog data may be placed either in the VBI or the active video lines. In some instances, unused portions of bandwidth (such as 5-40 MHZ, 70-75 MHZ, 100-109 MHZ or other guard bands) may be used instead ofthe video lines. Alternate transmission methods are presented in Section VII. Figure 5b is an example of a hardware configuration to perform some ofthe functions for blocks 508 and 512. A video feed 516 is received and processed through a sync stripper 520. The stripped sync signal 532 is used by the digital logic control 524. The digital logic control 524 receives the sync signal 532 and a serial digital bit stream 528 for processing. The digital logic control 524 passes the serial digital bit stream to the Digital to Analog converter 536 and outputs a control signal 540 for the video switch 544. The video switch 544 integrates the video feed 516 and analog data stream 548 into a video feed with analog data signal inserted 552.
As an alternative to cable, broadcast or other television delivery methods, the public telephone system maybe used to transmit books to the subscribers. An average book would take about 7 minutes to transmit over the public telephone system. Using the telephone system, it is not necessary to combine video and text into a composite signal. In most other respects, the operations center would remain similar whether text delivery was by telephone or cable. File server technology (such as that described in U.S. Patent No. 5,262,875, entitled AI-roiO/VTDEOFJLESERVΕRlNCLlJDINGDECOMPRESSION /PLAYBACKMEANS, issued to Mincer, et al., and, U.S. PatentNo. 5,218,695, entitled FILE SERVER SYSTEM HAVING HIGH-SPEED WRITE EXECUTION , issued to Noveck, et al. , incorporated herein by reference) may be used at the operation center with a telephone system text delivery method.
As another alternative to cable, television, and telephone system delivery, the public telephone system may be used to provide access to the Internet, where the Internet web site 279 may be accessed. Electromc books may be ordered, paid for, and delivered directly from the Internet web site 279 over the telephone system.
When a wireless telephone network is used to distribute electronic books, or otherwise communicate with the home system 258, the home system may receive data using any one or more standardprotocols including time divisionmultiple access (TDMA), code divisionmultiple access (CDMA), Global Systems for Mobile Communications (GSM) and Advanced Mobile Telephone System (AMPS) protocols.
In any dehvery system using the telephone system, individual subscribers may increase the electronic book deliver rate by inco orating high speed modems or other communications devices such as an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) connector, or by use of a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). II. The Home Subsystem
The hardware configuration for a four component home system 258 is shown in Figure 6a. Figure 6b shows a hardware configuration for a two component home subsystem. The home system 258 performs several functions, such as receiving data and video transmissions, stripping (or extracting) the data from the video signal, screening and storing the data, providing user friendly interface controls and software, displaying menus and text, processing transactions, initiating telephone calls and transmitting billing data. Various hardware configurations may be utilized to achieve the desired functions ofthe home system 258. For example, as shown in figure 6b, the home system 258 can be configured to utilize the reception and channel tuning capability ofthe current installed subscriber base of cable converter boxes and televisions 601 and networked computers. The home system 258 can also be designed as an advanced set top terminal converter box with menu generation capability, electronic memory and a telephone modem as described in section V below. Alternatively, the home system 258 can be configured to support alternate delivery and ordering methods as described in Section VII.
The electronic components, whichmake up the home system 258 canbe arranged in a variety of ways. In the four unit subsystem of figure 6a the viewer 266 and library 262 are wired together while the remaining components communicate through RF transceivers 604. In a simple version ofthe home system 258 there are only two units, a library 262 and a viewer 266. Figure 6b shows a two unit home system 258 with certain optional features. The viewer 266 is generally equipped with a high resolution viewing area 602, digital logic (including a key 605, security 606, and amicroprocessor 621), video graphics control and memory 607, power supply circuitry 602 (not shown), an optional battery 603 and an optional RF transceiver 604. In a two unit arrangement, the hbrary 262 contains the connector function to the electronic book distribution system 208, comiector function to a public telephone communications system, and memory 600 (which may be removable and portable 600'). More specifically, the library 262 would include data stripping functions 617, digital logic 609, memory storage 600, power circuitry 610, optional connections 611 (including cellular or PCN 611'), optional battery (not shown), optional tuner module 613 and an optional RF transceiver 604. The connector 212 and the public telephone system connection 270, as well as the removable portable memory unit 600 ofthe library 262 may be broken out into separate components. (Figure 6b shows aremovable portable hard disk memory 600' with removable cartridges 614.) Finally, the home system 258 may include an attached keyboard 267 or a wireless keyboard 268. Both the attached keyboard 267 and the wireless keyboard 268 may be used to communicate with the viewer 266 (not shown) or the hbrary unit 262. The wireless keyboard 268 may communicate using radio frequency (RF) signaling, for example. hi an alternate arrangement, all functions of the home system 258 maybe incorporated into a single unit. The functions ofthe hbrary 262, for example, may be carried out by a card or chipset in the viewer 266. All the communications devices needed to couple the home system 258 to various telecommunications networks may also be incorporated into the viewer. All interfaces between the home system 258 and the subscriber may be included with the viewer 266. In this embodiment, the viewer 266 may include a communication device for receiving inputs from a separate keyboard. The viewer 266 may also include a built-in video camera 608 " that may be used to transmit images ofthe subscriber. Using the transceiver 608, the camera 608 " and the speaker/microphone 608 ' , the subscriber may use the viewer 266 for video conferencing, for example.
Therefore, the home system 258 may have as many as five separate components, which communicate with each other. The two, three, four or five separate components which make up the home subsystem can communicate with each other in a variety of ways, including hardwired connection 615, RF transceiver 604 and other wireless methods.
RF communications may be used in the home, allowing separate components to be located throughout the home without restriction. The data communicated between the units may be secure data. In addition, the library 262 may provide power to the viewer 266 through the hard wire communication link 615.
To receive and strip data from a video signal at the consumer' s home, a device such as a cable interface device or cable connector 212 is used. The cable connector device includes a tuner 613, while the cable interface device makes use of existing tuning equipment in the home, hi either configuration, data is stripped from the video signal and stored at the subscribers location in the library 262. The phone connector 270, optional connector 611, and modular connector 701 initiate communications and transmit ordering and billing information to the operations center 250 or billing and collection system 278. A digital connector 619 is provided to communicate digital information with the set top 601. The hbrary 262 is the intelligent component ofthe home subsystem, incorporating the hardware and software necessary to store the text data, generate menus and effect the purchase transactions.
In addition to an RF transceiver 604, the home library 262 also includes the necessary j acks and connections to allow the system to be connected to the viewer 266. As shown in Figure
6b, the library 262 communicates the text data to the viewer 266 in a secure format, which requires a key 605 for decryption. The text may be decrypted page by page just before viewing. a. The Video Connector
Figure 7 shows the flow ofthe processes performed by the video connector 212. The video connector 212 receives the video signal 608, tunes to the channel containing the text data 612, strips the text data from the video signal 616, and communicates the text data stream to logic components in the library 620.
The connection to the video distribution system may be a cable connector to a cable television dehvery system, as shown in Figure 6b. The cable connector includes a data stripper circuit 617, which accepts video input from either a set top converter, TV or VCR 601 , or an optional tuner block 613 that receives the CAIN signal through the cable connector 212'. The data stripper circuit 617 strips data out ofthe video, and outputs a digital bit stream to the digital logic portion 609 of the library unit 262. The data is embedded in the video signal either in the vertical blanking interval or the active video portion in an encrypted and compressed format. The data stripper circuit 617 can be placed inside the set top converter box 601 , TV, or in the library unit. The data stripper circuit 617 outputs the digital bit stream to be used by the library digital logic 609.
The video connector 212 may also contain a channel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped. Using the optional tuner module 613 , a set top converter, VCR, or TV tuner is not needed in the home subsystem. The optional tuner module 613 would instead receive the CATV signal directly through the cable connector 212. Additional connector options, wliich allow for the receipt of text files using alternative delivery methods, are presented in Section VII. This ubiquitous access is provided using the modular connector 700 as depicted in Figure 6b. b. Library
An embodiment ofthe library 262 for a two unit home subsystem is shown in both Figure 6b and Figure 8. The embodiment shown includes the following optional parts: the video connector 212, phone connector 270, RF transceiver 604, and battery pack 624 in addition to a removal portable memory 600', microprocessor 628, instruction memory unit 632, digital logic 636, and power unit 640.
The library 262 contains a digital logic section 609 (not shown in Figure 8) which includes the microprocessor 628, the digital logic 636 and the instruction memory unit 632. The microprocessor 628 maybe a secure microprocessor such as the Mot SC21 device sold by Motorola. The digital logic section 609 will receive the serial digital bit stream from the data stripper circuit 617 and process the data. Error correction will also be performed by the digital logic section 609 and the datawillbe checked forproper address. If the address ofthe data is correct and the library 262 is authorized to receive the data, the data will be transferred to the memory storage unit 600, 600 ' . Authorization to receive the data is provided by the cable headend or another distribution point. An authorization code may be sent in the serial digital bit stream. The digital logic section 609 will send appropriate text and graphical data to the memory storage unit 600, 600 '. It transfers this data in a compressed and encrypted format and the data remains stored in a compressed and encrypted format. i. Memory Storage Unit
The memory storage unit ofthe library may be a removable portable memory unit 600 '
(as shown in Figures 6a, 6b and 8). A variety of options are available for memory storage: a hard disk drive, such as an 80 megabyte, a 200 megabyte, a hard disk with removable platters, and CD ROM. Referring to Figure 6b, ahard disk drive unit 600', which contains removable platters, may also be used. This would provide virtually unlimited hbrary storage capacity. Data will be stored in the memory storage unit in a compressed and encrypted format. As is also shown in Figure 6b, the data may also contain a key or unique ID number that matches the ID or key ofthe viewer 266. This matching of a unique key or ID number prevents unauthorized transfer of text data from the memory storage unit to an unauthorized viewer. Small memory devices such as smart cards, electronic memory cards or PCM CIA cards (personal computer memory card industry association) may also be used to store the data. ii. Power Circuitry
As shown in figures 6b and 8, the library 262 will accept power from AC wall power 610, DC power 640, or optional battery power 624. The power circuitry 610, 640 may provide all the voltage necessary from either the battery 624 or AC unit for the various circuitry in the library. The power circuitry 610, 640 may also provide power to the viewer through a single data cable when connected to the viewer. The power circuitry 610, 640 will recharge the battery using AC power when in operation. With the optional battery unit 624 installed, the library 262 becomes a portable unit and can still provide power to the viewer 266. In order to extend battery life, power conservation measures may be utilized, such as shutting down the memory system when not in use. When the viewer unit 266 is being utilized and the library circuitry is not being utilized, virtually all power may be shut down to the library 262. iii. Connection to the Public Telephone System In an embodiment, the connection to the telephone system may be provided by a connector device 611, wliich consists of amodem. Various available modems may be used to perform this function. As shown in Figure 6b, cellular phone or PCN phone connections 611' may also be provided. When the home system 258 is first initialized, the modem may be used to transfer the name and credit card information ofthe consumer to the billing and collection system 278. The telephone connection 270 may be utilized each time an electronic book is purchased by a consumer to complete and record the transaction. The telephone connection 270 may also be used to receive the text data from the operations center 250, bypassing the video distribution system 208. The phone connection 270 may be aseparateunit as shown i Figure 6b. However, alternate means exist to connect the home system 258 to the billing and collection system 278 or the operation center 250. The modular connector 701 (shown in Figures 6b and 8) provides access to each communication network to provide a path from the home system 258 to the billing and collection system 278 or the operations center 250. These alternatives are presented in detail in Section VII. iv. Library Processing Figure 9 shows for one embodiment, an example of processing performed by the digital logic section 609 ofthe library 262 on the data stream 651 received from the video connector 212 or stripper circuit 617. In step S650, digital logic section 609 checks the data stream 651 for error correction . If an error is detected, in step S654 digital logic section 609 de-interleaves the data and in step S 658 runs a FEC (Forward Error Correcting) algorithm. In steps S650, S654 and S658, the digital logic section 609 performs the error correction needed on the data stream. If no error correction is necessary the digital logic section 609 proceeds to step S662 and checks data packets individually for packet address. If the address is a unique address, the process moves to step S666 and the digital logic section 609 checks whether the address ofthe packet matches the hbrary box ID number. The hbrary box ID number is aunique number associated with the hbrary 262. The hbrary box ID is used to ensure security ofthe data. The process then moves to step S670 and the digital logic section 609 determines whether an electronic file has already been opened into which the datapacketcanbe saved. Ifno data file has been opened, the digital logic section 609 opens a new data file for that packet. If an electronic file has been opened, the process moves to step S678 and the digital logic section 609 saves the packet in the electronic file on disk. The process moves to step 682 and the digital logic section 609 checks to see if this is the last packet for a particular book for a particular textual data block being received. If it is the last packet of information, the process moves to step 686 and the digital logic section 609 closes the electronic file and updates the directory of available electronic files. Following either step S682 or S686, the process returns to receive another data packet from the data stream received from the data stripper block. If the packet address is checked and the address is determined to be a broadcast address, the process moves to step S690 and the digital logic section 609 determines the type of message that is being sent. The message may be an index of book titles, menu (and menu graphics) infonnation, announcements, special offerings, discounts, promotions, and previews, for example. The process thenmoves to step S694 and the digital logic section 609 stores the message in an appropriate electronic message file. The process then returns to step S650to receive another data packet and perform another error check.
Using the process of Figure 9, the library 262 is able to receive, store and update directories related to the textual data and graphical data (that can be used to depict pictures in a given book or to generate menus) . Variations ofthe processes are possible depending on the format ofthe data and operating system ofthe library 262.
Figure 10 shows an example ofthe processing of information requests from the viewer 266 at the library 262. Information requests from the viewer 266 are received either through the cable connecting the viewer 266 to the library 262 or through wireless transmissions such as RF. It is possible in some embodiments for subscribers' requests to come from a set top converter box 602 (see Section V).
Information requests received from the viewer 266 generally fall into three categories : (1) directory data of books stored in the library 262, (2) index of all available books on the system, and (3) requests for a specific book (step S700). hi step S704, the digital logic section 609 answers a request from the viewer 266 for a directory of data showing the books stored at the viewer 266. The directory of data is sent to the viewer 266 so that it may be displayed to the subscriber. In step S708, the digital logic section 609 handles requests from the viewer 266 for an index of all available books on the system. The hbrary 262 will obtain an mdex of all the available books on the system and transmit that index, in step S712, with menu information to the viewer 266. hi step S716, the digital logic section 609 replies to arequest from the viewer 266 for a specific book. In step S720, the digital logic section 609 opens an electronic file for the specific book requested by the viewer 266 and transmits the record or transmits the information on a packet-by-packet basis to the viewer 266. This process of transmitting the specific book, record, or packets to the viewer 266 continues until the last record or packet has been sent in step S724.
In addition to the processes shown on Figure 10 in handling a request for a specific book, the library 262 also orders and receives specific books from the operations center 250 using the process as described in step S716. Following a request for a specific book which is not stored at the hbrary 262, the library 262 will proceed to deteimine the next available time the book will be on the video distribution system 208 or an alternative delivery system and ensure reception and storage of that book (process not shown). In performing this process the library 262 will transmit to the viewer information on when it will obtain the text data for the book so that the subscriber may view the book. In addition to timing information, price and other ordering information may also be passed by the library 262 to the subscriber, c. The Viewer
Figure 11 is ablock diagram of a viewer 266 showing its internal components. The viewer 266 of Figure 11 is similar to the viewer 266 depicted in Figure 6b. The viewer 266 is designed to physically resemble abound book. The viewer 266 is made up of five primary components and seven optional components: (1) LCD display 602, (2) digital circuitry (not shown), (3) video graphics controller 607', (4) controls 740, (5) book memory 728, (6) optional power supply circuitry 736, (7) optional battery 603 ' , (8) optional RF transceiver 604, and (9) optional cellular or mobile connector (such as 611 ') (10) optional keyboards 267 and 268, and (11) an optional speaker/microphone 608', (12) optional alternative communication interface devices.
(1) A high resolution LCD screen 602, ofVGA quality, may be used by the viewer 266 to display text and graphic images. The screen may be the size of one page of an electronic book. A two page screen or two screens may also be used with the viewer 266.
(2) Digital circuitry that includes a secure microprocessor 621 , instruction memory 732, and digital logic. Data is transferred to the viewer 266 in compressed and encrypted format. The secure microprocessor 621 compares the ID number ofthe viewer 266 with the incoming data stream and only stores the text data if the ID number ofthe viewer 266 matches that within the mcoming data stream. The viewer 266 may be configured to not output text data or other data and that the data is decompressed and decrypted only at the moment of viewing and only for the current page being viewed. These measures provide additional security against unauthorized access to data. (3) A video graphics controller 607 ' that is capable of assisting and displaying
VGA quality text and graphic images is included in the viewer 266. The graphics controller 607 ' is controlled by the digital circuitry described above. Text may be displayed in multiple font sizes.
(4) The viewer 266 of Figure 11 has touchpanel controls 740. These unique and novel controls 740 allow the consumer to select stored electronic books and electronic books from catalogues, move a cursor, and turnpages in an electronic book. Typically, the controls 740 include forward and reverse page buttons 742, 741 , a ball 743 for cursor movement, one or more selection buttons 745, a current book button 747 and a bookmark button 749 (see Figure 14a).
The controls 740 should be easy to use and conveniently located. Referring to Figure 14a, the controls for the viewer 266 may be located below the screen 602 at the bottom portion ofthe viewer 266. The next page turn button 742 is the most used button 740 andis located towards the right edge ofthe page. The subscriber is likely to use right hand thumb movements to work the controls particularly the page turn buttons 741 , 742. Therefore, the buttons may be arranged in such a manner that the buttons are easily controlled by a subscriber's right thumb. Generally, this can be accommodated either on the lower portion of the viewer 266 (as shown) or along the right hand margin ofthe viewer 266 (not shown) . The current book button 747 and bookmark button 749 are usually the least used ofthe controls 740. Therefore, in the example shown, those buttons 747, 749 are located on the inside portion to wards the binder of the viewer 266 Locating the ball 743 or other cursor movement device (such as four pointer arrows not shown) in the bottom center ofthe viewer 266 is both easier for the subscriber to use and easier in manufacturing the viewer 266. The selection buttons for the cursor 745 may be located below the middle diameter ofthe cursor ball 743 on the right and left sides ofthe ball as shown. If pointer arrows are used for cursor movement, a selection button 745 may be located in the center ofthe four arrow buttons (not shown) . Again, the most used controls 740 should be located where a subscriber' s right hand thumb would normally rest.
(5) Book memory 728 for at least one electronic book or more of text is included in the viewer 266. The memory 728 stores text and any graphics, which represent pictures in a book. The memory 728 can also store menu graphics data. Two different memory 728 devices may be used in the viewer 266, one for the instructions for the microprocessor 621 in H e digital circuitry andasecondtypeofmemorymaybeusedforthebookmemory 728 (and graphics). Various memory devices available on the market may be used such as, ROM, RAM or a small hard disk. Since an electronic book requires approximately 0.6 megabytes of storage, a small hard disk providing approximately 60 MBytes of storage provides memory to store approximately 100 electronic books.
Text for electronic books maybe displayed in various font sizes. To accommodate various fonts for display, a variety of fonts are stored in instruction 732 or book memory 728. Thus larger or smaller fonts maybe recalled from memory 621, 728 to create displays desired by the subscriber.
(6) Power supply circuitry 736 in the viewer 266 will accept power from either an AC power source or from an optional battery 603 ', or the library 262. The power supply circuitry 736 provides the necessary voltages to accommodate the various systems within the viewer 266.
(7) An optional battery 603 ' is provided in one embodiment. The battery 603 ' is automatically recharged when AC power is available.
(8) An optional RF transceiver 604 which provided two-way data linkbetween the viewer 266 and other components ofthe home subsystem can also be included in the viewer 266.
(9) Also, the viewer 266 may include a cellular transceiver (not shown) for mobile communications.
(10) The optional wired (attached) keyboard 267 and wireless (e.g., RF) keyboard 268 (see Figure 6a) maybe used with the viewer 266 to provide communications between the subscriber and the viewer 266.
(11) The optional speaker and microphone 608 ' allow the viewer 266 to provide audio signals to the subscriber, and allow the subscriber to provide an audio input. The speaker and microphone 608 ' may be used in conjunction with the cellular transceiver 608 or other telecommunications equipment to provide for reception and transmission of telephony and data.
(12) The optional alternative communication interface devices allow the viewer 266 to make use of a variety of communication paths. The viewer 266 of Figure 11 has parts available for providing connections to: a hbrary 744, electronic cardmemory 748, CD ROM units 752, and aportable memory unit 756 (such as that shown in Figure 6b as 600'). Various electronic memory cards such as PCMCIA can be used with the viewer 266 to supply and store electronic books. Security, low power consumption and excellent display technology are desired features ofthe viewer 266 design. The viewer 266 should be lightweight and portable. The viewer 266 contains a software operating system that allows electronic books to be stored, read and erased and includes the capability to order electronic books and retain them in memory 728 for a predefined period of time determined by the system operator. The software can be configured to allow the electromc book to be read during aperiod of time (i.e., two weeks) and then automatically erased, read once and erased, or held in memory permanently. Each viewer 266 may have a unique key 605. All ofthe data storage may be encrypted with the key 605 for an individual viewer 266 to prevent more than one viewer 266 accessing the text file or electronic book file. Figure 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes executed by the microprocessor
621 in the viewer 266. The viewer 266 may receive inputs from the subscriber through touch panel controls 740. hi step S800, the subscriber's information requests are then processed by the microprocessor 621.
In step S804, if the subscriber requests a menu of available electronic books, the microprocessor 621 will select an electronic book menu. Instep S808, the microprocessor 621 will open the electronic files that list the electronic books which are available (related to the category of topic ofthe menu) and display the menu with the names ofthe available electronic books.
If the subscriber selects a particular book to read, then in step S812, the microprocessor 621 will process the selection and detein ine the electronic file that contains the specific electronic book. In step S816, the microprocessor 621 will open the file for that specific electronic book and normally access the firstpage. (If apointer has already been set in that books electronic file, the process may default to that page.) In step S820, the microprocessor 621 will then determine which page needs to be displayed. That is, the microprocessor 621 will detein-ine whether a next page, previous page or a bookmarked page needs to be displayed. If the pointer for the electronic file is not in the correct location then in step S828, the microprocessor 621 will move the pointer and obtain the previous page of data from the stored file. Otherwise, in step S 824, the microprocessor 621 will normally obtain the next page of text from the stored electronic file. In step S832, the microprocessor 621 will decrypt and decompress the text data and send the data to the video display. The video display will generally have a video display memory associated with it. In step S832, the microprocessor 621 will send the data directly to that video display memory. The circuitry for the display then completes the process of displaying the page of text.
If the subscriber, through the controls 740, requests (from step S800) that the power be turned off, then in step S 836, the microprocessor 621 imtiates power off. Instep S840,the microprocessor 621 saves the pointer in memory to the page number in the book that the viewer 266 is currently reading, h step S 844, the microprocessor 621 closes all the electronic files and signals the power circuitry to shut down the power to the various circuits in the viewer 266. With these examples ofbasic processes the viewer 266 is able to display book selections and display text from those electronic books, d. Menu System
Referring generally to Figure 13 , the electronic book system 200 may have amenu system 851 for selecting features and books from the electronic book system 200. The operating software and memory required for the menu system 851 may be located at the viewer 266 (e.g. , the instruction memory 732 and/or book memory 728) . However, it can also be located at the library 262 (e.g., the instruction memory 632) or the library 262 and the viewer 266 can share the software and memory needed to operate the menu system 851. Since the menus are usually displayed on the viewer, and since the viewer 266 maybe capable of operating in the absence ofthe library 262, the basic software and memory to create the menus is more conveniently located at the viewer 266. The menu system 851 allows sequencing between menus andprovides menu graphics for graphical displays such as on the LCD display 602 ofthe viewer 266. In an electronic book system that uses a set top converter these menus may also be displayed on a television screen, hi an electronic book system that uses a computer, these menus may also be displayed on the computer monitor, hi an embodiment, the menus provide just basic text information from which the subscriber makes choices, hi other embodiments, the menus provide visual displays with graphics and icons to assist the subscriber and allow for subscriber interaction and real-time ordering of electronic books or other content available to the subscriber.
Figure 13 depicts the menu system 851 with sequencing. The primary menus in the menu system 851 are an introductory menu 850, amainmenu 854 and various submenus 858. In the embodiment shown, there are three levels of submenus 858. h certain instances one or two submenus 858 is sufficient to easily direct the subscriber to the selection or information requested. However, there are features in which three or more submenus 858 make the user interface more friendly for the subscriber. Each level of submenus 858 may consist of multiple possible menus for display. The particular menu displayed depends on the selection by the subscriber on the previous shown menu. An example of this tree sequence of one to many menus are the help submenus 887, 888. Depending upon the specific help requested, a different level two help menu is displayed to the subscriber.
An example of an introductory menu 850 is shown on Figure 14a. Generally the introductory menu 850 introduces the viewer 266 to the system andprovides initial guidance, announcements and instruction. The introductory menu 850is followed by amainmenu 854, an example ofwhich is shown in Figure 14b. The main menu provides the viewer 266 with the basic selection or features available in the system. Figure 14b is an example of amammenu 854 offering many additional features and submenus 858 to the subscriber. For example, Figure 14b shows that the viewer 266 is able to choose by apoint and click method, many options including: (1) free previews, (2) books you can order, (3) books in your library, (4) your current book, (5) help, (6) on-line services and (6) other system features. Following a selection on the main menu 854, a corresponding submenu 858 is shown. Figure 13 shows fourteen available primary or first level submenus. Theyare(l) account set up 862, (2) free previews 866, (3) book suggestion entries 855, (4) books in your library 872, (5) books you can order 878, (6) your current book 884, (7) help 887, (8) available features 890, (9) messages 893, (10) account information 896, (11) outgoing message submenu 898, (12) show links submenu 970, (13) create links submenu 980, and (14) show interactive files submenu 990. Figure 14c is an example of a first level submenu for books in your library 872. This "Book In Your Library" example submenu 872 shows six available books by title and author and provides the subscriber with the ability to check a different shelf of books 874 or return to the main menu 854. Figures 14d and 14e show example submenus 858 for books that may be ordered using the "Books You Can Order" submenu 878.
Figure 14f is an example of a confirmation menu which confirms a subscribers order. In this particular example, the subscriber is required to enter a PIN number to complete the subscriber's order. Any alpha-numeric or similar password may be used to ensure the subscriber is an authorized subscriber, hi one embodiment, the subscriber confirms an order with a PJN or password and then receives a final confirmation screen. The final confirmation screen is primarily text and may state:
Your book order is now being processed using CABLE.
Your book will be delivered overnight and your VISA account will be charged $2.95.
Your book will be available for reading at 6:00AM EST tomorrow. Make sure that:
1. your Library Unit and Cable Connection Unit are plugged in with aerials up tonight; and 2. you tune your cable converter to THE BOOK Channel. The TV set does not have to remain on. or similar language. Examples ofthe "Account Set Up Menu" 862 and further submenus 858 related to account set up (which provide instructions and account input 864) are shown in Figures 14g and Figure 14h. These submenus 858 allow initiahzation of an account at the operations center 250 and orders to be charged to credit cards. The submenus 858 include the ability to enter data related to your desired PIN number or password, credit cards, phone numbers, etc. hi one embodiment, the account set up be performed using the telephone system. A confirmation menu verifies that the account has been properly set up with the desired PIN or password and credit card. However, additional set-up methods are presented in Section VII.
Free previews for books 866 are also provided by submenus (868, 870). Examples ofthe free preview menus are shown in Figure 14i and Figure 14j . Figure 14i shows a menu depicting various books for which previews are available for viewing. Following a book selection, a screen submenu showing an excerpt ofthe selected book cover's description is provided along with an excerpt from a critic's review of the selected book. In one embodiment, this preview screen for aparticular book also allows the subscriber to selecta submenu which provides information aboutthe author. The book preview suhrnenumay also include a still video picture or graphics portraying abook cover or a scene from the book. An example of such a still video picture or graphics is shown in figure 14j which depicts apreview screen 870 about the author. The author's preview screen 870 shows a picture ofthe author, provides a short biography, and may allow the subscriber to order the author ' s books. The price for ordering the authors various books may also be shown on the menu.
In addition to free previews, in other embodiments, the electronic book system 200 provides the subscriber with abook suggestion feature (see 855). This is accomplished using the menu system 851 and the processor with associated memory located at the viewer 266, library 262 or at the distribution point (1020 or 250). When necessary, information for the book suggestion feature is sent in the text data ofthe signal to the home system 258. With this feature, books or authors are suggested to a subscriber based upon historical data ofthe subscriber's previous orders, demographics or mood ofthe subscriber, other indicators, and/or by text word searches. hi one book suggestion embodiment, text word searches of preview information (such as book cover descriptions, critics reviews and biographies about the author) and/or text of books or other titles are performed by the library 262 using databases stored in the library memory 600. Personalized book or author suggestions are made to the subscriber by obtaining information from the subscriber indicative of general subscriber interests. Subscriber entries may be solicited from the subscriber using the book suggestion entry submenu 855. The system uses these subscriber entries either directly or indirectly to search for books or authors to suggest to the subscriber.
Generally, the electronic book suggestion methods may be categorized into two categories, either responsive methods (which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries), or intelhgent methods (which analyze data to suggest abook). Using aresponsive or intelligent method, the system 200 determines a list of suggested titles or authors and creates a second or third level submenu 856, 857 to suggest the titles for subscriber selection.
Responsive methods of suggesting titles include, for example, the use of mood questions, searching for authors, andkeyword searching. Using the instruction memory 732 and menu generation hardware (e.g., 607) ofthe viewer 266, a series of mood questions can be presented on menus to determine a subscribers interest at a particular time. For this methodology, the operations center' s 250 processor 404 and instruction memory 416 assign each title mood indicators (and sub-indicators) from a group such as light, serious, violent, short, long, dull, exciting, complex, easy-read, young theme, old theme, adventure, romance, drama, fiction, science-fiction, etc. These indicators are sent to the home system 258 with the text data and are stored in library memory 600. Based upon the subscriber entries, the processor associates a set of indicators with the subscriber' s request and a set of books with matching indicators are located for suggesting to the subscriber. Responsive searches for authors or keywords (a search word provided by the subscriber) are generally performed by the library processor 628 and instruction memory 632 on data stored in the library memory 600. For example, a keyword given by the subscriber may be searched for a match in library memory 600 storing the book reviews, critics and previews databases. Thus, if a subscriber provided an entry ofthe word "submarine" on an appropriate submenu, the title ' Ηunt For Red October' ' may be located by the microprocessor 628 using instruction from a routine in instruction memory 632.
Intelligent methods of suggesting programs include analyzing personal profile data on the subscriber and/or historical data about the subscriber such as past books ordered by the subscriber (or buy data). This method maybe performed at the distribution point or operations center 250 by the on-site processor 404 using subscriber databases stored in memory 428. The home system 258 receives the text data mcluding program suggestion infonnation from the distribution point or operations center 250 and generates the program suggestion submenus 855, 856, 857usmgthesametextdatareceiving212 and viewer menu generation hardware (e.g., 607, 621) described above. Software routines and algorithms stored in instruction memories (e.g. 632, 732) are used to analyze historical data and book ordered data to determine a line of books to suggest to the subscriber.
The algorithms for this powerful feature of suggesting books or authors to subscribers is disclosed in great detail in U.S. Patent Number 5,798,785, entitled TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed December 2, 1993, which is incorporated herein by reference.
Referring to Figure 13, submenus 858 are shown on the "Books In Your Library" submenu 872 and may be broken into shelf numbers with submenus for each shelf 874, 876. The submenus 858 for the "Books You Can Order" submenu 878 is similarly broken out into submenus by shelves 880, 882. These shelves may each be a category or genre of books. Books may be grouped into categories such as best sellers, novels, fiction, romance, etc. See Figure 14d.
Referring to Figure 13, the submenu 858 for "Your Current Book" 884 allows a subscriber to select a current book 884 and then determine what page to view. This selection is confirmed with a level two submenu 885. The help submenu 887 provides the subscriber with additional help screens 888. The submenus 858 for available features 890 maybe broken out into a sequence of separate submenus for each feature 891, 892. Referring to Figure 13 , messages can also be sent with the electronic book selection and delivery system 200. A level one message screen provides the subscriber with the ability to select from various messages the subscriber has pending 893. Each message is then shown on a separate submenu screen 894, 895. The message may contain text and graphics. Referring to Figure 13 , account information is shown on a level one submenu 896 and then follow-on submenus 858 show the recent orders and your account balance 897. There is also a level one submenu for outgoing messages 898 wliich has a follow-on submenu used as an input screen 899. h addition to the specific features and submenus described in Figure 13 andFigure 14a through Figure 14j, many other variations and features are possible. When a book is finally selected for viewing the title page 886 will appear on the screen followed by a page of text. III. Billing And Collection System
In one embodiment, the billing and collection system 278 (shown in Figures 2 and 3) utilizes the latest technology in electronic transaction and telephone switching to track orders, authorize deliveries, bill consumers, and credit publishers automatically. The telephone calls initiated by the phone connector 270 are received by the billing and collection system 278 which responds immediately without human intervention by placing the order and charging the consumers credit card account. Data is compiled periodically and publishers 282 are credited for sales of their books or other text. The billing and collection system 278 may also connect with subscribers through two-way cable connections, cellular, or other communication means. These additional methods are detailed in Section VII.
The billing and collection system 278 communicates with the operations center to track changes in available books and to provide statistical data to the operations center 250. IN. Public Library, School, and Bookstore System
The electronic book system canbe modified to be used at public libraries, schools, bookstores, newsstands, or stand-alone kiosks. Figure 15 shows one possible arrangement of components for the distribution location. The main unit is the file server 900. The file server 900 is a large electronic memory unit that can store thousands of books, newspapers, or periodicals. Various electronic storage means maybe used in the file servers, such as hard disks, read-write CD ROMs and read-only CD ROMs.
The system comprises five components; the file server 900, a converter or video connector 904 or connector capable of interfacing to one ofthe alternative delivery systems presented in Section VII,' a controller 908, a viewer 912, and a catalog printer 916. The software for controlling the system is primarily located in the controller 908. The converter or video connector 904 is similar to those described above, hi this configuration the controller unit 908 monitors the data being transferred to the file server 900 by the converter 904. The controller 908 may be provided with a viewing screen and several control buttons. When it is necessary to have a larger screen to perform more sophisticated controlling ofthe system a viewer 266 may be connected to the controller 908 and the viewer screen and controls 740 may be used.
For security reasons, the controller 908 is only able to download books to public viewers 912 which are authorized to receive books from the particular file server 900. Also for security reasons it is not desirable that the public viewer 912 have access to more than one file server 900. In this way, security can be maintained over the text data for books. The public viewer 912 may be limited to receiving one or two books at a time from the controller 908. When the user ofthe public viewer 912 needs a new or additional book, the user returns the viewer 912 to the school or public library where the user receives a new book from the controller 908.
In order to track the books that are available on the file server 900, the titles ofthe available books may be printed on a catalog printer 916. The catalog printer 916 is connected to the library controller 908 and the titles ofthe books are downloaded to the catalog printer 916. For security reasons, the coded text for any of the electronic books may not be authorized for printing using the controller 908 and catalog printer 916. In order to maintain security over the data, none ofthe electronic book data may be allowed to be downloaded to the printer 916. Once a complete printout of available book titles, magazines, or other textual material is complete, a hard copy ofthe catalog 920 can be maintained at the file server 900. The system shown may also be used at bookstores. The bookstores can rent the public viewer 912 to customers with the text for one or two books loaded onto the public viewer912. The pubhc viewer 912 may beprovided with an automatic timeout sequence. The timeout sequence would erase the textual data for the books after a certainperiod of time, for example, two weeks. It is expected that after aperiod of time (perhaps within two weeks) the renter would return the public viewer 912 to the bookstore and receive additional books for viewing. Using this arrangement, it is also possible for the bookstore to (permanently) sell a viewer 912 to a regular customer. The customer then returns to the bookstore from time to time to receive textual data for a book which the customer can then store pennanently on the customer's own viewer 912. Various other configurations are possible for bookstores, schools and public libraries using the file server 900 and public viewer 912 described. V. Use Of A Set Top Converter Existing set top converter boxes such as those made by Scientific Atlanta or General
Instruments are presently unequipped to handle the book selection system ofthe present invention. Although set top converters may be built which include the library functions, hardware modifications are necessary in order to use the book selection system with existing set top converter technology. Figures 16a and 16b are examples ofhardware modifications or upgrades. A port is used to attach hardware upgrades described below to a set top terminal. Two upgrades are possible to set top converters 601 to assist in receiving and selecting electronic books, a menu generation card upgrade (Figure 16a) and an information download unit (Figure 16b). Each of these upgrades maybe connected to the set top terminal unit through an upgrade port. A four wire cable, ribbon cable, FireWire (IEEE 1394B) interface connector, USB connector, or the like may be used to connect the upgrade to the set top converter 601.
A card addition 950 to a set top converter 601 is depicted in Figure 16a. The card 950 shown provides the additional.functionality needed to utilize the book selection system with existing set top converter 601 technology. The card 950 may be configured to slip inside the frame of a set top terminal and become part ofthe set top teπninal, an advanced set top terminal. The primary functions the card 950 adds to the set top converter 601 are the interpreting of data signals, generating of menus, sequencing of menus, and, ultimately, the ability ofthe subscriber to select a book using either the television or a viewer 266. The card 950 also provides a method for a remote location, such as the cable headend, to receive information on books ordered. The books ordered information and control commands may be passed from the cable headend to the card 950 using telephone lines or alternative ordering methods as presented in Section VII. The primary components ofthe card 950 are a PC chip CPU 952, a VGA graphic controller 954, a video combiner 956, logic circuitry 958, NTSC encoder 960, a receiver 962, demodulator (not shown), and a connector 611 ', which consists of a dialer. The card 950 operates by receiving the data text signal from the cable headend through the coaxial cable. The logic circuitry 958 ofthe card 950 receives data 964, infrared commands 966, and synchronization signals (not shown) from the set top converter 601. Menu selections made by the viewer 266 on the remote control are received by the set top converter' s 601 IR equipment andpassed through to the card 950. The card 950 interprets the IR signal and determines the book (or menu) the subscriber has selected. The card 950 modifies the IR command to send the h-formation to the set top converter 601. The modified IR command contains the channel information needed by the set top converter 601. Using the phone line 968 and dialer 611 ', the card 950 is able to transmit electronic books ordered information to the cable headend. It is also possible to receive the electronic books over the telephone lines and other telecommunications networks, mcluding wireless networks, and by-pass the video distribution system. These commands are passed through the interface linking the set top terminal's microprocessor with the microprocessor ofthe hardware upgrades. In this way, subscriber inputs, entered through the set top teiminal keypad or remote control, can be transferred to any ofthe hardware upgrades for processing and responses generated therein can then be sent back to the set top terminal for display. In one embodiment the IR commands 966 are transferred from set top tenninal 601 to hardware upgrade.
Hardware upgrades may include a microprocessor, interactive software, processing circuitry, bubble memory, and a long-term memory device. In addition to these basic components, the hardware upgrade may make use of an additional telephone modem or CD- ROM device.
An information download hardware upgrade 1001 shown in Figure 16b allows the subscriber to download large volumes of information from the operations center 250 or cable headend using a set top terminal 610. The hardware upgrade 1001 will enable subscribers to download data, such as electronic books and electronic magazines, to local storage. Primarily, the hardware upgrade 1001 is an additional local storage unit 1003 (e.g., hard disk, floppy, optical disk or magnetic cartridge and may include a microprocessor 1005, instruction memory 1007, and arandom access memory 1009, as shown in Figure 16b). A small portable viewer may also provided with the upgrade 1001 to enable downloaded text to be read without the use of a television.
The downloadable information may be text or graphics supplied by the operations center 250 or cable headend. With the upgrade 1001, electronic books may be downloaded and read anywhere with the viewer 266. Usmg the upgrade 1001, electronic books maybe downloaded and stored in compressed form for later decompression. The electronic books may be decompressed only at the time of viewing. Important text that the public desires immediate access may made available through this system. Text such as the President's speech, a new law, or a recent abortion decision rendered by the Supreme Court may be made immediately available.
In one embodiment, electronic book ordering information is stored at each set top terminal 610 until it is polled by the cable headend using apolhng request message format. An example of a polling request message format consists of six fields, namely: ( 1 ) a leading flag at the beginning ofthe message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end ofthe message. A similar response frame format for information communicated by the set top tem-inal to the cable headend in response to the polling request may be used.
Figure 17 shows components of a set top terminal 610'. The components include a data receiver 617' and a data transmitter 1011. The data transmitter provides upstream data communications capability between the set top teπnhial 610' and the cable headend. Upstream data transmissions are accomplished using the polling system described and, using a data transmitter 1011. Both receiver 617' and transmitter 1011 may be built into the set top terminal 610' itself or added through an upgrade module. Regardless ofthe specific hardware configuration, the set top tennina! s data transmission capabilities may be accomplished using the hardware shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17 shows RF signals, depicted as being received by a data receiver 617' and tuner 613 working in unison. Both of these devices are interfaced with the microprocessor 1013, which receives inputs 1015, from the subscriber, either through a set top terminal' s keypad, aremotecontrolunitorviewer266. Generally, all cable signals intended for reception on the subscriber's TV are accessed by the tuner 613 and subsequently processed by the processing circuitry 1017. This processing circuitry 1017 typically includes additional components (not shown) for descrambling, demodulation, volume control andremodulation on a Channel 3 or 4 TV carrier. Data targeted to individual set top terminals is received by the data receiver 617' according to each set top terminal's specific address or ID. hi this way, each addressable set top terminal 610' only receives its own data. The data receiver 617' may receive set top terminal 610' specific data in the information field ofthe signal frame described or on a separate data carrier located at a convenient frequency in the incoming spectrum. The received data includes information regarding electronic books and menus available for selection. The subscriber may enter a series of commands 1015 using a keypad or remote control in order to choose an electronic book or menu. Upon receipt of such commands, the set top terminal' s microprocessor 1013 instructs the tuner to tune to the proper frequency of the channel carrying data and subsequently instructs the processing circuitry 1017 to begin descrambling of this data.
Upon selection of an electronic book, the microprocessor 1013 stores any selection information in local memory (not shown) for later data transmissionback to the cable headend. The set top terminal' s microprocessor 1013 coordinates all CATV signal reception and also interacts with various upstream data transmission components. Typically, the data transmitter 1011 operates in the return frequency band between 5 and 30 MHZ. In an alternative embodiment, the frequency band of 10 to 15 MHZ may be used. Regardless, however, ofthe frequency band used, the data fransmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field ofthe response frame described. Those skilled in the art will recognize that a number of variations and combinations ofthe above-described set top terminal hardware components may be used to accomplish upstream data transmissions.
VI. Books-On-Demand System
The electronic book system 200 described may also be configured in abook-on- demand style. Figure 18a shows one example of a configuration for a book-on-demand system. A book on demand system requires more powerful two-way communications between the consumer's home, bookstore, school or public library and either the operations center 250 or a distribution site 1020 such as the cable headend, h one embodiment, this type of two- way communication can be provided by the hardware shown in Figure 17 and described above. Additional methods related to alternative communication paths are presented in Section VII.
Referring to Figure 18a, in abook-on-demand system, the subscriber selects the book to be download from an available menu ofbooks (see for example Figures 14d and 14e) . The data for menus of available books is usually sent to the subscriber location by the distribution site 1020. After the subscriber's menu selection, information about the subscriber selection (or request) is then communicated to either a distribution point 1020 (such as a cable headend) or the operations center 250. Upon receipt of this request, the needed textual and graphical information for the book is spooled and sent to the subscriber, h this manner, electronic books are only sent when requested by the subscriber and are sent nmediately upon demand for the electronic book (or text).
In order to support such a demand system, the text delivery and distribution must be conducted on a strong nodal architecture distribution system, such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system, through use of individual telephone calls on the public telephone system or cellular phone system, tlirough the use ofthe hitemet, or anumber of other data network options.
The book-on-demand system allows for a greater selection of electronic books to the subscriber and limits the amount of communicated book data that is unnecessary or unneeded. It also provides the electronic book to the subscriber in a much timelier fashion.
In addition to a stronger distribution system, a book-on-demand system requires a distribution point 1020 to have more sophisticated equipment to access and "spool out" the textual information. This can be accomplished using file server technology 1024 for storing the books and distribution technology such as ATM 1028 or telephone-type switching (not shown) to distribute the textual information. The file server 1024 and distribution technology that can be used in configuring such a book-on-demand system is described in U.S. Patent No. 5,262,875 and U.S. Patent 5,218,695, cited above.
Figure 18a shows an embodiment for a book-on-demand system that utilizes file server technology. In addition to books, the embodiment of Figure 18a will support distribution of nearly any digital data. Books or textual files are received from publishers 282 and other sources through local feeds 1032, ATM 1028, or by satelhte dish 1036, for example. The data is then stored in memory 1040 at the file server 1024. In one embodiment, the distribution point 1020 is a cable headend that receives requests from subscribers and delivers text to subscribers over a two-way communication system (such as a video-on-demand system (VOD) 1044). The hbrary 262 can be connected to either abasic premium-type service cable system 1048, a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052) or a video- on-demand cable system 1044. In connecting with either of these three systems the library 262 may access the cable directly or may access the system through a set top terminal 601 ' , 601 " , or 601'".
Using the two-way video-on-demand system 1044, a subscriber is able to request a specific book title and receive that text immediately following its request. To accomplish this, the distribution point 1020 transmits a list of available books through the cable dehvery system to the library 262. The library 262 displays the list of available books on amenu or similar format. As described earlier, the hbrary 262 may use menus which list categories of available books to form its request from the distribution point 1020. After selecting a book the library 262 then sends a request signal on the two-way communication system 1044 back to the distribution point 1020. This request signal can be handled in two ways. The hbrary 262 either initiates the request or the distribution point 1020 polls the various libraries on to the two-way system 1044. Upon receiving the request for the book title, the text associated with that book title is transmitted to the library 262 using the two-way cable system 1044.
Figure 18b is an expanded view of an operations center 250 that supports a regional or national book-on-demand system. In fact, the operations center 250 shown supports distribution of nearly any digital data. The operations center 250 supports multiple feeds to receivedigitalinfonnationbytape 1060, 1060', ATM 1028, orsatellite 1036. The information is processed through an input MUX 1064 and a small file server 1068 before reaching the master file server 1072. Digital data such as books received from publishers 282 is then stored on the master file server 1072. The digital data may be stored compressed in a standard format such as MPEG2. A system controller 1076 provides control over the regional or national book-on- demand system. Books may be packaged into groups to provide feeds to various cable headends. In addition, scheduling and marketing research are conducted at the operations center 250. In order to handle the scheduling and market research, book buy data is received at the operations center 250 through a multiplexer 1082. Book buy information can be provided by the operation center 250 to the billing and collection system 278.
The operations center 250 is also equipped to insert messages or advertisements into the file server. These messages or advertisements will eventually be received by the subscribers.
The master file server 1072 uses an output multiplexer 1080 and ATM 1028 as well as satellite connections to distribute digital data, hi one embodiment, cable headends receive text data onbooks from the master file server 1080 through the output multiplexer 1028 and an ATM system 1028. After receiving the digital book data, the cable headends store the books in a local file server 1024. Figure 18a's distribution point 1020 is an example of a cable headend which may receive data from the operations center 250 of Figure 18b tlirough an ATM hookup 1088 or satellite hookup. VII. Alternative Delivery And Ordering Methods
Electronic books and related data, including electronic book menu data, may be provided to subscribers by use of an on-demand delivery system in which electronic books are delivered after an order is received by the delivery system. The delivery system may supply the electronic books in real time or near-real time (i.e., near on-demand), or after a delay period that allows the delivery system to process, package and transmit the electronic book. Alternatively, the delivery system may broadcast one or more electronic books in a continuous fashion, m this alternative, the subscriber indicates a desired electronic book from a list ofthe broadcast electronic books. The delivery system may include a billing system that debits a subscriber's account, or debits a credit card, for example, upon delivery ofthe electronic book. The dehvery system, or a related authorization system, may provide a local authorization code that allows the subscriber to decrypt, store and view the desired electronic book. Alternative delivery systems and methods are disclosed in pending U.S. Application Serial No. 09/289,956 entitled, ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY METHODS, filedApril 13, 1999, andU.S. Application SerialNo.09/427,938 entitled, VIRTUAL ON- DEMAND ELECTRONIC BOOK, filed October 27, 1999, the disclosure of wliich are incorporated by reference. a. Internet Delivery Methods
Figure 19 is an alternate dehvery plan 301' that provides for electromc book delivery using the Internet. In Figure 26, the publishers 282 provide the electronic books to be posted at the Internet web site 279. The publishers may convert the text and graphical data to digital format, compress the digital data, and upload the compressed digital data to the Internet web site 279. Alternately, the publishers 282 may arrange for an outside conversion activity 283 to convert the text and graphical data to digital format. The conversion activity 283 may then provide the digital data to the Internet web site 279. For example, a large on-line bookstore could gather pubhcations in electronic form from a variety of publishers, or could convert hard- copy books to electronic form, and post the electronic books on the Internet such as at the Internet web site 279.
The electronic books may then be transferred using a public switched telephone network (PSTN), for example, or other communications systems, directto asubscriber285, a library 286 and abookstore 287. The library 286 and the bookstore 287 may also provide electronic books to the subscriber 285.
When electronic books are provided by the Internet web site 279, the billing and collecting functions may be incorporated into the Internet web site 279. For example, a subscriber may pay for an electronic book selection by entering a credit card number into a data field of apage ofthe Internet web site 279. In this configuration, a separate billing and collection system may not be required. Alternatively, the Internet web site 279 may communicate infoπnation with the billing and collection system 278.
Electronic book dehvery over the Internet may be handled using a number of methods. In a method, the electronic book may be downloaded to the requesting home system 258 immediately after the order hasbeen processed. Alternatively, the electronic book may be e- mailed to an e-mail address that is entered as part ofthe ordering process. In another embodiment, as part ofthe ordering transaction process, the subscriber is provided with location and authorization information that allows the subscriber to retrieve the ordered electronic book at the subscriber's convenience. For delivery of subscription electronic book products, like newspapers, magazines or other periodicals, the Internet web site 279 can dehver the latest version ofthe product to the subscriber automatically immediately upon logon by the subscriberto the Internet web site 279. Electronic book datamay also be embedded into continuous multicast streaming video, audio, or data feeds.
Delivery methods that allow for dedicated, full time delivery can be used to provide continuous distribution of electronic book data including requested electronic books from subscribers, electronic books to be broadcast to all subscribers, updated menu contents, and updated advertising. For delivery methods that allow for non-dedicated or user established connectivity, the operations center 250 may manage the timing and delivery of content by delivering the electronic book only when requested, or periodically, to ensure dehvery for those home systems that may not be able to receive the delivery. Finally, delivery methods that are capable of two-way communication may be used to provide a return path to the operations center 250 or billing and collection system 278 for the purpose of ordering or requesting updated electronic book information. Two-way communications paths may be used to allow linldng from an electronic book home system 258 or viewer 266 to external nodes that provide world watch live content. These delivery methods are described in detail in co-pending U. S . Patent ApphcationSerialNo.09/289,956 entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY METHODS, filedApril 13, 1999, the disclosure ofwhich is hereby incorporated by reference.
Additionally, although the home system 258 is presented as an independent device that directly interfaces with the delivery system 200, the home system 258 may connect to the delivery system 200 tlirough a set top terminal, TV, PC, radio, or any other device capable of receiving the signal provided by the delivery system 200. Additionally, the home system 258 may not be an independent apparatus, having some or all of its functionality supported vvithin the set top terminal, TV, PC, radio, or any other device capable of receiving the signal provided by the delivery system. b. Alternative Ordering Methods
Any ofthe delivery methods described in the section above are viable embodiments for providing access from the home system 258 to the billing and collection system 278 or operations center 250. In an embodiment, the modular connector 701 , as shown in Figures 6b and 8, may be used to provide the specific protocol foimatting and transmission processing to allow the home system 258 to use the communication path. In the embodiment where the PSTN is used to provide access, the modular connector 701 includes the phone connector 270 and the modem 611 as depicted in Figure 6b . In the embodiment where the cellular phone system is used to provide access, the modular connector 701 includes the cellular phone or PCN phone 611' as depicted in Figure 6b. c. Mobile Environments
A feature provided by delivery methods using a wireless broadcast system, satellite broadcast system, wireless personal communication system, orterrestrial television broadcast system is mobility ofthe electronic book home system 258 or viewer 266. This mobility allows for ordering and receiving electronic book data anytime or anywhere, from sitting on a beach in Florida to sitting on a bus in New York City. This mobility allows for the delivery of electronic book data subscription products such as daily newspapers, monthly magazines, or books from book-of-the-month clubs. These subscription products may be delivered automatically to the appropriate home system 258 or electronic book viewer 266. Enhanced end-to-end eπor correction techniques can be added to the transmission system to ensure liigherprobabihtyofreceiptfor esemobileenviroiiments. Additionally, transmissionmethods may be implemented that resend packets of electronic book data, changing their delivered order on each resend, to improve likelihood of receipt. For lower bandwidth mobile environments, an electronic book file may be broken up into packets and the packets sent a limited number of times. If the electronic book file is not received completely, the electronic book viewer 266 may initiate a request to the operations center 250 to resend only that portion ofthe electronic book file yet to be received. VIII. Electronic Book Link System Electronic book links allow the subscriber to use the electronic book viewer 266 to traverse pre-defined paths between content in their currently viewed electronic book to related information contained either elsewhere in the electronic book, elsewhere on the viewer 266, or external to the viewer 266, including in the library unit 262 or in a connected Internet web site. These links provide an organized and methodical method for the subscriber to quickly access related topic areas or seek clarification ofthe currently viewed material.
An electronic book includes first locations, or components, such as words, phrases, sentences, sections of text, paragraphs, pages, chapters, figures, drawings, maps, video clips, and audio clips. Links to second and subsequent locations, or components, contained in the same electronic document or in another related electronic document, file, or database canbe associated with each of these first components. First components with underlying links canbe highlighted and displayed on the viewer display 602 or on the connected television 259 or a personal computer 261 (see Figure 2). First components that have underlying links associated with them may be identified by assigning them a unique identifier. The unique identifier can be a word or phrase, an alpha-numeric value, a coordinate point, or other unique identifier. In an embodiment, each such first location may be assigned an identifying index value.
The use ofthe index value allows the first components to maintain links with other components, even if the electronic book is altered. For example, a subscriber may use a cut andpaste edit feature to move ablock of text containing a first component. Cutting andpasting will not affect the status ofthe first component and its links to other components. Similarly, changing font style or font size will not affect the status ofthe links.
In the creation of an electronic book, or subsequently, the electronic book may undergo aprocess thatmaps identifying index values to each ofthe first components. These index values can then be accessed by software directives that drive the presentation of alternative or linked material (e.g., material at one ofthe second locations) once a selection is made. For each electronic book, these index values maybe contained in ahidden table that maps the identifying index values of all first components with underlying links to the location of the linked material (the second location). Moreover, each such first component may be linked to one or many linked material locations. That is, the first component may be linked to a second component, a third component and so on. An example of a hidden table is presented below.
Figure imgf000053_0001
As shown in the table, a first location "Cezzanne" has an identifying index value 135. "Cezzanne" has three links. A link to a second location is to an art encyclopedia. A link to a third location is to an electronic dictionary that provides a pronunciation guide. A link to a fourth location is to an audio file that plays a short biography ofthe artist. Each ofthe second, third and fourth locations have their own index valueiinked material location information (i.e., the location of second and subsequent components) can include source location, book name, chapter, page, line, and word as identified by their index value. The source location will provide the delivery system 200 the necessary information to contact the operations center 250, the Internet web site 279 (see Figure 2) or another electronic database and request the appropriate material for retrieval and download if it currently does not reside on the viewer 266 or the home system 258. In the case that the linked material resides on the Internet web site 279 or on another electronic database, the location information in the hidden table allows the operations center 250 or home system 258 to retrieve the desired material from the Internet web site 279 or from the electronic database.
If the second component, or linked material, is located at the viewer 266, the processor in the viewer 266 can cause the linked material to be displayed without any communications with an outside source. For example, if the first component is the name "Cezzanne" and the linked material, or second location, is in an electronic dictionary stored i the viewer 266, the viewer 266 can display the electronic dictionary entry for "Cezzanne.' ' This linked material may be displayed full screen, in a pic ture-in-picture window, or as an overlay, for example. The entry can also remain hidden, until a user ofthe viewer 266 commands the entry to be displayed.
Upon selection of a component with underlying links, the software directive deteπnines the identifying index values associated with the selected component, searches the table for the index values ofthe selection made, looks up the corresponding linked location, accesses the location, and displays the linked material on the viewer 266. The linked material can be displayed on the viewer 266 in place ofthe original source material, or simultaneously with the original source material by displaying the linked material in a picture-in-picture window, via a split screen, or via a screen overlay. Figure 20 shows a portion of a page of electronic text having one or more electronic links. The display 602 may include a show links button 606 and ahelp button 612. The show links button 606 may be used to display alinkmenu971 (see Figure 13 andFigure21). That is, the viewer 266 can be commanded, via the show links button 606, to display all components that have underlying links. The components may be displayed in a highlighted mode, in a different color, in a unique font, bold or italic typeface, underlined, outlined, or in reverse background mode, for example. To make a selection of a component to view the underlying linked material, the cursor 745 is used to identify the desired selected item. The ball 743 is used to guide the cursor 745 across the page to the desired selected item, and the selection button is used to make the selection. Alternatively, cursor movement for screen navigation can be provided via devices such as a fingerpad, mouse, or joystick. Selection can also be made by incorporating a touch-sensitive screen into the viewer 266.
Figure 20 depicts the display before commanding the viewer 266 to show links. Figure 21 shows the display once the request has been made to display all underlying links . Figure 21 shows the link menu 971 , a help button 612, and a multi-function button, or pull-down menu, 614. The multi-function button 614 can be used as a return button, ahide active links button, and a restore active links button, for example. Alternately, several additional buttons may be provided to select these features . The multi-function button 614 may be active when the show links button 606 has been operated, hi Figure 21 , the components having underlying links are "PorchScene by Cezzanne" and "Cezzanne." The component "PorchScene by Cezzanne" is shown with one link and the component "Cezzanne" is shown with three links. Also shown in Figure 21 is the link menu 971 that lists the links, or components, the link number and a description ofthe linked material. For example, the material linked to the component "PorchScene by Cezzanne" is a JPEG video file showing the painting. Once a link is selected, an on-screen return button 614 allows the subscriber to return from the linked material back to the originally viewed text. The show links button 606 (see Figure 20) can be displayed on the viewer 266 either at all times that an electronic book is open, any time an underlying link exists, or only when commanded to do so from the viewer's menu system 851.
When linked material is displayed (for example, in an overlay fashion) the subscriber can command the linked material to be placed in a hidden state by operating the hide active link button 614 or by use ofthe menu system 851. When an active link is hidden, the restore active link button 614 is displayed. Operation ofthe restore active link button 614 will display the material linked by the active link.
Alternatively, the on screen "Help" menu 887 (see Figure 13) provides access to further assistance when selecting links. The Help menu 887 is accessed by operation ofthe on- screen help button 612. Related link options will be available for display on the viewer 266 by selecting the Help menu 887, using the cursor 745 to do so. The "Help" function allows the subscriber to select wliich specific links to be displayed on-screen. The links when displayed maybe simply l ighhghted portions of text, or text in different colors. All links for the displayed page can be selected to be displayed. Alternatively, by selecting a range of content in an electronic book that may have multiple underlying links, only links associated with the components within the selected range will be presented on the viewer 266 for the subscriber to select the specific link desired. Alternatively, a fixed number of links maybe selected to be displayed on the screen at a time. Alternatively, only a certain type of link may be selected to be displayed. The types of links that are available for display may be listed in apop-up menu. The subscriber can choose from this pop-up menu which ofthe links to display. For example, the pop-up menu could list links for a dictionary and links to an Internet web site. The subscriber could choose to display only the dictionary links. Figure 22 depicts the menu screen 981 used to manage the subscriber's filtering of links to view.
Figure 23 is a logical representation ofthe components and links for the example first component "Cezzanne" shown in Figure 20. In Figure 23, the text block (page) 602' containing the first component Cezzanne 980 is shown linked to components in other electronic files or documents. A first link 981 links Cezzanne 980 to areference material component 982, which is an encyclopedic entry related to the artist. A second link 983 links Cezzanne 980 to a dictionary entry 984 that includes apronunciationkey for the artist's name. A third link 985 links Cezzanne 980 to an audio clip 986, wliich provides an audio file describing the artist's life. If the subscriber chooses the audio clip 986, the audio file will ύnmediately begin playing and will be broadcast on a speaker in the viewer 266, or the attached television or the attached personal computer, as applicable. The subscriber can stop the playback by operating the hide active link button 614.
The links described above may also function in two directions. A biography of Cezzanne could include a link to the JPEG file showing PorchScene. The JPEG file PorchScene could be one of several still videos ofthe artist's work. This JPEG file could be linked to an appropriate section ofthe Cezzanne biography. Then, if the subscriber were viewing the JPEG file for PorchScene. the subscriber could display the link to the biography and, upon activating the link, have displayed that portion ofthe biography that discusses PorchScene. In this example, the same link is used to display either the JPEG file or text from the biography. The same hidden table can be used with the two electronic files (i.e., the biography and the JPEG file). Alternately, each electronic file may have its own hidden table. In this alternative, the same link may be referenced in each ofthe hidden tables.
In the discussion above, each first component is linked to one or more other components. However, the other components (i.e., the second and third components, for example) may also be linked together. In addition, other components linked to one first component may be crossed-linked to other components that are linked to a second first component (identifying secondary or tertiary cross-links). For example, the JPEG file of PorchS cene referred to in Figure 21 may be cross-linked to the audio file-biography shown in Figure 21. Displaying the JPEG file will result in a cross-link being identified that links the JPEG file to the audio file. The cross-link may be indicated by ghhghting, underhnmg, outlining, using abold or an italics typeface, using a different font, and using different color text. If the cross-linked material is selected, that material will then be displayed, h the example described above, the JPEG video file that shows the painting PorchScene can be cross-linked with Cezzanne and its identity would be displayed on the viewer 266. The video file could be displayed full screen or in a picture-in-picture format. The video file could also be displayed on the attached television 259 or the personal computer 261 (see Figure 2) . Finally, the video file could be printed by sending the video data and a print command to a printer 262 attached to the home system 258 or to the personal computer 261.
In the table previously shown, all the links for a number of electronic books were provided in one hidden table. In an alternate arrangement, many hidden tables may be provided. For example, each electronic book may beprovided with a hidden table, hi this alternative, the many hidden tables could form a relational database of linked material. As an example, several different electronic medical text books could each be provided with its own hidden table. An electronic general medical encyclopedia could also be provided with ahidden table. Terms that are listed in one ofthe several medical electronic text books could then be linked, in a relational fashion to the electronic medical encyclopedia. The several electronic medical text books could also be relationally linked to each other, to on-liiie databases and to other electronic files. For example, an electronic medical text book couldbe electronically linked to electronic books, databases and other electronic files maintained at a medical school's library.
The hidden table (either for many electronic books, or individually for each electronic book) may be provided by the central provider or distributor as an additional feature that is paid for separately from purchasing an electronic book. The distributor may offer many different levels of service, such as only linking material (components) stored on a viewer, only linking material wilhin a particular electronic book, or linking one or more electronic books to electronic files outside the home system 258 (e.g. , linking an electronic book to a database maintained by the distributor at an Internet web site). Downloading the most current links table for an electronic book from the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 refreshes the hidden links table, that is, any new links that have been generated by the operations center 250, for example, are added to the hidden links table. The current links table maybe downloaded in conjunction with downloading anew electronic book. Alternately, the current links table may be provided periodically by the operations center 250.
As noted above, links wilhin electronic books maybe self-contained in nature, where all the material to be linked to is resident within the same electromc book file. Additionally, links may also be provided between material residing on the viewer 266. Also, links may be provided to material that currently resides on the home system 258, if separate from the viewer 266. Finally, links may be provided to material that must be accessed tlirough a communications network. For example, material that is ordered or downloaded from the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 may be linked to the electronic book. On screen menus can also be supported on the viewer 266 in the form of electronic book files, serving as abook or product catalog or service catalog that allows the subscriber to link to the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 to order additional electronic books or products and services at any time by selecting the desired component from the text.
If the content that is to be linked to is currently not available on the electronic book viewer 266, the viewer 266 may prompt the subscriber to decide whether to : 1) retrieve the corresponding material immediately from the home system 258, the operations center 250, or the Internet web site 279; 2) wait until the next communication opportunity with the home system 258 or operations center 250 to retrieve the material; 3) commence direct outside communications with another communications system (e.g., a telephone in aPSTN); or 4) stop. In one embodiment, the first components on the viewer 266 are a Table of Contents and List of Figures for a book. Making a selection from the Table of Contents and List of Figures automatically links to and displays the selectedpage within the electronic book file, hi another embodiment, the first components on the viewer 266 may be an Index of an electronic book. Selecting the desired topic and associated page will cause that page to be displayed on the viewer 266. In yet another embodiment, the first component is a footnote or endnote. When the footnote is selected, the viewer 266 provides a display of material that further addresses the reference. In another embodiment, the first component is a word or phrase that has a further definition or clarification associated with it. By selecting the first component, the corresponding dictionary definition, foreign translation, or glossary entry will be displayed on the viewer 266. The dictionary definition or foreign translation may also be provided via an audio file. In this embodiment, electronic books can be bundled with other standard reference material or alternatively, stand-alone reference material like dictionaries or encyclopedias may be accessed from within multiple electronic book files.
In another embodiment, the first component is a reference to another electronic book altogether. By selecting the first component, the selected book is displayed on the viewer 266. hi another embodiment, on-screen menu buttons will be displayed on the viewer screen 602 that allow for a quick link to the Table of Contents, Index, glossary, and other key electronic book sections by simply selecting the item on the viewer screen 602 with the cursor 745. In yet another embodiment, the selected first component links the subscriber to a book review or series of book reviews, providing additional information to assist in the decision of selecting a new electronic book. In another embodiment, the selected first component is a book title, chapter title, or text in the body of a book that is linked to an audio file that serves as an audio narration ofthe selection that is played on the viewer 266. In yet another embodiment, the selected first component links to a video file (JPEG or MPEG) that can be displayed on the viewer screen 602. Another embodiment is a first component that links to textual annotations and notes that have been created by the subscriber.
One embodiment includes first or subsequent components that are electronic book titles that, when selected, links the subscriber to the operations center 250 or the Internet web site 279 to allow for the ordering ofthe selected book. In a similar embodiment, the selected component consists of a product that, when selected, link the subscriber to the operations center 250 site or an Internet web site to allow for the ordering ofthe selected product. Lastly, in another embodiment, the selected component is a topic on wliich there is a link to an Internet-based discussion group that addresses the topic in more detail.
Another embodiment is a link to a world watch live server/site. When a link is provided to link a word or phrase to a foreign language dictionary, the viewer 266 may display a foreign language selection feature. The subscriber may then indicate which language to use when activating the link. For example, an Enghsh word or phrase in the electronic book may be linked to a French, Spanish or German dictionary. The subscriber may specify which of these foreign language dictionaries to link to. IX. Connection To World Watch Live The viewer 266 may also be used to display live or recorded video. The video may be distributed using a telecommunications system, mcluding dehvery using the hitemet. Access to video may be provided using links within an electronic book or on an electronic book menu display.
A. Obtaining Video From Remote Sites, Communicating the Video to a Web Site, and Streaming the Video To Users.
Figure 24 shows a system that provides video, audio and text data from remote video sources such as videocassettes and television programs. Figure 24 shows remote sites 2102, remote cameras 2104, videocassette 2106, compression devices 2108,2114, digital storage device 2110 and web site 2112. -As shown in Figure 24, a video camera 2104 is used to film activity at remote site 2102. As discussed below, numerous video cameras at a single remote site may be used to obtain different views, text, and audio (for example, stereophonic) ofthe remote site from different angles and orientations. Also, numerous remote sites, each with its own video camera, may used as shown at 2102', 2102" and 2104' and 2104". The video cameras film events at the remote sites, and record the events on videocassette 2106 or other suitable media.
The recorded information is then transported to a web site 2112, or to a site in communication with the web site 2112. As shown in Figure 24, the recorded mformation from video tape 2106 is then compressed in compression unit 2108 and stored in digital storage media 2110. Many compression algorithms may be used, such as MPEG- 1 , MPEG-2 and Wavelet. Compression systems currently available from The Duck Corp, Xing Technology Corp., Indeo, Digital Video Arts, Ltd., VDOnet Corp. and Intel Corp., maybe used with the system. The digital storage media may be any known storage device, such as a hard disk, CD ROM, digital video disc (DVD), digital tape, video file server or other media. The stored and compressed data may then be provided on a number of streamed audio-video outputs 2116 from the web site 2112. This enables many users to access the stored video, text, and audio, and allows for one user to receive numerous audio-video signals, i.e. split the display into numerous "camera" feeds. In addition to providing streamed audio and video from videocassette, the web site
2112 may provide audio, text, and video from television channels. The television signals are received by a conventional television receiver (not shown in Figure 24), and digitally compressed by the compression unit 2114 and fed through the web site 2112 to the streamed output. It is not nonnally necessary to store the television programs in a digital storage unit (such as the storage unit 2110), since the audio, text, and video is constantly incoming and changing. However, certain segments of broadcast television may be stored in a storage device, such as the digital storage unit 2110, for recall by a user.
Figure 25 shows another system for supplying video, audio and text data, where similar reference numerals indicate items that correspond to the items shown in Figure 24. The system of Figure 25 uses remote cameras and a communication network to provide remote video to the web site. Figure 25 shows remote sites 2102, video cameras 2104, compression unit 2118, data communication network 2120, web site 2130, digital storage unit 2132, and streamed video 2116.
As shown in Figure 25 , the remote sites 2102 are filmed by cameras 2104 (as in Figure 24). However, in this system, the outputs ofthe cameras 2104 pass through a compression unit 2118. The compressed audio, text, and video is communicated over the data communication network 2120 to the web site 2130. The data communication network 2120 may be any network currently known to one of ordinary skill in the art, such as land-leased lines, satellite, fiber optic cable, microwave link or any other suitable network. These and other delivery systems are described in more detail in Section VII.
Other suitable networks maybe cellular networks or paging networks. In apaging network, the cameras 2104 may be connected to apaging device and/or digital storage media or paging transmitter for communication ofthe video (including text and still images — as used hereinafter, video refers to moving and still images, and to text data) to the web site 2130. The following publications, hereby incorporated by reference, disclose relevant systems: PCT Publication No. WO 96/07269, published March 7, 1996 by Jambhekar et al.; PCT PublicationNo. WO 96/21173, pubhshed July 11, 1996by Harris et al.; PCTPubhcationNo. WO 96/21205, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al.
The web site 2130 in this example is adapted to receive infoπnation from the data communication network 2120. The web site may pass the video from cameras 2104 to users at streamed video outputs 2116. Alternatively, the web site may contain a decompressor to decompress the video prior to streaming it to users, or change the compression scheme ofthe video to one wliich is compatible with the connected user. Alternatively, the video may be compressed at the streamed video output and users who connect to the web site 2130 may run decompression software. The web site 2130 may store the audio and video received over data communication network 2120 in digital storage unit 2132 before providing it to the streamed outputs 2116. Alternatively, the audio and video may be directly passed to the streamed outputs 2116.
Figure 26a shows another embodiment ofthe invention that combines the embodiments of Figures 24 and 25 and adds remote camera control. Figure 26a shows remote sites 2102, cameras 2104, computer 2134, video path 2122, 2129, control path 2124, 2126, 2128, compressors 2108, 2114, 2118, 2136 data communication network 2120, web site 2140, digital storage means 2132, and streamed video 2116. As with Figures 24 and 25, remote sites 2102 are filmed by the cameras 2104. As with Figure 24, the web site 2140 is able to receive data from the video tape 2106, compress the audio and video in the compression unit 2108, and store the compressed audio and video in the digital storage unit 2110. Audio and video from television stations may also be compressed by the compression unit 2114 and stored or passed as streamed video 2116, as in Figure 24.
Likewise, the cameras 2104 may be connected to the compression unit 2118 (as in Figure 25) and communicate compressed audio and video to the web site2140 via the data communicationnetwork2120. Thus the functions performed by the systems shown in Figures 24 and 25 may be combined in a variety of manners at the single web site 2140.
Figures 26a and 26b add the additional feature of camera control to the previously described systems. As shown in Figure 26a, the computer 2134 is connected to the remote cameras 2104. The computer is able to control a mechanical or electrical device on the cameras 2104, to alter the cameras' orientation (including position and/or angle). Audio and video from the camera 2104 passes to the computer 2134. The video may be processed and stored in the computer. As shown in Figure 26b, the computer may be connected to multiple remote cameras 2104' and 2104" so that multiple users may each control a camera. The computer 2134 may either contain a compressor or be connected to an external compression unit 2136. The video from cameras 2104' and 2104" is compressed and provided to data communications network 2120. This compressed video is subsequently received by the web site 2140. The remote cameras 2104', 2104" (Figure 26b) maybe controlled by control signals passed from the computer 2134 on the path 2124. The control signals are received by the computer 2134 from the data communications network 2120 overthe camera control path 2126. The web site 2140 provides the control information to the data communications network 2120 over path 2128. The web site 2140 in this system is adapted to pass control signals to the cameras 2104 and to store video images in the digital storage unit 2132. The web site 2140 provides a number of streamed video outputs 2116. The system shown in Figure 26a allows remote users to control the angle or orientation of cameras 2104', 2104". Users are connected to the web site2140 andreceivethe streamed video 2116 from the cameras 2104', 2104". If the users wish to move the cameras 2104', 2104" to the right, they may enter auser command (such as "panright") at their teπninal. The tenninal maybe an electronic book home system 258, apersonal data apparatus (PDA) or a personal computer, for example. The command is received by the web site 2140, and formatted, if necessary . The command is outputted to the data communication network 2120 as a control signal through the camera control path 2128. The computer 2134 receives the camera control signals from the communication network 2120 over the camera control path 2126. The remote computer 2134 may be adapted to control multiple cameras at multiple locations 2102, or multiple cameras at the same location 2102.
When using the home system 258 to connect to a world watch live web site, the user may enter commands using the viewer 266. In this embodiment, the viewer 266 may display command options in a "soft key" format. The user initiates a command through use of a touch screen device or a pointing device such as a track ball, for example. The user interface aspects ofthe viewer 266 will be described later in more detail. The home system 258 and the viewer 266 may be adapted to display data from the world watch live web site 2140 by the addition of software routines. The software routines may be contained on a computer-readable medium, such as a floppy disk, for example. Alternatively, the software routines may be downloaded to the home system 258 and the viewer 266 over the Internet from the web site 2140.
The computer 2134 is connected to the remote camera 2104 by a camera control path 2124. This path allows control commands from the computer to travel to the cameras 2104', 2104" and confrol the cameras 2104', 2104". The cameras 2104', 2104" may have computer- controlled swivel motors (not shown) for panning left and right, may have a computer- controlled pivot motor (not shown) for panning up and down, and may have a computer- controlled motor (not shown) for moving a zoom lens. These motors are known to the artisan and are currently available. A number of cameras may be provided at a single site to allow multiple users to have camera control at the same time.
This system of obtaining and/or storing video at a web site is extremely flexible. The system allows for perceived camera control by multiple cameras, actual camera confrol of one or more cameras, perceived camera control via a wide-angle lens on a single camera, and for the generation of comprehensive interactive programs. B. Perceived Camera Control With Multiple Cameras
In an alternative system, shown more clearly in Figures 27 -29, users are given the perception of camera control. To achieve this, a plurality of fixed cameras 2104, 2150, 2152, 2153, 2154, 2156, 2158, 2160, 2162 (Figure 27) are disposed around aremote site 2102. hi accordance with this embodiment, it appears to users that they are controlling the angle or position of a camera when hi actuahty they are merely being fransferred to the video output of a different camera. Figures 27 - 29 show this concept in greater detail.
As shown in Figure 27, abuilding2146isbeing prepared for demolition. Disposed around the building 2146 are cameras 2104, 2150, 2152, 2153, 2154, 2156, 2158, 2160, 2162, connected to a computer 2135. The computer 2135 is connected to a commumcation network2120 (not shown). The video from cameras2104,2150,2152,2153,2154, 2156, 2158, 2160, 2162 is digitized and preferably compressed prior to communication over network 2120, either by compressors connected to the cameras (not shown) or by a compressor connected to the computer 2135 (not shown). The cameras may be digital cameras or analog cameras connected to an analog-to-digital converter.
The cameras specifically identified around the periphery are cameras 2150, 2152, 2153,2154, 2156,2158,2160, and2162. Forreference,thebuilding contains the letter "A" and the letter "B" on two sides as shown at 2144 and 2148 in Figures 27 and 28a - 28d. A number of additional cameras 2104 are disposed about the periphery ofthe building in a circular pattern. The pattern and number of cameras are not critical, but will confrol how the user perceives movement ofthe "camera".
Refeπing to Figure 27, a video camera 2150 faces side A, a video camera 2152 is between sides A and B, a video camera 2153 faces side B and a video camera 2154 is between sideB and the side opposite side A. The video cameras 2156, 2158, 2160 and2162 are disposed closer to the building, as shown. All the video cameras contain audio pickups (preferably stereo) . Additionally, all the video cameras are connected to a computer 2135 which outputs compressed audiovisual signals to the communication network 2120 and consequently to the web site. The system shown in Figure 27 may be implemented by the systems shown in either Figure 25 or Figures 26a and 26b. Any number of users in communication with the web site 2130, 2140 may receive the audio and video from these cameras. Figure 28a shows atypical screen view 2150 ofthe video presented on the viewer 266 to remote users who are connected to the web site ofthe present invention. As shown, the user is observing live video from camera 2150, which provides a view of the building on side A. A "toolbar" of commands 2151 is presented to the user, mcluding apan left command "<-", a pan right command "- ", a pan up command "T" and a pan down command "1". An "autopan" command is used in conjunction with another command (such as pan right). The "autopan" command is used to automatically move the picture position in the direction previously entered. For example, if "autopan" is entered after "pan right," then the picture will keep panning right until another key is pressed or a default key (such as the ESCape key) is pressed. The speed ofthe "autopan" function is controlled by the "speed" command, which is used in conjunction with the "+" and "-" commands. Additionally, the "+" and "-" commands, when used alone, control a "zoom-in" and "zoom-out" function, respectively. The "toolbar" commands are selected via a user input device, which may be a touch sensitive screen, a keyboard, mouse, trackball, and a remote control. When any user wishes to switch from the view ofthe camera 2150 (Figure 28a) and pan to the right, the user initiates a pan right command "→", which is fransmitted to the web site 2130, 2140 (Figures 25 and 26a and 26b). The web site receives the command, and in response, causes the video from the camera positioned to the right ofthe camera 2150, in this case the video camera 2152 (Figure 27) to be transmitted to the user. The user then observes the picture appearing in Figure 28b, wliich appears to be a view to the right from the previous position (camera 2150). If the user continues to pan right, the user is presented with the Figure 28c view, received from the camera 2153. The user may continue to pan right all away around the building in this manner.
Additionally the user has special functions available, such as "autopan" and "zoom." For example, "autopan" in conjunction with "panright" would cause the view ofthe building to rotate, at a speed dictated by the "speed" function and the "+" and "-" keys. Using the "+" and "-" keys alone causes the view to change to a closer camera ("+") or a camera further away ("-"). As shown in Figure 27, the cameras 2156, 2158, 2160 and2162 are disposed closer to the building than cameras 2150, 2152, 2153 and 2154. A "magnified" image, obtained from the camera 2156, is shown in Figure 28d. If no cameras are disposed closer or further away, digital image processing may be used to digitally increase or reduce the size ofthe image. The software wliich controls these functions may be disposed either at the web server or on the user's computer.
Thus, users may obtain different views ofthe building 2146 as if they were remotely controlling the positioning of a single remote camera. The users may observe the demolition of the building from many exciting perspectives. This "perceived" camera control is advantageous because it allows any number of users to "control" a camera. A single camera which is remotely controllable is only confroUable by a single user. Thus, the present invention is suitable for large audiences. The realism of this perceived control is directly dependent upon the number of cameras and their distances from the viewed object.
Therefore, when the building 2146 is demolished, any number of users may pan around the building in real time as if they were actually present at the site. When the building is demolished, the video cameras pick up, preferably in stereo, the sounds ofthe demolition. Users who have loudspeakers connected to their computer may experience the demolition almost as if they were present.
Figure 29 shows a deployment of a number of cameras 2104 which are arranged in a linear fashion around a point of interest, each camera connected to computer 2135 as in Figure 27. As with Figures 27 and 28a and 28b, this embodiment uses "perceived" camera control which may be achieved by the systems shown in Figures 25, 26a and 26b. In this example, the remote location and point of interest is a parade, such as a New Year's Day Parade. With the camera deployment shown, a user may traverse the length ofthe parade without actually being present. Users may view whichever part ofthe parade they are interested in, for as long as they desire, without worry that they have missed an interesting band or float. In this example, the camera deployment merely follows the parade route. Parents who have children in a band or float may search for the child and follow the child throughout the parade route, rather than having to monitor every moment ofthe parade on television in the hopes that the child wiU pass the reviewing camera when the parents are watcliing. The parents merely "move" from different cameras along the parade route as their children progress in the parade.
C. Actual Camera Control of Single/Multiple Cameras Figures 30a and 3 Ob show another system, where a number of cameras 2160, 2162,
2164, 2166, are provided. These cameras are in direct communication with and are controlled by computer 2170. Although it is possible to form aring of cameras to perform "perceived" camera control (as in Figures 27 - 29), the embodiment shown uses four cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 which contain motors 2105 (Figure 30b) for controlling the camera' s positioning. The motors are controlled by computer 2170. Either a single computer 2170 or a number of computers 2170 may be used. The remote location and point of interest shown in Figures 30a and 30b are, for example, a watering hole or desert oasis. Users who access the web site 2140 are able to observe live video of wildlife behavior at the watering hole. The cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 are disposed at an island in the middle ofthe watering hole. The toolbar 2151 of Figure 28a is also used in this embodiment and enables users to choose camera confrol commands to spin the cameras around or perform other camera functions, such as zoom. Users are therefore able to receive different views and angles, and observe the entire watering hole.
Figure 30b shows the control and video paths ofthe Figure 30a system combined with system shown in Figures 26a and 26b . The video from cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166 is communicated to computer 2170, in compressed or uncompressed form on path 2122. The computer 2170 communicates the video to communications network2120 for reception by the web site 2140 (Figures 26a, 26b) . Preferably the video is digitized and compressed by either the cameras 2160, 2162, 2164, 2166, the computer 2170, or an external analog-to-digital converter (not shown) and compressor 2136 (Figures 26a, 26b) prior to transfer to the communications network 2120.
Camera control commands are received by the computer 2170 on control line 2126, as shown in Figures 26a, 26b and 30b. The commands are formatted, if necessary, by computer 2170 and transferred to confrol units 2105 attached to cameras 2160,2162,2164, 2166. The confrol units 2105 are connected to spin, zoom, or otherwise confrol the cameras as directed by the user.
Communications links 2124 and 2122 may be wired, wireless, digital or analog, and computer 2170 may be located nearby or remote from the site 2102.
The system of Figures 30a and 30b are unlike the systems shown in Figures 27 - 29, because each user is assigned a remote camera in the Figure 50a, 50b embodiment. Since each user must be assigned their own controllable camera, users will have to contend for available cameras. The number of controllable cameras may range from a single camera to any number, and is preferably statistically determined to correlate to the average number of users who access the web server 2140 at any given time or at peak times . The number of cameras may be reduced by using known systems which utilize queuing, reservations, and time limits.
D . Perceived Camera Control Using A Single Camera And A Wide- Angle Lens Figures 31a and 31b show another embodiment, using only a single camera, where an unlimited number of users may view any portion ofthe remote site 2102. This embodiment uses a spherical lens 2182 in optical communication with the camera 2180. The remote site
2102 shown in Figure 31a is a remote watering hole or oasis as in Figures 30a and 30b.
As shown in Figure 31 a, a camera 2180 has a spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182, which provides a 180°, spherical or other wide-angle view. This view, which is communicated to a computer 2184, contains distortion. The computer 2184 communicates and compresses the distorted video back to the web site 2130 or 2140 wliich stores and may process the image. Rather than using the computer 2184, a simple transmitter maybe used to convey the entire spherical video to the web site 2130, 2140 (Figures 25 and 26a and 26b). By using appropriate image processing software, the web site removes the barrel distortion and stores data relating to the entire spherical view. Users may then access different portions of the 180 ° sphere. In this embodiment, the toolbar 2151 of Figure 28a is also used. By using the toolbar 2151 , users may move across the spherical view and obtain the "perception" of camera control. This embodiment is advantageous in that it can provide the perception of camera control to any number of users simultaneously using only one remote camera. Figure 31b shows alternative embodiments ofthe system shown in Figure 31a. As shown in Figure 3 lb, the spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182 is used with video camera 180", which conveys video information to computer 2184. Computer 2184 communicates the video over communications network 2120 to the web site 2130. The web site 2130 may store or process the received video, and make the video available to users at user teπninals 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310 by communicating the video over communication network 2125. Communication network 2125 is explained in more depth below with respect to Figure 33.
Because wide angle lenses generate distortion, processing is conducted on the distorted image to remove the distortion from a segment ofthe image. This processing may be performed at the computer 2184, or the web site 2130. Alternatively, the processing may be performed at the user terminals 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310. Thus, the web site 2130 has available wide angle video for sending to users. Users display and view only a segment ofthe wide angle video at a time. Then, by using toolbar 2151 (Figure 28a), the user may select adjacent segments ofthe video for view. When auser selects an adj acent segment ofthe video for display, the adj acent segment is processed to remove distortion and then displayed. Displaying the adjacent segment gives the appearance that the camera was physically "moved" to the adjacent side ofthe original segment.
One system for electronically removing the distortion from a segment of an image obtained from a fish-eye lens is disclosed in U. S . Patent No.5, 185 ,667, issued February 9, 1993 to Zimmerman, incorporated herein by reference. Zimmerman' s apparatus uses the foUowing hardware for processing a captured and digitized image: a microcomputer connected to a remote confrol, computer confrol, X-Map and Y-Map ; an input image buffer connected to the X-Map and Y-Map with an output connected to an image filter and an output image buffer. This hardware, for example, or any other suitable hardware, may be placed at the computer 2184, or the web site 2130, but is preferably located at the user terminals 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310.
Alternatively, the speciahzed hardware is removed and the hardware functionality is implemented in software at the computer 2184 or web site 2130, but preferably the software is loaded into the user terminal 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310. Thus, in accordance with the present invention a spherical (or other wide-angle) image is supplied to the user' s terminal, which executes appropriate software (which maybe a "plug-in" for a browser application program) for displaying a segment ofthe image (or video) without distortion. Additionally, the distorted spherical image (or video) may be saved to a storage medium, either at the user' s terminal or at the web site, for future loading and viewing.
Figure 31b also shows how to remove the lens distortion without special processing. As shown in Figure 31b, a spherical (or other wide angle) lens 2182 is in optical communication with a video camera 2180'. However, a nonlinear imaging sensor 2186 is placed between the spherical lens 2182 and the video camera 2180'. The imaging sensor is designed to provide a distorted output which cancels out the distortion ofthe spherical lens 2182, and thus an undistorted wide-angle image is provided to video camera 2180'. Alternatively, imaging sensor 2186 may itself provide a digital output, making it unnecessary to use a camera 2180' . hi this case, the imaging sensor 2186 would be directly connected to computer 2184. Examples of imaging sensors 2186 are disclosed in U.S. PatentNo.5,489,940, issued onFebruary 6, 1996 to Richardson et al, and in PCT publication WO 96/12862, published June 13 , 1996 to Richardson et al. , each incorporated herein by reference. Other suitable imaging sensors may be used with the present invention.
The image obtained by the imaging sensor 2186 maybe undistorted and not require furtherprocessing. A segment ofthe image may thenbe selected for display by simply passing the image data to a display device. If the imaging sensor is imperfect, further processing may occur to correct for defects in the sensor. Additionally, furtherprocessing for "zoom" and ' "unzoom" functions may occur. This further processing may take place at the web site 2130 or at the user's terminal 2302, 2304, 2306, 2308, 2310.
The embodiments of Figures 48a through 5 lb maybe used in conjunction with either live audio and video or prerecorded video data (with audio) (shown in Figures 24 - 26b) . For example, if nothing interesting is happening at the watering hole, a connected user may access a stored audio and video clip of a lion attack which occuπed the day before. If'perceived" camera confrol is utilized, the stored audio and video preferably includes all camera angles (or a wide-angle view), such that the ability to pan and zoom is preserved. E. Web Site Configuration Figures 52a and 52b show a more detailed view ofthe web site, listed as web site
2140 (Figure 28a), but whichmay also correspond to web sites 2112 (Figure 24) and 2130 (Figure 25). The web site 2140 is connected to a data communication network 2120, the hitemet 2242, and direct connections 2244. The web site contains transmission equipment 2210,receive equipment 2220, 2220', two compression units 2108, 2114, aweb server 2200, a router 2230, and communication equipment 2240. The web server 2200 itself contains a digital matrix switch 2250, aplurality of digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'", a firewall access control unit 2254, a database server 2256, an audio and video storage unit 2258, a data storage unit 2260, an administrative unit 2262, a digital matrix switch 2264, a camera control unit 2268 and a digital video matrix switch 2270. The web site 2140 is connected to the data communication network 2120 by transmission equipment 2210 and receive equipment 2220. As shown, multiple receivers 2220, 2220' may be used. Also, as shown, the receivers may have more than one video output. Audio and video signals may also be input to the web server 2200 by videocassette (or other suitable recorded media) or simply by feeding in television programming. As with Figures 24 and 26a, these signals are preferably compressed by compression units 2108, 2114. On the opposite side, the web server 2200 is connected to remote users by a router 2230 and communication equipment 2240, wliich in turn are connected to the Internet 2242 or directly connected 2244 to users. The communications equipment 2240 outputs the video streams 2116 through a number of input/output ports.
As previously stated, the web server 2200 contains a digital matrix switch 2250, a plurality of digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252,"' a firewall access control unit 2254, a database server 2256, an audio and video storage unit 2258, a data storage unit 2260, an aώninistrative unit 2262, a digital matrix switch 2264, a camera control unit 2268 and a video matrix switch 2270.
The digital matrix switch 2250 receives aU mcoming compressed video signals from the receivers 2220, 2220' and the compressor units 2108, 2114. The matrix switch 2250 also receives compressed video data from database server 2256. Under control of the administrative unit 2262, the digital matrix switch 2250 outputs the input compressed video signals to digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'". hi this manner, any input signal can be transferred to any video server as directed by the admin unit. Also, stored programming from the database server 2256 is routed to the digital matrix switch 2250 to be switched as if it were incoming live video. The outputs ofthe digital matrix switch 2250 also connect to the database server 2256, so that anything at the inputs, such as mcoming hve audio and video, can be stored in the database server 2256.
The compressed input video is passed into various digital video servers 2252, 2252', 2252", 2252'" for formatting. Users who connect to web server 2200 preferably run their own decompression software so that the no decompression need occur at the web server 2200. As an alternative, the digital video servers may decompress the input video.
The audio and video from the video servers 2252 are passed through a second digital
(video) matrix switch 2270. Since switching has already occurred at the digital matrix switch
2250, the second video matrix switch 2270 is not required, but is desired for maximum flexibility. It is also optimal where the number of users exceeds the number of video inputs, as one input may be channeled to numerous connected users.
The matrix switch 2270 may contain a processor that j oins different frames of video and audio such that each output contains frames for multiple video pictures (including audio). This enables users to receive split screen images of video and select an audio track for playback (see Figure 37, discussed below) . The split-screen images may be formed by using known methods, which may differ depending on the type of compression used. For example, digital images may be decompressed, combined with other decompressed images, and then re- compressed; or the images may be decompressed and converted to analog, combined, and then converted to digital and compressed for transmission.
The signals switched by the video matrix switch 2270 are preferably digital. This is because the communicated video streams 2116 are preferably digital. It is preferred to process all the signals in the web server in the digital domain to improve simplicity and maintain maximum flexibility.
The various streams of video output from the video matrix switch 2270 are passed to the firewall access control unit 2254 for output to the router 2230 and the communication equipment 2240.
Using this system, any user may receive any signal present at any input, including stored signals within audio and video database 2258 or data storage unit 2260. Additionally, any compressed digital signal present at the input to digital matrix switch 2250 may be stored hi the audio and video storage unit 2258 or data storage unit 2260. This is advantageous in the perceived camera control embodiment (Figures 27 - 3 lb) where the web server 2200 must output a different video picture to the user upon user request. When the user request is received by the web server 2200, the administrative unit 2262 directs the matrix switches 2250 and 2270 to output the correct video stream to the user. If the user is requesting stored video, the administrative unit directs the database server 2256 to provide the video to digital matrix switch 2250. If graphics or textual data are required, the administrative unit 2262 directs the database server 2256 to output the text or graphics to digital matrix switch 2264. Although shown as one functional box, the database server 2256 maybe implemented by using several servers and/or multiport servers. The audio and video storage unit 2258 and data storage unit 2260 may be implemented by using many storage media of different types, such as optical storage devices (i.e. CD-ROM), magnetic disks, magnetic tape, or memory circuits (i.e. R-AIVI ROM). The number of units depends on the amount of stored data, the number of users, and the desired output speed. The database server 2256 may be one or multiple units. The audio and video storage unit 2258 stores (preferably compressed) audio and video presentations, mcluding aU relevant camera angles. The video servers 2252 may also be implemented as one or more servers and/or multiport servers.
The data storage unit 2260 is used to store information relating to audiovisual displays. This information relates to the menu structure and screen displays communicated to connected users . The stored information may also relate to specifically to the audio and video which is cuπently being displayed and heard. For example, in the demolition embodiment of Figure 28a, a user may click on a "more info" icon, to obtain information on demolition. Such information, wliich could include statistics on dynamite, for example, wouldbe stored as text or graphics in data storage unit 2260. The "more info" command wouldbe transmitted to the communications equipment 2240, pass through the router 2230, and the firewall access control 2254 to administrative unit 2262. The aώninistrative unit 2262 then directs the database server 2256 to recall the relevant information, such as statistics on dynamite, from data storage device 2260 and pass the information to digital matrix switch 2264. The recalled information is then passed to the firewall access control unit 2254, the router 2230, and the communication equipment 2240 for transmission to the proper subscriber. The data may be combined with audio and video in the firewall access control unit 2254, or be a separate transmission. In the perceived camera control embodiment, the communication equipment 2240 forwards the user's command (such as "pan right") to the router 2230, which detects the command and forwards it to the firewall access control unit 2254, which passes it to the administrative unit 2262. The administrative unit 2262 controls the video being fed to each connected user. The acmiinistrative unit 2262 also responds to user commands by histructing eitherthematrixswitclι2250or thematrix switch2270 topass adifferent audiovisual signal from another source (i.e. camera, for example, the camera to the right ofthe present camera) to the connected user. If the user is receiving a stored image from database 2258, the administrative unit instructs the database server 2256 to recall the appropriate video signal.
In the actual camera confrol embodiment (shown in Figures 26a and 30a), commands from the user (such as "pan right") are received by the communication equipment 2240 and forwarded to the router 2230. The commands enter the web server 2200 via the firewall access confrol unit 2254, and are passed to the administrative unit 2262. The commands may be stored in the administrative unit 2262 or passed to the database server 2256. Either way, the commands pass through the camera control unit 2268 which formats the commands as necessary for remote camera control. The formatted commands are passed to the transmission unit 2210. The transmission unit 2210 provides the commands to data communication network 2120 for reception at remote cameras and CPU 134 (Figure 26a).
In the system with the spherical (or other wide angle) lens(shown in Figures 31a and 31b), where the remote camera uses a spherical lens 2182, the administrative unit 2262 detein ines which segment or quadrant ofthe audiovisual image is to be supplied to the user in response to the user' s command. The spherical image may be stored in database 2258 prior to being output to digital matrix switch 2250. The image is split into a number of sections, which when combined form the entire 180° sphere. By using suitable image processing software, the distortion is removed or imnimized in each segment. The administrative unit 2262, in response to a user command, determines which segment ofthe sphere should be sent to the user. The administrative unit then directs the database server 2256 to retrieve and output the correct segment to the digital matrix switch 2250. By controlling the digital matrix switch 2250 and video matrix switch 2270, the administrative unit 2262 is able to ensure that the user receives the correct segment ofthe spherical image.
In one system the entire spherical (or other wide angle) video is communicated to the user, and the distortion removed by software at the user's terminal. This minimizes the complexity ofthe processing necessary at the web site 2140, and allows the user to store the entire spherical (or other wide angle) video. The communication equipment 2240 may be designed to automatically determine the maximum data rate at which information can be fransmitted to the coimected users. The data rate depends on the type of connection the web sites has with the user, and the type of equipment the user is operating. The commumcations equipment may use the maximum data rate possible as sensedfromtheuser'scommunications. Alternatively, users may enter their data rates when prompted by a menu screen, as shown in Figure 38 and described below. The data rates are then stored in communications equipment 2240. The communications equipment
2240 may also compress the video streams prior to transmission using any known compression algorithm. Additionally, the communications equipment may remove video frames, preferably prior to compression, such that the resulting data rate is reduced to be compatible with the user.
Figure 32b is identical to Figure 32a, but contains an input interface 2225 and an output interface 2235. The input interface 2225 is used to obtain digital video from other sources, such as a paging system, cellular system, cable television system, etc. The output interface connects the web site to other communications systems such as paging systems, cellular systems, or cable television systems. In the case where the input interface com ects to an analog system, it contains suitable analog to digital converters (not shown). Also, where the output interface connects to an analog system, it contains suitable digital to analog converters
(not shown).
For example, the input interface 2225 may obtain images or video from a paging system, and the output interface 2225 maybe connected to apaging system to broadcast video or images to a selective call receiver. In this regard, the following publications are incorporated by reference, each of wliich relates video/images to selective call receivers : PCT Publication No. WO 96/07269, published March 7, 1996 by Jambhekar et al., PCT Publication No. WO 96/21173, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al, andPCTPublicationNo. WO 96/21205, published July 11, 1996 by Harris et al.
F. Communication To Electronic Book Home Systems Figure 33 shows how the users are connected to the web site using home system 258, and shows an example of a communications network 2125 (Figure 31b) in detail. The connections shown inFigure 33 apply to the web sites of the previous figures, including the web site 2112 (Figure 24), 2130 (Figure 25) and 2140 (Figures 26a and 32a) . Figure 33 shows a server platform 2200, the Internet 2242, two direct connection 2244, two traditional Internet hosts 2272, 2274, two cable Internet hosts 2276, 2278, a satellite-based Internet host 2280, a telephone dialup 2282, an ISDN channel 2284, a cable plant 2286, 2288, a satellite system 2290 and aplurality of connected user terminals. The user terminals shown in Figure 33 are home systems 258 including electronic book viewers 266. However, the user termhials can be any electronic device capable of receiving and displaying digital data including personal computers, for example. In operation, the web sites 2112, 2130, 2140 may communicate over the Internet
2242 to a number of different systems. These systems include the traditional Internet hosts 2272, 2274, the cable headend Internet host 2276 and the wireless Internet host 2277. The traditional Internet host 2272, 2274 may be connected using a telephone line 2282 or an ISDN channel 2284 to a plurality of home system 258. The cable Internet host 2276 may be connected using a cable plant 2286 to a home system 258.
Alternatively, the web site is connected using a direct connection 2244 to a cable headend Internet host 2278 or satellite-based Internet host 2280. The cable headend Internet host 2278 communicates to a cable plant 2288 andahome system 258. The satellite-based Internet host 2280 communicates using a satellite 2290 to ahome system 258. These direct connections 2244 enable a higher data rate and use a high speed cable modem.
The communications equipment 2240 (Figure 32a) may enable commumcations with any type of user terminal, including the home system 258, no matter what the data rate or system. User terminals with higher data rates will receive higher quality audio and video images. G. Screen Displays and Features
Figures 34-39 show examples of display pages that are shown at the home system 258. The pages and menus are stored in data storage unit 2260 (Figure 32a) as graphical and/or textual information. The world watch live menu may be accessed using the menu system 858 shown in Figure 13.
Figure 34 shows an example of a home page 2400 that contains a number of advertisements 2402, numerous web links 2404, a society link 2406, options for viewing television programming 2408, aplurality of rapid access entry options 2409 mcluding a world watch live option 2410, and options for clubs 2412.
The advertisements 2402 are useful for the page provider to generate revenue. As described previously, the system is designed such mat television programming canbe supplied over the Internet. Users may view television programming by selecting the home page television option 2408. The Magazines 2404 are used to provide information concerning specific topics to the user. Users may j oiti a society, having additional membership benefits, through the "society" selection 2406. The world watch live feature 2410, part ofthe rapid access entry options 2409, is selected when users wish to watch live video from remote sites. The clubs shown in the club option 2412 are selected by users who wish to obtain information related to common areas of interest.
Figure 35 shows a society menu 2406, selected from the Figure 34 home menu page.
As shown in Figure 35, there are options for world watch live 2420, is an advertisement 2402, subscription information 2424, and numerous club options 2422. This screen and all the functions selected in response to the displayed options may be provided on a subscription or temporarily free basis.
Figure 36 shows one example of a world watch livemenu 2440. Thismenumaybe used to select remote locations from which to observe live or prerecorded video. In this example, a map ofthe world is presented with sites that are available to select for observing live video. The screen indicates sites that are active 2442 or under construction 2444. This menu also contains two advertisements 2402.
The world watch live embodiment allows connected users to visit virtually anyplace in the world to learn more about its culture, geography, or environment. Coupled with perceived or actual camera control and associated prestored video, textual and graphical information, a powerful and inexpensive learning tool is realized. This is more closely shown in Figure 37.
Figure 37 shows amenu2450 that corresponds to the Egyptian site inFigure 36. This screen concerns "Giza, Egypt", and contains live video from five cameras. As shown in the screen, there is camera one 2452, cameras two through five 2454, a "Map" option 2456, an "About This Site" option2458, an "About Egypt" option 2460, an "Upcoming Events" option 2462 and a "Remote Control" option 2464. Camera one 2452 is the default for the main viewing camera. The user may select video image sizes and the number of images to be displayed, limited by the equipment the user is operating. Video from cameras two through five are supphed along with that from camera one to provide alternative sites and viewpoints about the topic ofthe screen (i.e., Egypt).
In an embodiment, the information presented in Figure 37 may be accessed by activating a link in an electronic book. The link may exist in an electronic book devoted to the history and geography of Egypt. The link may exist in an elecfronic encyclopedia. The link may exist as atext address (e.g., aHTML address). The link may also exist as alocation or an icon in the electronic history book or the electronic encyclopedia. When the link is activated, video feed, either live or delayed, may be provided to the user's terminal (e.g., the viewer 266, the personal computer 261 , or the television 259, shown hi Figure 2). The video may be accompanied by audio data, text data and geographical data. The "Map" option 2456 brings the user back to the world map (Figure 36) to select additional sites. The "About This Site" option 2458 brings up text, graphics or additional video concerning the site of Giza, Egypt. For example, aprofessor appears and talks about the origin ofthe Sphinx (shown by camera 1). The embodiment shown in Figure 39 and described below (interactive lecture) maybe combined with the "About This Site" option. Additionally, other video may be displayed in response to selection of "About This Site". Such video may be a documentary ofthe Sphinx or discussion about the technology that historians estimate was used to construct the Sphinx. The "AboutEgypt" option 2460 brings up graphics, text or additional video concerning
Egypt. For example, amap of Egypt withpopulation densities may be shown. The option for
"Upcoming Events" 2462 brings graphics, text or video concerning new events in Egypt. For example, text and newspaper articles concerning the construction of new irrigation canals is displayed.
"Remote Confrol" option 2464 brings up a command menu (such as the "tool bar"
2151 of Figures 28a - 28d) that allows the user to change camera angles or positioning in any ofthe cameras capable of that effect. The menu would apply to actual or perceived camera control. For example, the user could pan around the Sphinx (camera 1 , shown at 2452) to observe it from the front, each side, and back.
Thus, this single screen relating to Egypt provides a wealth of information at a single Internet address (or web site). The user may, but need not, "link" to other locations on the Internet. Audiovisual presentations are displayed, which give the user insight into the people and culture of Egypt. Text, graphics, and additional stored video is available to further educate the user. Camera confrol (actual or perceived) gives the user the feeling of walking around different locations in Egypt.
Figure 38 shows a screen 2470 that asks users about their equipment in order to determine the appropriate data rate for communications. Preferably the screen is not needed and the data rate is determined by communication equipment 2240 automatically. Note that an advertisement 2402 is also shown on this screen.
Figure 39 shows an interactive lecture system. As shown in Figure 39, live video 2500 of an astronomy professor ' s lecture is transmitted to connected users. The users are able to ask the professor questions 2510 and receive answers 2512. The live video 2500, questions 2510, and answers 2512 are shown to all connected users . The users may enter questions via keyboard or microphone. However, if suitable data rates are available, the user may ask a question via video. Thus a spht screen video showing both the person asking the question and the lecturermay be presented toaU users simultaneously. The answers are preferably given by the lecturer, who may observe the question on a remote display. Alternatively, the answers may be supplied by the web site as text, graphics, or prestored video . The answer may pass through a closed captioning device, be encoded, and displayed on the screen in an answer box 2512. Other techniques for two-way video communication are described in co-pending U. S . Patent Application Serial No.09/391,461 entitled VIDEO CONFERENCING USING AN ELECTRONIC BOOK VIEWER, filed September 8, 1999, the.disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Referring to Figure 32a, questions are sent to the web site 2140 as part ofthe normal user tennhial communication. The web site 2140 receives the question at the communications equipment 2240 and forwards the question through router 2230 and the firewall/ access control unit 2254 to the administrative unit 2262. The administrative unit 2262 deteimines whether the question can be answered by playing stored video or showing stored text or graphics. If so, the administrative unit 2262 directs the database server 2256 to recall the appropriate information. The information is then output through the matrix switches 2250, 2270 or 2264, under confrol ofthe administrative unit, as appropriate. The ability ofthe administrative unit to answer questions depends upon the complexity of its software. Simple, prestored answers to frequently asked or standard questions may be provided in a basic system. More advanced systems may utilize an interpreter to analyze the question before providing an answer. For example, frequently asked questions in the astronomy fieldmay be "what is a star"? or "how was the galaxy formed"? In response to these questions, wliich may be provided on a menu or list, the administrative unit recalls prestored answers in either video, text, or graphics.
If a question cannot be answered by the administrative unit, or is sent directly to the remote lecturer, the question proceeds to the remote lecturer in a similar fashion as the camera confrol signal (Figure 26a) discussed previously. However, in the interactive lecture embodiment, the camera control unit 2268 (Figure 32a) is replaced with a question format unit (not shown) which reformats the question under control ofthe administrative unit 2262. Transmitter 2210 then transmits a question signal to the location ofthe remote lecture via the datacommunicationnetwork2120 and mecommunicationpaths 2126,2128. The lecturer has a display which shows questions received over the data communication network.
In an alternative system, the lecturer or anumber of assistants may select from among many prestored answers in response to a question. In this system, the remote lecturer has a computer and monitor (not shown) which displays the questions and the available prestored answers. The lecturer or assistants then match answers with the questions. The prestored answers are preferably forwarded to the individual who asked the associated question, i order for others to learn from the questions, the questions and answers may be provided to all connected users. Figures 40 and 41 show a system that uses a combination of live video, stored video, stored graphics, camera control and interactive questioning. The live video 2550 of camera 1 shown in Figure 40 relates to a geological site, i.e., the geyser, "Old Faithful." Since the site is located on aNational Park, the display screen has been customized to allow for the selection "About National Parks" 2604. When this is selected, the user's command is communicated to the web server 2112, 2130, 2140 for analysis by the administrative unit 2262. The Administrative unit 2262 determines that prestored video and graphics are required, and instructs the database server 2256 to output the correct information: video to the matrix switch 2250, and graphics to the matrix switch 2264. The matrix switches, 2250, 2270, and 2264, under control ofthe administrative unit 2262, forward the video and graphics to the user through the communication equipment 2240.
Figure 41 shows the result at the user terminal. The communicated prestored video 2560 of a Park Ranger appears on the screen. The Park Ranger discusses the topic of National Parks. The discussion occurs in conjunction with a graphical display ofthe locations of all National Parks, shown at the screen location 2570. The user may select other options, such as "Map 600" to return to the map of all remote sites, "About This Site" 2602 to learn more about the site currently viewed, "More About National Parks" 2614 for even more information about National Parks, "Upcoming Events" 2606 for a schedule of upcoming events, "Remote Confrol" 2608 for remote (either actual orperceived) control ofthe camera (i.e. camera 1), "Ask Questions" 2610 for asking questions (as in Figure 39) to an on-line Park Ranger, and "Other Topics" 2612, for a list of other topics and/or options.
H. Surveillance Systems The remote camera systems discussed above may be used in a surveillance or tracking system. For example, a researcher may place a video camera in the center of a watering hole, preferably connected to a video recorder for storing many hours of activity at the watering hole. Multiple cameras or a wide-angle lens may be used such that virtual camera control (as described previously) may be performed on the video. Such a surveillance system has many advantages.
First, the surveillance system allows for automatic scanning ofthe surveyed area, without the need for moving any cameras. AdditionaUy, viewing multiple segments ofthe area under surveillance may be viewed at the same time in a split-screen or multi-screen image. AU that needs to be done is the removal of distortion in multiple segments ofthe video (if using a wide-angle lens). The disclosure of U.S. PatentNo.5,359,363, issued October 25, 1994 to Kuban et al., incorporated herein by reference, discloses one example usable with the surveillance system.
Second, automatic monitoring an(i or fracldng may be performed. Often, researchers and photographers wait through long periods of inactivity before a desired event occurs . For example, a photographer may wait for hours for a lion or other wildlife to approach the photographer's position. The systemmaybeusedto automatically monitor a remote region for activity. In this case, a processor may monitor the multiple cameras or the digital wide- angle video for pixel changes indicating the desired event. For example, an approaching lion in an otherwise inactive desert environment will cause a moving pattern to form on a camera' s output or in the wide angle image. A processor may detect the pattern and alert a wildlife researcher that an event is occurring.
Further, the processor may automatically and continually display the relevant camera output, or the segment ofthe wide angle image containing the lion, thereby tracking the hon. Thus, the present invention may employ tracking techniques, known in the prior art, to the obtained digital image. h the monitoring and fracking embodiment distortion may be removed from the wide angle image prior to performing the processing to determine whether an event is occurring. The type of event being monitored and nature ofthe object being tracked controls whether monitoring and/or fracking may be performed on the distorted or undistorted image. One of ordinary skill in the art will choose the system best suited for the particular monitored event or tracked object.
Figure 42 shows a flow diagram of a monitoring and fracking system. The software necessary to perform the momtoring/fracking functions maybe located at the web site or at the user's terminal, such as the home system 258 and viewer 266. The image/video signal to be processed for monitoring and/or tracking may be a live video feed or be played back from stored video. Thus, a wildlife scientist may leave multiple video cameras running overnight (or a single video camera with a wide-angle lens) and when the video tape is played back, the segments/cameras containing activity are displayed.
Referring to Figure 42, an "input frame of reference" routine 2700 is executed. This routine is optional, and is used to establish a frame of reference direction, such as north. The frame of reference may detemiine the first segment of a wide-angle image to view, or the first camera to view. Next, a "reset segment counter" routine 2710 is executed. This sets the segment or camera to be first displayed.
Each segment or camera is viewed only for a limited time, prior to viewing the next segment or camera. Thus, a "reset timer' ' routine 2715 is executed to reset the interval when segments or cameras are switched.
Next, the "obtain image" routine 2720 is executed. This routine obtains the wide angle image (live or prerecorded), or images from all the cameras (in the multiple cameraperceived control embodiment of Figures 27 - 28d). The obtained image from a wide-angle lens may be processed to remove the distortion or not, depending on what is being monitored. The obtained image is processed to determine active areas (cameras or segments). Active areas are areas where the processor determines that activity is taking place, either by changes in the pixels at those locations, by using other known image/video processing techniques, or by using external sensors. The processing is performed as known in the art and is not described further herein. The processing occurs during the "process for activity" routine 2730. This routine uses the frame of reference to determine which segment(s), relative to the normal (i.e., north) is/are active.
If activity is present, the "display active segments" routine 2750 displays the active segments or cameras on a display. Distortion from the relevant segments is removed in the wide-angle lens embodiment. If more than one segment is active, a split screen display may show each segment simultaneously. The spht screen display may make reference to the frame of reference that was previously entered during routine 2700. The "reset timer" routine 2710 is then executed so that the last segment under view is returned when activity is no longer present. If activity is notpresent, the "display current segment" routine 2760 is executed. This routine displays the current segment or camera until the timer expires, at which point the next segment or camera is displayed. The display may make reference to the frame of reference which was previously entered during routine 2700.
After displaying the current segment or camera, the "time limit exceeded" routine 2770 is executed. Ifthe time limit has not been exceeded, a branch to the "obtain image" routine 2720 occurs and processmg continues until the time limit is exceeded, or until activity occurs. In an "autopan" embodiment (Figure 28a), the time limit value maybe increased by pressing the "-"buttonin conjunction with the "speed" button (Figure 28a), for a slower autopan, and the time limit may be decreased by pressing the "+" button in conjunction with the "speed" button (Figure 28a) for a faster autopan.
Ifthe time limit is exceeded, the segment (or camera) counter is incremented by the "increment segment counter" routine 2780. Ifthe counter is greater than the maximum number of cameras or segments, the "counter > max" routine 2790 branches to the "reset segment counter" routine 2710, to restart the automatic panning. Ifthe counter is not greater than allowed, abranch occurs to the "reset timer" routine 2715 so that the next segment or camera may be displayed, and processing for activity continues.
Thus, the flow chart of Figure 42 allows for automatic panning and for automatic hacking. Ifthe "process for activity" routine 2730, the "activity?" test 2740, and the "display active segments" routine 2750 were removed, the "autopan" function described previously and shown with respect to Figure 28a - 28d would be achieved. In this case, "display cuπent segment" routine 2760 would follow "obtain image" routine 2740.
Monitoring and automatic panning may be combined. When combined, all active segments or cameras are automatically panned for a brief timeframe. Thus, if a lion and zebra are both moving towards the camera from opposite direction, each would be displayed for a brief timeframe before switching to a display ofthe other. This is an alternative to the split screen display previously described. I. Display of Video Data In the systems described above, the user may select or be provided data concerning the video currently displayed. For example, superimposed on the video may be the date and time the video was recorded, a name ofthe image location, remaining time for the video, or data pertaining to the segment (or camera source) ofthe video which is currently being viewed.
This segment/camera data may be a compass heading (such as north) or angle from a reference (such as 40 degrees), or coordinate information (such as X/Y, X/Y/Z, R/Θ, and X/R/Θ) relating to the location ofthe center ofthe segment/video currently displayed in relation to the wide angle image or other cameras. A graphical representation ofthe lens (or layout of the cameras) may show which segment ofthe wide angle image (or camera) is being displayed. In order to display the image segment, a frame of reference may be adopted, especially for a spherical lens. The frame ofreference would be either generated by a processor at the web site or user ' s terminal, or entered by a user or operator. For example, the user may select which direction is "north" or position the axis of a coordinate system if a coordinate display is to be used for a particular lens. Additionally, the image' s magnification and its density/colors may also be shown on the display, such as "magnification = lOx, picture density = 200x200 pixels, 64 colors."
The display of image data may be used in aU embodiments ofthe present invention, and are preferably updated when the displayed image changes. Figure 43 shows a display 2800 showing a coral reef 2805 where users have virtual camera control using multiple underwater cameras. On the screen 2807, the date 2810 is displayed along with the time 2820. The location is shown at 2830 and the remaining time of the program at 2840. The magnification is shown at 2850 and the density and colors at 2860. The segment camera field 2870 shows that the user is viewing camera no. 3. This segment/camera datamay be shown graphically, as depicted at 2880. Field2880 is atop view ofthe coral reef 2805 and the layout ofthe cameras, in this case cameras 1 through 10. The square around camerano.3 indicates that this camera is the source of the picture on the display 2800. The frame ofreference (north) is indicated at 2890 for the graphical segment data and 2895 for the video data. J. Storing Video and Interactive Presentations.
The images, video, and image data may also be stored at the user's terminal. The wide angle distorted image may be stored, along with the image data, if present. Storage ofthe image and image data enables the user to retrieve the image and view a segment at a later date. Optionally, the entire interactive presentation may be stored at the user's terminal (including associated graphics, text, video, data, or other information), although all the pertinent files and data would have to be received by the user.
ThedisclosureofPCTPublicationNo. WO 96/08105, published March 14, 1996by Labun, incorporated herein by reference is related to storing images and may be used with the present invention. The video or image may be stored in either its distorted or undistorted state. Storing the video or image in its undistorted state has the advantage in that tall and/or wide pictures may be stored in their most viewable state, and in that editing may be performed on the images more easily if they are retrieved with the distortion removed. The artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate that other aspects ofthe patent applications, patents and publications incorporated herein by reference may be applied to the present invention. As such, the patent applications, patents and publications are incorporated herein in their entirety. The terms and descriptions used herein are set forth by way of iUustration only and are not meant as limitations. Those skilled hi the art will recognize that numerous variations are possible within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined in the following claims.

Claims

CLAIMS: 1. An apparatus for communicating audio and video signals to an electronic book viewer, the apparatus comprising: a web site, connected to a plurality of electronic book viewers, comprising: a receiver that receives digitally compressed audio and video; an audio-video server that provides a plurality of digital video signals; a switch that switches and combines the plurality of digital video signals; an administrative unit, connected to the switch that directs which signals are switched and combined; and a fransmitter, connected to the switch that communicates the digital audio and video signals to the electronic book viewer as video streams.
2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the web site further comprises: an audio and video storage device, connected to the receiver that stores at least some received audio and video; a data storage device, connected to the receiver that stores textual and graphical data; a database server, connected to the administrative unit, the switch, the audio and video storage device and the data storage device; wherein the administrative means directs the database server to retrieve and supply to the switch the audio and video information from the audio and video storage device and the textual and graphical data from the data storage device.
3. An apparatus providing the perception of remote camera control to a user, the apparatus comprising: a plurality of remote video cameras arranged to film a remote site, each remote video camera providing a video signal of a different perspective ofthe remote site; a compressor, connected to the video cameras, that compresses the video signals; a data communication network, connected to a web site and to the compressor, that carries the compressed video signals from the remote site to the web site; the web site connected to the communication network and to electronic book viewers, comprising: a receiver, having the compressed video signals as its input; an administrative unit that determines which video signals to pass to a user terminal in response to a user command; a switch, controlled by the administrative unit, for switching received video signals to communication equipment; communication equipment, in operative communication with the administrative unit, for fransmittiiig the switched video signals to user terminals and for receiving a user command; wherein an elecfronic book viewer transmits the user command to the web site and the administrative unit directs the switch to provide video signals to the electronic book viewer in accordance with the user command thereby enabling a user to remotely control the position or orientation ofthe video signal being received at the elecfromc book viewer by entering user commands.
4. A system for providing a user with perceived camera confrol via an Internet web site, comprising: communications equipment to receive camera confrol commands from one or more connected users and to transmit video to the one or more connected users; elecfronic book viewers to receive the transmitted video and to transmit camera control commands; video of different views of a remote site; an aάfriinistrative unit, wherein the adrninistrative unit deteπnines which view ofthe remote site to transmit to a connected user in response to a received camera control command, thereby providing the connected user with the perception of camera control.
5. The system of claim 4, wherein the system further comprises a video storage unit, wherein the video storage unit supplies video of different views ofthe remote site to the web site.
6. The system of claim 4, wherein the video of different views ofthe remote site is video of different camera angles ofthe remote site.
7. The system of claim 4, wherein the video of different views ofthe remote site is a distorted wide angle video ofthe remote site, and wherein the system further comprises a means for removing distortion from at least one view ofthe wide angle video.
8. A system for providing a user with actual camera confrol, the system comprising: a web site, comprising: communications equipment to receive camera control commands from one or more connected users and to transmit video to the one or more connected users; a video receiver for receiving video from a remote video camera; a transmitter in communication with the remote video camera; a camera confrol unit, which outputs formatted camera control commands to the transmitter; and wherein the camera control commands received from a user are formatted and fransmitted to the remote camera and control the remote camera.
9. A method of remotely viewing a remote site, the method comprising the steps of: accessing a communications network; receiving video depicting one or more views ofthe remote site via the communications network; entering commands regarding a different view ofthe remote site; displaying the different view ofthe remote site.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the communications network is the hitemet, and further comprising the steps of: addressing a web site on the Internet; selecting a remote site.
11. The method of claim 9, wherein the received video is distorted wide angle video, and wherein the step of displaying comprises the step of removing distortion from a segment ofthe distorted wide angle video pertaining to the different view to be displayed.
12. The method of claim 9, wherein the received video is video from one of aplurahty of remote cameras, and further comprising the steps of: processing the entered command to select one ofthe remote cameras in accordance with the commanded different view; and receiving video ofthe different view from the selected remote camera.
13. The method of claim 12, wherein the displaying step further includes the step of indicating the location ofthe selected remote camera and a frame ofreference at the remote site.
14. The method of claim 13 , wherein the step of indicating further comprises the step of graphically displaying a layout of cameras at the remote site with respect to the frame of reference.
15. The method of claim 9, wherein the displaying step further includes the step of indicating the location of a frame ofreference at the remote site.
16. The method of claim 9, wherein the displaying step further includes the step of indicating data concerning the video, the data selected from the group consisting of: remote site location, remote site time.
17. The method of claim 9, wherein the displaying step further includes the step of indicating data concerning the video, the data selected from the group consisting of: magnification, pixel density ofthe video, number of colors in the video.
18. The method of claim 9, wherein the entered command is a command to monitor the remote site, the method further comprising the steps of: processing the video for activity at the remote site; and wherein the step of displaying includes the step of: selecting views ofthe remote site displaying activity if activity is present.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein the step of displaying further includes the step of: automatically panning the remote site if activity is not present.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the received video is wide angle distorted video, and the step of processing includes the step of removing distortion from at least a portion ofthe received video to detect whether activity is present.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the step of selecting includes the step of choosing segments ofthe wide angle video for viewing, and the step of displaying further includes the step of removing distortion from the chosen segments.
22. The method of claim 18, wherein the received video is video from a plurality of cameras, and the step of selecting includes the step of choosing one or more cameras for viewing if activity is present.
23. The method of claim 18, wherein the entered command is a command to automatically pan the remote site, and wherem the step of displaying further includes the step of mcrementaUy viewing, for a fixed time, a plurality of different views ofthe remote site.
24. The method of claim 23, further comprising the step of: selecting whether to increase or decrease the fixed time.
25. The method of clam 9, further comprising the steps of: receiving data and graphics concerning the remote site; and where the step of displaying further comprises the step of showing the data and graphics.
26. The method of claim 25, further comprising the step of saving the video, graphics, and data in a storage media.
27. The method of claim 9, further comprising the step of saving the video, graphics, and data in a storage media.
28. An electronic book, comprising: a link to an Internet web site, the web site providing aplurality of streaming video, audio and text data when connected to the electronic book; and a control function, wherein the control function allows selection of one or more ofthe plurality of sfreaming video, audio and text data, and wherein the selected data are displayed with display ofthe electronic book.
29. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the electronic book is adapted to be displayed on an electronic book viewer.
30. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the electronic book is adapted to be displayed on a television.
31. The elecfronic book of claim 28, wherein the electronic book is adapted to be displayed on a personal computer.
32. The elecfronic book of claim 28, wherein the elecfronic book is adapted to be displayed on a palm-sized viewer.
33. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the confrol function, comprises: a camera selection control that allows a user to select a camera angle from which is provided a video signal; and a multiple screen function that provides for display of video signals from more than one camera angle.
34. The elecfronic book of claim 33, wherein the video signals are tiled for display.
35. The elecfronic book of claim 33, wherein the a first video signal is provided in a picture-in-picture format with a second video signal.
36. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the electronic book is stored on a device having a memory, and wherein one or more ofthe streaming video, audio and text data are stored in the memory.
37. The electronic book of claim28, wherein the one ormore of the plurality of sfreaming video, audio and text data are provided live with display of the link in the electronic book.
38. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the connection to the Internet web site is completed using a wired communication system.
39. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the connection to the Internet web site is completed using a wireless communication system.
40. The electronic book of claim 28, wherein the connection to the Internet web site uses an electronic link.
41. A computer-readable medium for confrolhng a connection between an electronic book viewer and a world watch live site, comprising:
an interface module that receives user inputs, the inputs comprising commands to select a viewing segment; a memory module coupled to the interface module that directs storage ofthe received inputs; a transmission module coupled to the memory module that transmits the stored inputs to a remote location; and a receiving module that receives video and audio data from the selected viewing segment.
42. The computer-readable medium of claim 41 , wherein the world watch live site is an Internet web site.
43. The computer-readable medium of claim 41, wherein the commands comprise: a camera pan command; a camera select command; a camera off command; a zoom command; a camera on command; and a camera tilt command.
44. The computer-readable medium of claim 44, further comprising a display module coupled to the receiving module that displays the selected viewing segment.
45. The computer-readable medium of claim 44, wherein the receiving module receives multiple selected viewing segments and the display module displays the received multiple viewing segments simultaneously.
46. The computer-readable medium of claim 44, wherein the viewing segments comprise different views ofthe world watch live site.
47. The computer-readable medium of claim 41, wherein one or more ofthe viewing segments comprises a wide angle segment, the computer-readable medium further comprising a video correction module coupled to the display module that removes distortion from the wide angle segment before display.
48. The computer-readable medium of claim 41 , wherein the video and audio data are saved in a memory.
49. An electronic book, comprising: a data file; a graphics file; interactive files; elecfronic links included in the data file and the graphics file, wherein the electronic links couple the electronic book to the interactive files, the interactive files, including: an input file to receive commands and data, and an output file to provide prompts and instructions and to provide the input file; and a control program that operates to couple the electronic book to an interactive file upon activation of an electronic link.
50. The electronic book of claim 49, wherein the interactive file is displayed on an electronic book viewer.
51. The electronic book of claim 49, wherein the interactive file is a world watch live site.
52. The electronic book of claim 49, further comprising an interactive file menu, the interactive file menu including a link to the interactive file, wherein the menu includes a list of available interactive files, and wherem activation ofthe link connects the menu to the mteractive file, the interactive file being displayed on a screen of an elecfronic book viewer.
PCT/US2001/004946 2000-03-07 2001-03-07 Electronic book viewer connection to world watch live WO2001067302A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2001247201A AU2001247201A1 (en) 2000-03-07 2001-03-07 Electronic book connection to world watch live

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/520,344 2000-03-07
US09/520,344 US7849393B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2000-03-07 Electronic book connection to world watch live

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001067302A2 true WO2001067302A2 (en) 2001-09-13
WO2001067302A3 WO2001067302A3 (en) 2002-04-18

Family

ID=24072191

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2001/004946 WO2001067302A2 (en) 2000-03-07 2001-03-07 Electronic book viewer connection to world watch live

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (1) US7849393B1 (en)
AU (1) AU2001247201A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2001067302A2 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003034136A2 (en) * 2001-10-16 2003-04-24 Hewlett-Packard Company High resolution display
FR2834603A1 (en) * 2002-01-07 2003-07-11 Egg Solution Optronics Method for transmission of signals containing at least a wide angle image component in an uncorrected noise state that improves interaction between a local signal processing line and the broadcasting organizations
WO2004059979A1 (en) * 2002-12-31 2004-07-15 British Telecommunications Public Limited Company Video streaming
WO2010054465A1 (en) * 2008-11-13 2010-05-20 Max Readtime Limited Method and system for enabling video reading sessions
US7733808B2 (en) 2006-11-10 2010-06-08 Microsoft Corporation Peer-to-peer aided live video sharing system
WO2010144361A1 (en) * 2009-06-09 2010-12-16 Skiff, Inc. System and method for providing spatial and temporal content in an electronic device
US8280954B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2012-10-02 Scomm, Inc. Method and system for providing live real-time communication via text between mobile user devices

Families Citing this family (52)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0807352A1 (en) 1995-01-31 1997-11-19 Transcenic, Inc Spatial referenced photography
US6876991B1 (en) 1999-11-08 2005-04-05 Collaborative Decision Platforms, Llc. System, method and computer program product for a collaborative decision platform
US8583027B2 (en) * 2000-10-26 2013-11-12 Front Row Technologies, Llc Methods and systems for authorizing computing devices for receipt of venue-based data based on the location of a user
US7812856B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2010-10-12 Front Row Technologies, Llc Providing multiple perspectives of a venue activity to electronic wireless hand held devices
US20020065927A1 (en) * 2000-09-05 2002-05-30 Janik Craig M. Webpad and method for using the same
US7668752B2 (en) * 2003-03-13 2010-02-23 Realnetworks, Inc. System and method for the distribution of software products
US9489853B2 (en) * 2004-09-27 2016-11-08 Kenneth Nathaniel Sherman Reading and information enhancement system and method
US9547994B2 (en) * 2003-10-01 2017-01-17 Kenneth Nathaniel Sherman Progressive reference system, method and apparatus
WO2006019892A2 (en) * 2004-07-14 2006-02-23 Invitrogen Corporation Methods and systems for in silico experimental design and for providing a biotechnology product to a customer
US9275052B2 (en) 2005-01-19 2016-03-01 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Providing annotations of a digital work
JP4517943B2 (en) * 2005-05-31 2010-08-04 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus, processing method of these apparatuses, and program causing computer to execute the method
US8352449B1 (en) 2006-03-29 2013-01-08 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Reader device content indexing
KR100808991B1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2008-03-07 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and Method For Searching Words With Electronic Dictionary In The Mobile Station
US9672533B1 (en) 2006-09-29 2017-06-06 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Acquisition of an item based on a catalog presentation of items
US8725565B1 (en) 2006-09-29 2014-05-13 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Expedited acquisition of a digital item following a sample presentation of the item
US7865817B2 (en) 2006-12-29 2011-01-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Invariant referencing in digital works
US9665529B1 (en) 2007-03-29 2017-05-30 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Relative progress and event indicators
US7716224B2 (en) 2007-03-29 2010-05-11 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Search and indexing on a user device
US7921309B1 (en) 2007-05-21 2011-04-05 Amazon Technologies Systems and methods for determining and managing the power remaining in a handheld electronic device
TW201005583A (en) * 2008-07-01 2010-02-01 Yoostar Entertainment Group Inc Interactive systems and methods for video compositing
US8990087B1 (en) * 2008-09-30 2015-03-24 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Providing text to speech from digital content on an electronic device
US20100161499A1 (en) * 2008-10-17 2010-06-24 Royaltyshare, Inc. Centralized Rights Management System for Digital Media
US9087032B1 (en) 2009-01-26 2015-07-21 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Aggregation of highlights
US8378979B2 (en) 2009-01-27 2013-02-19 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Electronic device with haptic feedback
US8832584B1 (en) 2009-03-31 2014-09-09 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Questions on highlighted passages
US9741062B2 (en) * 2009-04-21 2017-08-22 Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated System for collaboratively interacting with content
US8692763B1 (en) 2009-09-28 2014-04-08 John T. Kim Last screen rendering for electronic book reader
US9576109B1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2017-02-21 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Content revenue allocation
US9679047B1 (en) 2010-03-29 2017-06-13 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Context-sensitive reference works
US8830327B2 (en) * 2010-05-13 2014-09-09 Honeywell International Inc. Surveillance system with direct database server storage
US8542205B1 (en) 2010-06-24 2013-09-24 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Refining search results based on touch gestures
US8477109B1 (en) 2010-06-24 2013-07-02 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Surfacing reference work entries on touch-sensitive displays
US8250071B1 (en) 2010-06-30 2012-08-21 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Disambiguation of term meaning
JP5672862B2 (en) * 2010-08-27 2015-02-18 ソニー株式会社 Imaging apparatus, imaging system, and imaging method
US9495322B1 (en) 2010-09-21 2016-11-15 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Cover display
US20120090032A1 (en) * 2010-10-06 2012-04-12 Victor Trinklein Webtextbooks
KR20120038668A (en) * 2010-10-14 2012-04-24 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for updating e-book content
US20120110476A1 (en) * 2010-11-02 2012-05-03 Qiuhang Richard Qian My online 3D E library
US9268733B1 (en) * 2011-03-07 2016-02-23 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Dynamically selecting example passages
US20120324355A1 (en) * 2011-06-20 2012-12-20 Sumbola, Inc. Synchronized reading in a web-based reading system
US8755058B1 (en) 2011-08-26 2014-06-17 Selfpublish Corporation System and method for self-publication
US9128581B1 (en) 2011-09-23 2015-09-08 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Providing supplemental information for a digital work in a user interface
US9639518B1 (en) 2011-09-23 2017-05-02 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Identifying entities in a digital work
US9613003B1 (en) * 2011-09-23 2017-04-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Identifying topics in a digital work
US9158741B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2015-10-13 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Indicators for navigating digital works
US20130218706A1 (en) * 2012-02-22 2013-08-22 Elwha Llc Systems and methods for accessing camera systems
US9007633B2 (en) * 2012-08-15 2015-04-14 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for efficiently capturing high-quality scans of multi-page documents with hand-held devices
US20140068432A1 (en) * 2012-08-30 2014-03-06 CBS Radio, Inc. Enabling audience interaction with a broadcast media program
US10319040B1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-06-11 Ktech Services Limited Control of the generation and display of royalty administration and rights management data based on the user's rights of access
US9336360B1 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-05-10 Kobalt Music Group Limited Analysis and display of a precis of global licensing activities
EP3020205A1 (en) * 2013-07-09 2016-05-18 Saronikos Trading and Services, Unipessoal Lda. Remote control for remotely controlling an apparatus for receiving television signals, connecting to the internet and functioning as a multimedia center, and related system thereof
US9485514B2 (en) * 2014-04-03 2016-11-01 Crestron Electronics Inc. System and method for compressing video and reformatting the compressed video to simulate uncompressed video with a lower bandwidth

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995015649A1 (en) * 1993-12-02 1995-06-08 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book selection and delivery system
US5761485A (en) * 1995-12-01 1998-06-02 Munyan; Daniel E. Personal electronic book system
WO1999012349A1 (en) * 1997-09-04 1999-03-11 Discovery Communications, Inc. Apparatus for video access and control over computer network, including image correction
WO1999044144A1 (en) * 1998-02-26 1999-09-02 Monec Mobile Network Computing Ltd. Electronic device, preferably an electronic book

Family Cites Families (656)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1204190A (en) 1966-12-26 1970-09-03 Mainichi Broadcasting System Multiplex communication system
US3860873A (en) 1971-10-01 1975-01-14 Tape Athon Corp Fm transmission system
US3891792A (en) 1974-06-25 1975-06-24 Asahi Broadcasting Television character crawl display method and apparatus
US3978470A (en) 1974-07-10 1976-08-31 Midwest Analog And Digital, Inc. Multi-channel data color display apparatus
US4023408A (en) 1975-01-10 1977-05-17 Dytronics Company, Inc. Stormscope
US4197590A (en) 1976-01-19 1980-04-08 Nugraphics, Inc. Method for dynamically viewing image elements stored in a random access memory array
FR2363949A1 (en) 1976-09-06 1978-03-31 Telediffusion Fse DIGITAL TRANSMISSION AND TEXT DISPLAY SYSTEM ON A TELEVISION SCREEN
US4071697A (en) 1976-10-18 1978-01-31 Atari, Inc. Interactive video/telephone transmission system
US4528589A (en) 1977-02-14 1985-07-09 Telease, Inc. Method and system for subscription television billing and access
US4160242A (en) 1977-06-28 1979-07-03 Fowler Gerald C Reading machine
US4179212A (en) 1977-09-06 1979-12-18 Xerox Corporation Demand publishing royalty accounting system
US4159417A (en) 1977-10-28 1979-06-26 Rubincam David P Electronic book
US4405829A (en) 1977-12-14 1983-09-20 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Cryptographic communications system and method
NL7802132A (en) 1978-02-27 1979-08-29 Philips Nv PORTABLE ELEMENT FOR RECORDING, REMEMBERING, DISPLAYING AND DISPLAYING DIGITAL INFORMATION AND BOOKING DEVICE FOR USE IN A BOOKING SYSTEM.
JPS54129942A (en) 1978-03-31 1979-10-08 Fujitsu Ltd Direct transfer system between sub-systems
US4860379A (en) 1979-05-18 1989-08-22 General Instrument Corporation Data communications system
US4513390A (en) 1979-06-08 1985-04-23 Planning Research Corporation System for digital transmission and synthesis of integrated data
US4406626A (en) 1979-07-31 1983-09-27 Anderson Weston A Electronic teaching aid
US4302193A (en) 1980-01-17 1981-11-24 Haynes Leonard S Reading tutor timer
US4398216A (en) 1980-09-19 1983-08-09 Telease, Inc. Multiple signal transmission method and system, particularly for television
DE3036552C2 (en) 1980-09-27 1985-04-25 Blaupunkt-Werke Gmbh, 3200 Hildesheim Television reception system
US4455570A (en) 1980-10-13 1984-06-19 Pioneer Electronic Corporation CATV System
US4381522A (en) 1980-12-01 1983-04-26 Adams-Russell Co., Inc. Selective viewing
US4688218A (en) 1981-07-15 1987-08-18 Etablissement Public De Diffusion Dit "Telediffusion De France" Multiplex channels for continuous flow for numerical signal
US4604710A (en) 1981-10-09 1986-08-05 International Business Machines Corporation System for converting data processing information to text processing format and vice versa
US4694490A (en) 1981-11-03 1987-09-15 Harvey John C Signal processing apparatus and methods
US4965825A (en) 1981-11-03 1990-10-23 The Personalized Mass Media Corporation Signal processing apparatus and methods
AU1104583A (en) 1981-12-19 1983-06-30 Frederick William Chard Method and apparatus for editing the output of a television
CA1200910A (en) 1981-12-29 1986-02-18 Toshiaki Yamada Terminal device for editing document and communicating data
US4429385A (en) 1981-12-31 1984-01-31 American Newspaper Publishers Association Method and apparatus for digital serial scanning with hierarchical and relational access
EP0085209B1 (en) 1982-01-29 1986-07-30 International Business Machines Corporation Audio response terminal for use with data processing systems
US4579533A (en) 1982-04-26 1986-04-01 Anderson Weston A Method of teaching a subject including use of a dictionary and translator
US4533948A (en) 1982-04-30 1985-08-06 General Instrument Corporation CATV Communication system
US4484217A (en) 1982-05-11 1984-11-20 Telease, Inc. Method and system for remote reporting, particularly for pay television billing
US4578531A (en) 1982-06-09 1986-03-25 At&T Bell Laboratories Encryption system key distribution method and apparatus
JPS59188A (en) 1982-06-24 1984-01-05 シャープ株式会社 Portable general-purpose electronic apparatus
US4567512A (en) 1982-08-19 1986-01-28 World Video Library, Inc. Recorded program communication system
EP0103438B1 (en) 1982-09-07 1986-07-23 Thorn Emi Plc Television and distribution network
US4517598A (en) 1982-10-22 1985-05-14 George Van Valkenburg Method and apparatus for electronic publishing
US4528643A (en) 1983-01-10 1985-07-09 Fpdc, Inc. System for reproducing information in material objects at a point of sale location
US4532540A (en) 1983-03-28 1985-07-30 Rca Corporation Teletext set-top converter with transparent mode
US4587520A (en) 1983-04-07 1986-05-06 Rca Corporation Cursor controlled page selection in a video display
US4916539A (en) 1983-04-21 1990-04-10 The Weather Channel, Inc. Communications system having receivers which can be addressed in selected classes
US4625235A (en) 1983-05-19 1986-11-25 Westinghouse Electric Corp. Remote control switching of television sources
US4613901A (en) 1983-05-27 1986-09-23 M/A-Com Linkabit, Inc. Signal encryption and distribution system for controlling scrambling and selective remote descrambling of television signals
US4816904A (en) 1983-06-09 1989-03-28 Control Data Corporation Television and market research data collection system and method
US4566030A (en) 1983-06-09 1986-01-21 Ctba Associates Television viewer data collection system
US4633462A (en) 1983-07-18 1986-12-30 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Multiple access communication on a CATV reverse channel
EP0158633A4 (en) 1983-10-07 1986-07-24 Nat Information Utilities Corp Education utility.
US4776011A (en) 1983-10-24 1988-10-04 Sony Corporation Recursive key schedule cryptographic system
AU576787B2 (en) 1983-11-07 1988-09-08 Sony Corporation Satellite to cable television interface
GB2149544B (en) 1983-11-08 1987-03-25 Standard Telephones Cables Ltd Electronic books for the partially sighted
NL8303991A (en) 1983-11-18 1985-06-17 Nl Standard Electric Mij B V CABLE TELEVISION NETWORK.
US4742543A (en) 1983-12-22 1988-05-03 Frederiksen Jeffrey E Video transmission system
GB8401318D0 (en) 1984-01-18 1984-02-22 Communications Patents Ltd Communications system
NL8400860A (en) 1984-03-16 1985-10-16 Nl Standard Electric Mij B V CABLE TELEVISION NETWORK.
US4625076A (en) 1984-03-19 1986-11-25 Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation Signed document transmission system
US4602279A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-07-22 Actv, Inc. Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays
AU3542284A (en) 1984-03-30 1985-10-03 Wang Laboratories, Inc. Enhanced videotex decoder
US4697209A (en) 1984-04-26 1987-09-29 A. C. Nielsen Company Methods and apparatus for automatically identifying programs viewed or recorded
GB8410671D0 (en) 1984-04-26 1984-05-31 British Telecomm Transmitting stereo audio programmes
EP0167237A3 (en) 1984-05-31 1988-08-03 AMERICAN TELEVISION &amp; COMMUNICATIONS CORPORATION Cable television system
US4673976A (en) 1984-05-31 1987-06-16 American Television & Communications Corporation Cable television system data verification apparatus
DE3423846A1 (en) 1984-06-28 1986-01-09 Telefunken Fernseh Und Rundfunk Gmbh, 3000 Hannover Television receiver with a teletext decoder
US4644470A (en) 1984-07-20 1987-02-17 International Business Machines Corp. Non-unique names for broadcast messages
US4941125A (en) 1984-08-01 1990-07-10 Smithsonian Institution Information storage and retrieval system
US4724491A (en) 1984-08-28 1988-02-09 Adams-Russell Co., Inc. Inserting television advertising spots automatically
US4829569A (en) 1984-09-21 1989-05-09 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Communication of individual messages to subscribers in a subscription television system
US4890319A (en) 1984-09-21 1989-12-26 Scientific-Atlantic, Inc. Method for controlling copying of protected information transmitted over a communications link
US4774655A (en) 1984-10-24 1988-09-27 Telebase Systems, Inc. System for retrieving information from a plurality of remote databases having at least two different languages
US5036537A (en) 1984-11-19 1991-07-30 General Instrument Corp. Geographic black-out method for direct broadcast satellite system
GB8429488D0 (en) 1984-11-22 1985-01-03 Communications Patents Ltd Interactive television distribution system
US4868866A (en) 1984-12-28 1989-09-19 Mcgraw-Hill Inc. Broadcast data distribution system
US4709266A (en) 1985-01-14 1987-11-24 Oak Industries Inc. Satellite scrambling communication network using geographically separated uplinks
US4616263A (en) 1985-02-11 1986-10-07 Gte Corporation Video subsystem for a hybrid videotex facility
NL8500690A (en) 1985-03-12 1986-10-01 Philips Nv REMOTE CONTROL UNIT FOR OPERATING VARIOUS MODULES.
SE448277B (en) 1985-04-12 1987-02-09 Draco Ab INDICATOR DEVICE WITH A DOSAGE DEVICE FOR MEDICINAL PRODUCTS
DE3688855T2 (en) 1985-05-01 1994-03-17 Gen Instrument Corp Satellite transmission system with direct transmission.
US4731840A (en) 1985-05-06 1988-03-15 The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy Method for encryption and transmission of digital keying data
US4751578A (en) 1985-05-28 1988-06-14 David P. Gordon System for electronically controllably viewing on a television updateable television programming information
US4706121B1 (en) 1985-07-12 1993-12-14 Insight Telecast, Inc. Tv schedule system and process
GB2177873B (en) 1985-07-19 1989-11-22 Marconi Electronic Devices Communications system
US4891838A (en) 1985-11-04 1990-01-02 Dental Data Service, Inc. Computer accessing system
US4854878A (en) 1985-11-29 1989-08-08 Malvino, Inc. Textbook with animated illustrations
US4688246A (en) 1985-12-20 1987-08-18 Zenith Electronics Corporation CATV scrambling system with compressed digital audio in synchronizing signal intervals
JPS62185485A (en) 1986-02-10 1987-08-13 Pioneer Electronic Corp Setting system for limit capable of viewing/listing charged program in bidirectional catv system
EP0243312B1 (en) 1986-04-18 1995-07-19 Nagra Plus S.A. Decoder for a pay television system
USD301037S (en) 1986-04-28 1989-05-09 Multivision Products, Inc. Hand-held remote control
US4694483A (en) 1986-06-02 1987-09-15 Innings Telecom Inc. Computerized system for routing incoming telephone calls to a plurality of agent positions
EP0252646B1 (en) 1986-07-07 1993-09-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Paperless portable book
US4890321A (en) 1986-07-08 1989-12-26 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Communications format for a subscription television system permitting transmission of individual text messages to subscribers
US4866770A (en) 1986-07-08 1989-09-12 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for communication of video, audio, teletext, and data to groups of decoders in a communication system
US5202817A (en) 1989-06-07 1993-04-13 Norand Corporation Hand-held data capture system with interchangeable modules
US4792972A (en) 1986-08-19 1988-12-20 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Remote programming of CATV channel authorization unit
US4712130A (en) 1986-08-29 1987-12-08 Rca Corporation Chrominance signal frequency converter as for a pix-in-pix television receiver
USD314383S (en) 1986-09-23 1991-02-05 RUF GmbH & Co. KG Elektrotechnische Spezialfabrik Remote-control transmitter
US4941089A (en) 1986-12-12 1990-07-10 Datapoint Corporation Input/output network for computer system
US4796220A (en) 1986-12-15 1989-01-03 Pride Software Development Corp. Method of controlling the copying of software
US4820167A (en) 1987-01-14 1989-04-11 Nobles Anthony A Electronic school teaching system
JP2658030B2 (en) 1987-01-30 1997-09-30 ソニー株式会社 Information transmission equipment
JP2722450B2 (en) 1987-02-25 1998-03-04 ソニー株式会社 Central control device
WO1988006775A1 (en) 1987-02-27 1988-09-07 Logicblend Limited Improvements in interactive video systems
US4885803A (en) 1987-03-17 1989-12-05 Lawrence W. Hermann System and method for controlling a plurality of electronic entertainment devices
US4985697A (en) 1987-07-06 1991-01-15 Learning Insights, Ltd. Electronic book educational publishing method using buried reference materials and alternate learning levels
US4847700A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays from transmitted television signals
US5152011A (en) 1987-07-27 1992-09-29 Schwob Pierre R Broadcast receiver capable of automatic station identification and format-scanning based on an internal database updatable via data reception over the airwaves
CA1288516C (en) 1987-07-31 1991-09-03 Leendert M. Bijnagte Apparatus and method for communicating textual and image information between a host computer and a remote display terminal
US4829372A (en) 1987-08-20 1989-05-09 Telaction Corporation Presentation player
US5208665A (en) 1987-08-20 1993-05-04 Telaction Corporation Presentation player for an interactive digital communication system
JPS6450688A (en) 1987-08-21 1989-02-27 Hashimoto Corp Method and device for generating individual television program
US4930158A (en) 1987-09-02 1990-05-29 Vogel Peter S Selective video playing system
US5099331A (en) 1987-09-04 1992-03-24 Texas Instruments Incorporated Apparatus for overlaying a displayed image with a second image
US4876736A (en) 1987-09-23 1989-10-24 A. C. Nielsen Company Method and apparatus for determining channel reception of a receiver
US4924513A (en) 1987-09-25 1990-05-08 Digital Equipment Corporation Apparatus and method for secure transmission of data over an unsecure transmission channel
US4959810A (en) 1987-10-14 1990-09-25 Universal Electronics, Inc. Universal remote control device
US5414426A (en) 1987-10-14 1995-05-09 Universal Electronics Inc. Favorite key macro command and chained macro command in a remote control
US4918516A (en) 1987-10-26 1990-04-17 501 Actv, Inc. Closed circuit television system having seamless interactive television programming and expandable user participation
US4835607A (en) 1987-11-16 1989-05-30 Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for expanding compressed video data
US4855725A (en) 1987-11-24 1989-08-08 Fernandez Emilio A Microprocessor based simulated book
US4947429A (en) 1987-11-30 1990-08-07 Zenith Electronics Corporation Pay per view television signaling method
US4920432A (en) 1988-01-12 1990-04-24 Eggers Derek C System for random access to an audio video data library with independent selection and display at each of a plurality of remote locations
US5132789A (en) 1988-01-15 1992-07-21 Tiltrac Corporation Tilt rack video tape library and VCP to multiple subscriber system
US4829558A (en) 1988-01-19 1989-05-09 Peac Media Research, Inc. System and device for data transmission, and related method
FR2627045B1 (en) 1988-02-05 1994-07-01 Sgs Thomson Microelectronics SELECTION SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING BROADCASTED OR BROADCASTED BROADCASTS
US5010499A (en) 1988-02-22 1991-04-23 Yee Keen Y Digital data capture for use with TV set or monitor
US5121476A (en) 1988-02-22 1992-06-09 Yee Keen Y TV data capture device
US5157783A (en) 1988-02-26 1992-10-20 Wang Laboratories, Inc. Data base system which maintains project query list, desktop list and status of multiple ongoing research projects
US4899292A (en) 1988-03-02 1990-02-06 Image Storage/Retrieval Systems, Inc. System for storing and retrieving text and associated graphics
US5155590A (en) 1990-03-20 1992-10-13 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. System for data channel level control
US5235619A (en) 1990-03-20 1993-08-10 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Cable television radio frequency subscriber data transmission apparatus and rf return method
US5319454A (en) 1990-11-13 1994-06-07 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. CATV system enabling access to premium (pay per view) program events by bar code data entry
US5003384A (en) 1988-04-01 1991-03-26 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Set-top interface transactions in an impulse pay per view television system
US4928177A (en) 1988-04-11 1990-05-22 Cooper Industries, Inc. Two-way data broadcast networks
US4816901A (en) 1988-04-27 1989-03-28 Universal Video Communications Corp. Method and system for compressing color video data
US5146600A (en) 1988-04-30 1992-09-08 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Document image filing system for furnishing additional managerial information for management of documents filed in the system
US4907082A (en) 1988-05-03 1990-03-06 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Dynamic control menu for a television system or the like
US4982344A (en) * 1988-05-18 1991-01-01 Xerox Corporation Accelerating link creation
JP2945692B2 (en) 1988-05-27 1999-09-06 コダック・リミテッド Data processing system for processing images that can be annotated
US4995078A (en) 1988-06-09 1991-02-19 Monslow H Vincent Television broadcast system for selective transmission of viewer-chosen programs at viewer-requested times
US5130924A (en) 1988-06-30 1992-07-14 International Business Machines Corporation System for defining relationships among document elements including logical relationships of elements in a multi-dimensional tabular specification
US4977455B1 (en) 1988-07-15 1993-04-13 System and process for vcr scheduling
US5208745A (en) * 1988-07-25 1993-05-04 Electric Power Research Institute Multimedia interface and method for computer system
JPH0695759B2 (en) 1988-08-08 1994-11-24 パイオニア株式会社 Billing display system for CCTV device
US5247575A (en) 1988-08-16 1993-09-21 Sprague Peter J Information distribution system
JP3002471B2 (en) 1988-08-19 2000-01-24 株式会社日立製作所 Program distribution device
US4965819A (en) * 1988-09-22 1990-10-23 Docu-Vision, Inc. Video conferencing system for courtroom and other applications
WO1990003706A1 (en) 1988-09-30 1990-04-05 Right Hemisphere Pty. Limited Television programme distribution system
US5221962A (en) 1988-10-03 1993-06-22 Popeil Industries, Inc. Subliminal device having manual adjustment of perception level of subliminal messages
USD325581S (en) 1988-10-07 1992-04-21 Cable Electric Products, Inc. Remote control
US4975951A (en) 1988-10-07 1990-12-04 General Instrument Corporation IPPV programming distribution control system
US5691777A (en) 1988-10-17 1997-11-25 Kassatly; Lord Samuel Anthony Method and apparatus for simultaneous compression of video, audio and data signals
US5105268A (en) 1988-11-08 1992-04-14 Fujitsu Limited Community antenna broadcast system having an improved channel selecting system permitting purchase of a selected channel from a plurality of non-purchased channels
CA2002912A1 (en) 1988-11-14 1990-05-14 William A. Clough Portable computer with touch screen and computer system employing same
US5089956A (en) 1988-11-29 1992-02-18 International Business Machines Corporation Method of distributing related documents to identified end users in an information processing system
JPH02152382A (en) 1988-12-02 1990-06-12 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Teletext receiver
US5038402A (en) 1988-12-06 1991-08-06 General Instrument Corporation Apparatus and method for providing digital audio in the FM broadcast band
US5199104A (en) 1988-12-15 1993-03-30 Sony Corporation Electronic organizer with electronic book marker
US5159669A (en) 1988-12-15 1992-10-27 Xerox Corporation Automatically creating a second workspace operation record including history data and a unit ID based on a first workspace operation
US4949187A (en) 1988-12-16 1990-08-14 Cohen Jason M Video communications system having a remotely controlled central source of video and audio data
US5001554A (en) 1988-12-23 1991-03-19 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Terminal authorization method
US5077607A (en) 1988-12-23 1991-12-31 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Cable television transaction terminal
KR920002049B1 (en) 1988-12-31 1992-03-10 삼성전자 주식회사 Multi-screen execution method
CA1319762C (en) 1989-02-28 1993-06-29 Elie Cassorla Method for displaying online information
CA2010094A1 (en) 1989-03-09 1990-09-09 Robert R. Butler Binding line book tracking system and method
US5124980A (en) 1989-03-20 1992-06-23 Maki Gerald G Synchronous multiport digital 2-way communications network using T1 PCM on a CATV cable
JPH0322259A (en) 1989-03-22 1991-01-30 Seiko Epson Corp Small-sized data display and reproducing device
US5239665A (en) 1989-03-30 1993-08-24 Hiuka Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha Electronic book having several keys for changing pages and underlining certain portions of text
US4996597A (en) 1989-04-20 1991-02-26 Rca Licensing Corporation User programmable switching arrangement
US5015829A (en) 1989-04-28 1991-05-14 Hewlett-Packard Company Key pad and front panel assembly for an electronic instrument
NL8901133A (en) 1989-05-03 1990-12-03 Nederland Ptt DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA VIA INFORMATION FREE ZONES IN A TELEVISION SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED BY A TRANSMITTER.
US4947244A (en) 1989-05-03 1990-08-07 On Command Video Corporation Video selection and distribution system
US5014125A (en) 1989-05-05 1991-05-07 Cableshare, Inc. Television system for the interactive distribution of selectable video presentations
US5150118A (en) 1989-05-08 1992-09-22 Hewlett-Packard Company Interchangeable coded key pad assemblies alternately attachable to a user definable keyboard to enable programmable keyboard functions
US5151782A (en) 1989-05-17 1992-09-29 Reiss Media Enterprises Control system for satellite delivered pay-per-view television system
US5003591A (en) 1989-05-25 1991-03-26 General Instrument Corporation Functionally modifiable cable television converter system
JPH0620187Y2 (en) 1989-05-26 1994-05-25 アルプス電気株式会社 Trackball
US5253066C1 (en) 1989-06-01 2001-05-22 United Video Properties Inc Tv recording and viewing control system
US5047867A (en) 1989-06-08 1991-09-10 North American Philips Corporation Interface for a TV-VCR system
IL94519A (en) 1989-06-13 1993-07-08 Tv Answer Int Inc Satellite television communication system for audience polling and processing answers
US5319453A (en) 1989-06-22 1994-06-07 Airtrax Method and apparatus for video signal encoding, decoding and monitoring
US5663757A (en) 1989-07-14 1997-09-02 Morales; Fernando Software controlled multi-mode interactive TV systems
JP2830111B2 (en) 1989-07-21 1998-12-02 ソニー株式会社 High efficiency coding device
USD326446S (en) 1989-07-26 1992-05-26 Wong Curtis G Combined electronic book and CD ROM reader
US5166886A (en) 1989-07-31 1992-11-24 Molnar Charles E System to demonstrate and sell computer programs
US5231631A (en) 1989-08-15 1993-07-27 At&T Bell Laboratories Arrangement for regulating traffic in a high speed data network
US5167508A (en) 1989-08-21 1992-12-01 Mc Taggart Stephen I Electronic book
US5484292A (en) 1989-08-21 1996-01-16 Mctaggart; Stephen I. Apparatus for combining audio and visual indicia
US5046093A (en) 1989-09-05 1991-09-03 General Instrument Corporation CATV subscriber apparatus with intelligent remote control
US5056138A (en) 1989-09-11 1991-10-08 Nuphase Electronics, Inc. Television selection system
JP2547641B2 (en) 1989-09-27 1996-10-23 三洋電機株式会社 Program reservation device
US5343516A (en) 1989-09-29 1994-08-30 Digital Systems Group, Inc. Computer telecommunications signalling interface
US5049862A (en) 1989-10-06 1991-09-17 Communication Intelligence Corporation ("Cic") Keyless flat panel portable computer--computer aided notebook
US5339239A (en) 1989-10-13 1994-08-16 Mitsubishi Plastics Industries Limited Information collecting and/or service furnishing systems by which a user can request information from a central data base using a portable personal terminal and an access terminal
US5073930A (en) 1989-10-19 1991-12-17 Green James A Method and system for receiving and distributing satellite transmitted television signals
US5128662A (en) 1989-10-20 1992-07-07 Failla Stephen J Collapsibly segmented display screens for computers or the like
US5099319A (en) 1989-10-23 1992-03-24 Esch Arthur G Video information delivery method and apparatus
US5155591A (en) 1989-10-23 1992-10-13 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials
DE3935294A1 (en) 1989-10-24 1991-04-25 Grundig Emv VIDEORECORDER WITH A DEVICE FOR STORING THE CONTENTS OF A TAPE MAGAZINE CONTAINING A VARIETY OF MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTES
US5241671C1 (en) 1989-10-26 2002-07-02 Encyclopaedia Britannica Educa Multimedia search system using a plurality of entry path means which indicate interrelatedness of information
JPH03141752A (en) 1989-10-27 1991-06-17 Hitachi Ltd Picture signal transmitting method
US5353121A (en) 1989-10-30 1994-10-04 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system
EP1335594A3 (en) 1989-10-30 2003-09-10 Starsight Telecast, Inc. A system for unattended recording of television programs
IT1237668B (en) 1989-10-31 1993-06-15 Telettra Lab Telefon SYSTEM AND MULTIPLATOR / DEMULTIPLATOR FOR THE TRANSMISSION / RECEPTION OF DIGITAL TELEVISION INFORMATION.
US5318450A (en) 1989-11-22 1994-06-07 Gte California Incorporated Multimedia distribution system for instructional materials
JP2822526B2 (en) 1990-01-19 1998-11-11 ソニー株式会社 Personal information processing apparatus and personal information processing method
US5218672A (en) 1990-01-19 1993-06-08 Sony Corporation Of America Offline editing system with user interface for controlling edit list generation
CA2008300A1 (en) * 1990-01-23 1991-07-23 Kim R. Woodill Portable electronic reading and reference device
US5237610A (en) 1990-02-01 1993-08-17 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Independent external security module for a digitally upgradeable television signal decoder
US5130792A (en) 1990-02-01 1992-07-14 Usa Video Inc. Store and forward video system
US5446919A (en) 1990-02-20 1995-08-29 Wilkins; Jeff K. Communication system and method with demographically or psychographically defined audiences
JP3080382B2 (en) 1990-02-21 2000-08-28 株式会社日立製作所 Cryptographic communication system
US5146552A (en) 1990-02-28 1992-09-08 International Business Machines Corporation Method for associating annotation with electronically published material
US5351075A (en) 1990-03-20 1994-09-27 Frederick Herz Home video club television broadcasting system
US5251324A (en) 1990-03-20 1993-10-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for generating and collecting viewing statistics for remote terminals in a cable television system
DE69121444T2 (en) 1990-03-29 1997-03-13 Gte Laboratories Inc Monitoring system for the transmission of video signals
US5115426A (en) 1990-03-30 1992-05-19 At&T Bell Laboratories Broadband isdn packet switching arrangements
US5091782A (en) 1990-04-09 1992-02-25 General Instrument Corporation Apparatus and method for adaptively compressing successive blocks of digital video
US5020129A (en) 1990-04-16 1991-05-28 General Instrument Corporation Addressable control system for CATV program distribution
US5256067A (en) 1990-04-25 1993-10-26 Gildea Patricia M Device and method for optimal reading vocabulary development
US5321846A (en) 1990-04-28 1994-06-14 Sony Corporation Signal transmission system with quicker response and with parallel and serial outputs
US5233333A (en) 1990-05-21 1993-08-03 Borsuk Sherwin M Portable hand held reading unit with reading aid feature
US5257185A (en) 1990-05-21 1993-10-26 Ann W. Farley Interactive, cross-referenced knowledge system
US5640552A (en) 1990-05-29 1997-06-17 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Incorporated Method and apparatus for providing multi-level searching in an electronic book
USD331760S (en) 1990-05-29 1992-12-15 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Remote control
CA2039652C (en) 1990-05-30 1996-12-24 Frank Zdybel, Jr. Hardcopy lossless data storage and communications for electronic document processing systems
IL94729A0 (en) 1990-06-13 1991-04-15 Yossef Yomdin Compressed image production,storage transmission and processing
US5057917A (en) 1990-06-20 1991-10-15 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Real-time data compression of broadcast video signals
US5260778A (en) 1990-06-26 1993-11-09 General Instrument Corporation Apparatus for selective distribution of messages over a communications network
US5859594A (en) 1990-06-28 1999-01-12 Motorola, Inc. Selective call receiver having selectable displays
US5428529A (en) 1990-06-29 1995-06-27 International Business Machines Corporation Structured document tags invoking specialized functions
US5130815A (en) 1990-07-20 1992-07-14 Mti Associates Method and apparatus for encoding a video signal having multi-language capabilities
WO1992002888A1 (en) 1990-07-27 1992-02-20 Ross Harvey M System and method of manufacturing a single book copy
CA2022302C (en) 1990-07-30 1995-02-28 Douglas J. Ballantyne Method and apparatus for distribution of movies
EP0472070A3 (en) 1990-08-22 1993-06-23 Xerox Corporation Electronic library
JPH04200082A (en) 1990-11-29 1992-07-21 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Teletext broadcast receiver
JP3089479B2 (en) 1990-09-04 2000-09-18 ソニー株式会社 Television image display
US5388196A (en) 1990-09-07 1995-02-07 Xerox Corporation Hierarchical shared books with database
CA2499757C (en) 1990-09-10 2006-05-02 Starsight Telecast, Inc. User interface for television schedule system
US5103314A (en) 1990-09-24 1992-04-07 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Color-coded system for selection of rf input terminals and associated scan lists
JP2552030B2 (en) 1990-09-27 1996-11-06 マスプロ電工株式会社 Satellite signal receiver
US5319542A (en) 1990-09-27 1994-06-07 International Business Machines Corporation System for ordering items using an electronic catalogue
US5093718A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-03-03 Inteletext Systems, Inc. Interactive home information system
US5319455A (en) 1990-09-28 1994-06-07 Ictv Inc. System for distributing customized commercials to television viewers
DK0551433T3 (en) 1990-10-01 2001-07-30 Thomas A Bush transaction Processing System
US5204947A (en) * 1990-10-31 1993-04-20 International Business Machines Corporation Application independent (open) hypermedia enablement services
JPH04180458A (en) 1990-11-15 1992-06-26 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Facsimile equipment
US5282028A (en) 1990-11-27 1994-01-25 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Remote control for digital music terminal with synchronized communications
US5327554A (en) 1990-11-29 1994-07-05 Palazzi Iii Michael A Interactive terminal for the access of remote database information
US5345580A (en) 1990-11-29 1994-09-06 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Microprocessor device and emulator device thereof
US5172413A (en) 1990-12-20 1992-12-15 Sasktel Secure hierarchial video delivery system and method
US5565999A (en) 1990-12-21 1996-10-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image data communication processing method, and apparatus therefor
USD329238S (en) 1990-12-21 1992-09-08 Tandy Corporation Universal remote controller
US5206722A (en) 1990-12-28 1993-04-27 At&T Bell Laboratories Remote channel switching for video on demand service
US5132992A (en) 1991-01-07 1992-07-21 Paul Yurt Audio and video transmission and receiving system
US5383112A (en) 1991-01-07 1995-01-17 Gte Service Corporation Inventory management method
US5253275A (en) 1991-01-07 1993-10-12 H. Lee Browne Audio and video transmission and receiving system
JPH04245818A (en) 1991-01-31 1992-09-02 Pioneer Electron Corp Information transmission system
US5367643A (en) 1991-02-06 1994-11-22 International Business Machines Corporation Generic high bandwidth adapter having data packet memory configured in three level hierarchy for temporary storage of variable length data packets
US5285272A (en) 1991-02-26 1994-02-08 Sasktel Video store and forward on demand apparatus and method
US5253341A (en) 1991-03-04 1993-10-12 Rozmanith Anthony I Remote query communication system
EP0576597A1 (en) 1991-03-19 1994-01-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Apparatus for generating and collecting viewing statistics
US5220649A (en) 1991-03-20 1993-06-15 Forcier Mitchell D Script/binary-encoded-character processing method and system with moving space insertion mode
JP3105015B2 (en) 1991-03-25 2000-10-30 パイオニア株式会社 Terminal device in CATV system
US5384588A (en) 1991-05-13 1995-01-24 Telerobotics International, Inc. System for omindirectional image viewing at a remote location without the transmission of control signals to select viewing parameters
US5185667A (en) 1991-05-13 1993-02-09 Telerobotics International, Inc. Omniview motionless camera orientation system
US5903319A (en) 1991-05-13 1999-05-11 Interactive Pictures Corporation Method for eliminating temporal and spacial distortion from interlaced video signals
US5764276A (en) 1991-05-13 1998-06-09 Interactive Pictures Corporation Method and apparatus for providing perceived video viewing experiences using still images
JP2938611B2 (en) 1991-05-14 1999-08-23 富士通株式会社 TV signal exchange system
US5479508A (en) 1991-05-22 1995-12-26 Zenith Electronics Corp. Method of operating a pay per view television system
US5216515A (en) 1991-05-23 1993-06-01 Adexpress Company Addressable video feed system
JP2622049B2 (en) 1991-05-24 1997-06-18 松下電器産業株式会社 Cable broadcasting system
FR2677166B1 (en) 1991-05-30 1993-08-06 Alsthom Gec METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A CONTACT TULIP AND CONTACT TULIP CARRIED OUT ACCORDING TO THE METHOD.
JP3129762B2 (en) 1991-06-06 2001-01-31 シャープ株式会社 Small information terminal
US5237614A (en) 1991-06-07 1993-08-17 Security Dynamics Technologies, Inc. Integrated network security system
CA2044574A1 (en) 1991-06-13 1992-12-14 Frederick James Anderson Information distribution through a communication subscription system utilizing an interactive storage and retrieval device
JP3308562B2 (en) 1991-07-15 2002-07-29 株式会社日立製作所 Video conference terminal
CA2048039A1 (en) 1991-07-19 1993-01-20 Steven Derose Data processing system and method for generating a representation for and random access rendering of electronic documents
US5293540A (en) 1991-07-29 1994-03-08 Nview Corporation Method and apparatus for merging independently generated internal video with external video
US5367330A (en) 1991-08-01 1994-11-22 Luther Haave Pay-per-view television delivery system
US5237311A (en) 1991-08-01 1993-08-17 Picker International, Inc. Hingedly supported integrated trackball and selection device
US5210611A (en) 1991-08-12 1993-05-11 Keen Y. Yee Automatic tuning radio/TV using filtered seek
US5367621A (en) 1991-09-06 1994-11-22 International Business Machines Corporation Data processing method to provide a generalized link from a reference point in an on-line book to an arbitrary multimedia object which can be dynamically updated
US5289271A (en) 1991-09-09 1994-02-22 Watson John C Cable television-usage system
JPH0575944A (en) 1991-09-10 1993-03-26 Sony Corp Television receiver
US5247347A (en) 1991-09-27 1993-09-21 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Pstn architecture for video-on-demand services
US5528281A (en) 1991-09-27 1996-06-18 Bell Atlantic Network Services Method and system for accessing multimedia data over public switched telephone network
US5396546A (en) 1991-10-03 1995-03-07 Viscorp Apparatus and method for automatic and user configurable information appliance
US5404393A (en) 1991-10-03 1995-04-04 Viscorp Method and apparatus for interactive television through use of menu windows
US5173051B1 (en) 1991-10-15 1997-06-10 Optical Data Corp Curriculum planning and publishing method
US5524193A (en) 1991-10-15 1996-06-04 And Communications Interactive multimedia annotation method and apparatus
US5416508A (en) 1991-10-22 1995-05-16 Pioneer Electronic Corporation CATV system with transmission of program schedules, linked program broadcasts, and permissive ordering periods
US5235419A (en) 1991-10-24 1993-08-10 General Instrument Corporation Adaptive motion compensation using a plurality of motion compensators
US5350303A (en) 1991-10-24 1994-09-27 At&T Bell Laboratories Method for accessing information in a computer
US5182639A (en) 1991-10-30 1993-01-26 Suganda Jutamulia Real-time analytic pseudocolor encoder system
US5404505A (en) 1991-11-01 1995-04-04 Finisar Corporation System for scheduling transmission of indexed and requested database tiers on demand at varying repetition rates
US5315711A (en) * 1991-11-01 1994-05-24 Unisys Corporation Method and apparatus for remotely and centrally controlling a plurality of host processors
WO1993009490A1 (en) 1991-11-04 1993-05-13 Vpr Systems Ltd. Lap-top computer for retrieving and displaying text and graphic information encoded on personal library cd-rom
US5734823A (en) 1991-11-04 1998-03-31 Microtome, Inc. Systems and apparatus for electronic communication and storage of information
US5632022A (en) 1991-11-13 1997-05-20 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Encyclopedia of software components
GB9124337D0 (en) 1991-11-15 1992-01-08 Philips Electronic Associated Method of storing user information items and apparatus for reproducing stored items
JPH05143476A (en) 1991-11-20 1993-06-11 Fujitsu Ltd Diagnostic system for instruction queue
US5343239A (en) 1991-11-20 1994-08-30 Zing Systems, L.P. Transaction based interactive television system
JP3120085B2 (en) 1991-11-21 2000-12-25 株式会社セガ Electronic devices and information carriers
US5724091A (en) 1991-11-25 1998-03-03 Actv, Inc. Compressed digital data interactive program system
US5477262A (en) 1991-11-29 1995-12-19 Scientific-Altanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing an on-screen user interface for a subscription television terminal
US5497187A (en) 1991-11-29 1996-03-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. In-band/out-of-band data transmission method and apparatus for a television system
JP2793399B2 (en) 1991-12-09 1998-09-03 日本電気株式会社 Buffer device
US5319649A (en) 1991-12-27 1994-06-07 Comstream Corporation Transmission systems and decoders therefor
US5195181A (en) 1992-01-10 1993-03-16 Digital Equipment Corporation Message processing system having separate message receiving and transmitting processors with message processing being distributed between the separate processors
US5689648A (en) 1992-01-31 1997-11-18 Raychem Corporation Method and apparatus for publication of information
JP3328951B2 (en) 1992-02-07 2002-09-30 ソニー株式会社 TV receiver and tuning method
US5390348A (en) 1992-02-12 1995-02-14 Creative Digital Inc. System for tracking and correcting drift and dispersion in satellite transmission signals
JP3299771B2 (en) 1992-02-18 2002-07-08 パイオニア株式会社 Teletext receiver
US5495581A (en) 1992-02-25 1996-02-27 Tsai; Irving Method and apparatus for linking a document with associated reference information using pattern matching
US5341166A (en) 1992-02-27 1994-08-23 Video Control Technology, Inc. System for controlling selected devices having unique sets of control codes
US5418957A (en) 1992-03-09 1995-05-23 Narayan; Rom Network data dictionary
US5432561A (en) 1992-03-27 1995-07-11 North American Philips Corporation System for automatically activating picture-in-picture when an auxiliary signal is detected
US5444853A (en) 1992-03-31 1995-08-22 Seiko Epson Corporation System and method for transferring data between a plurality of virtual FIFO's and a peripheral via a hardware FIFO and selectively updating control information associated with the virtual FIFO's
US5528490A (en) 1992-04-10 1996-06-18 Charles E. Hill & Associates, Inc. Electronic catalog system and method
DE4212184A1 (en) 1992-04-10 1993-10-14 Bosch Gmbh Robert Hydraulic control unit for double acting working cylinder esp. in vehicle steering unit - controls both working volumes by one 4/3-way valve with hydraulic shut off valve connected between each working vol. and 4/3-way valve
JP2659896B2 (en) 1992-04-29 1997-09-30 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレイション Structured document copy management method and structured document copy management device
US5262875A (en) 1992-04-30 1993-11-16 Instant Video Technologies, Inc. Audio/video file server including decompression/playback means
CA2257659C (en) 1992-05-08 2003-01-14 Market Data Corporation Restricted information distribution system apparatus and methods
US5371532A (en) 1992-05-15 1994-12-06 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Communications architecture and method for distributing information services
US5341474A (en) 1992-05-15 1994-08-23 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Communications architecture and buffer for distributing information services
EP0570785B1 (en) 1992-05-19 1997-10-01 THOMSON multimedia Method and apparatus for device control by data transmission in TV lines
US5223924A (en) 1992-05-27 1993-06-29 North American Philips Corporation System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with a T.V. program information database
US5469206A (en) 1992-05-27 1995-11-21 Philips Electronics North America Corporation System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with electronic shopping information
US5291554A (en) 1992-05-28 1994-03-01 Tv Answer, Inc. Shared-price custom video rentals via interactive TV
US5375068A (en) 1992-06-03 1994-12-20 Digital Equipment Corporation Video teleconferencing for networked workstations
US5689663A (en) 1992-06-19 1997-11-18 Microsoft Corporation Remote controller user interface and methods relating thereto
US5835732A (en) 1993-10-28 1998-11-10 Elonex Ip Holdings, Ltd. Miniature digital assistant having enhanced host communication
JPH0619978A (en) 1992-06-30 1994-01-28 Sony Corp Reproducing and display device
WO1994001964A1 (en) 1992-07-08 1994-01-20 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Media server for supplying video and multi-media data over the public telephone switched network
US5222136A (en) 1992-07-23 1993-06-22 Crest Industries, Inc. Encrypted communication system
JPH0646419A (en) 1992-07-27 1994-02-18 Lsi Japan Kk Tv charging system
DE69331869T2 (en) 1992-08-06 2002-08-29 Fujitsu Ltd Transaction processing system using a radio transmitting teletext system
US5412416A (en) 1992-08-07 1995-05-02 Nbl Communications, Inc. Video media distribution network apparatus and method
US5502576A (en) 1992-08-24 1996-03-26 Ramsay International Corporation Method and apparatus for the transmission, storage, and retrieval of documents in an electronic domain
US5432542A (en) 1992-08-31 1995-07-11 Television Computer, Inc. Television receiver location identification
JP3579061B2 (en) 1992-08-31 2004-10-20 株式会社東芝 Display device
DE69333681T2 (en) 1992-09-11 2005-03-24 Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc., San Jose Techniques for generating personal computer displays and printed transcripts from voice mail messages
USD362429S (en) 1992-09-18 1995-09-19 Booklink Corporation Electronic book library for storing digitized computer readable material
WO1994007327A1 (en) 1992-09-21 1994-03-31 Rolm Company Method and apparatus for on-screen camera control in video-conference equipment
US5586235A (en) 1992-09-25 1996-12-17 Kauffman; Ivan J. Interactive multimedia system and method
US5739814A (en) * 1992-09-28 1998-04-14 Sega Enterprises Information storage system and book device for providing information in response to the user specification
US5799071A (en) 1992-10-05 1998-08-25 Azar; Sanjar Telecommunications cost-minimizing system
US5644354A (en) 1992-10-09 1997-07-01 Prevue Interactive, Inc. Interactive video system
US5420974A (en) * 1992-10-15 1995-05-30 International Business Machines Corporation Multimedia complex form creation, display and editing method apparatus
US5418559A (en) 1992-10-23 1995-05-23 At&T Corp. Multi-channel television converter for conventional and interactive signals
US5446490A (en) 1992-10-23 1995-08-29 At&T Corp. Interactive television with tailored programming
US5742329A (en) 1992-10-26 1998-04-21 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image pickup system and communication system for use in video conference system or the like
US5388101A (en) 1992-10-26 1995-02-07 Eon Corporation Interactive nationwide data service communication system for stationary and mobile battery operated subscriber units
US5400401A (en) 1992-10-30 1995-03-21 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. System and method for transmitting a plurality of digital services
US5319707A (en) 1992-11-02 1994-06-07 Scientific Atlanta System and method for multiplexing a plurality of digital program services for transmission to remote locations
USD346620S (en) 1992-11-04 1994-05-03 Mcsorley Jeffrey E Electronic book for displaying sheet music
US5357276A (en) 1992-12-01 1994-10-18 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method of providing video on demand with VCR like functions
US5657414A (en) 1992-12-01 1997-08-12 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Auxiliary device control for a subscriber terminal
US5367571A (en) 1992-12-02 1994-11-22 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Subscriber terminal with plug in expansion card
EP0820008A3 (en) 1992-12-01 2006-05-24 Microsoft Corporation A method and system for in-place interaction with embedded objects
US5440632A (en) 1992-12-02 1995-08-08 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Reprogrammable subscriber terminal
US5715515A (en) 1992-12-02 1998-02-03 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for downloading on-screen graphics and captions to a television terminal
US5341425A (en) 1992-12-02 1994-08-23 Scientific Atlanta, Inc. Methods and apparatus for uniquely encrypting data at a plurality of data transmission sites for transmission to a reception site
US5410326A (en) 1992-12-04 1995-04-25 Goldstein; Steven W. Programmable remote control device for interacting with a plurality of remotely controlled devices
US7401286B1 (en) 1993-12-02 2008-07-15 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book electronic links
ATE219615T1 (en) 1992-12-09 2002-07-15 Discovery Communicat Inc NETWORK CONTROL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
US5600573A (en) 1992-12-09 1997-02-04 Discovery Communications, Inc. Operations center with video storage for a television program packaging and delivery system
US5798785A (en) 1992-12-09 1998-08-25 Discovery Communications, Inc. Terminal for suggesting programs offered on a television program delivery system
US5986690A (en) 1992-12-09 1999-11-16 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book selection and delivery system
US7835989B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2010-11-16 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book alternative delivery systems
US5465401A (en) 1992-12-15 1995-11-07 Texas Instruments Incorporated Communication system and methods for enhanced information transfer
US5341426A (en) 1992-12-15 1994-08-23 Motorola, Inc. Cryptographic key management apparatus and method
US5392387A (en) 1992-12-17 1995-02-21 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for enhanced data access efficiency in an electronic book
JP3360856B2 (en) 1992-12-18 2003-01-07 富士通株式会社 Processor
TW234223B (en) 1993-01-05 1994-11-11 Yuen Henry C
US5544320A (en) 1993-01-08 1996-08-06 Konrad; Allan M. Remote information service access system based on a client-server-service model
US5349638A (en) 1993-01-25 1994-09-20 Micro-Technology Inc.-Wisconsin Universal calling/originating number identification
US5890122A (en) 1993-02-08 1999-03-30 Microsoft Corporation Voice-controlled computer simulateously displaying application menu and list of available commands
US5491821A (en) 1993-02-24 1996-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for incremental processing of computer objects
US5598351A (en) 1993-02-26 1997-01-28 John C. Chater Communication system
JPH06250895A (en) 1993-02-26 1994-09-09 Fujitsu Ltd Structured data base system
JPH06337896A (en) 1993-03-31 1994-12-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Device and method for retrieving electronic book display
US5426594A (en) 1993-04-02 1995-06-20 Motorola, Inc. Electronic greeting card store and communication system
JPH06303607A (en) 1993-04-15 1994-10-28 Canon Inc Video conference system and its control method
CA2121151A1 (en) 1993-04-16 1994-10-17 Trevor Lambert Method and apparatus for automatic insertion of a television signal from a remote source
JPH06311119A (en) 1993-04-20 1994-11-04 Sony Corp Data broadcasting system
US5408258A (en) 1993-04-21 1995-04-18 The Arbitron Company Method of automatically qualifying a signal reproduction device for installation of monitoring equipment
USD349923S (en) 1993-04-26 1994-08-23 Western Publishing Company, Inc. Electronic book
TW318315B (en) 1993-05-03 1997-10-21 At & T Corp
US5565908A (en) 1993-05-07 1996-10-15 Kayon Systems, Inc. Bi-directional system for providing information, management, and entertainment services
JP3343990B2 (en) 1993-05-19 2002-11-11 ソニー株式会社 Magnetic disk drive
US5375160A (en) 1993-05-28 1994-12-20 Ledler Corporation Interface apparatus for effecting captioning and communications between a telephone line and a television
US5365434A (en) 1993-06-04 1994-11-15 Carolyn E. Carlson Book enhancer
WO1994030008A1 (en) 1993-06-07 1994-12-22 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Display system for a subscriber terminal
US5579055A (en) 1993-06-07 1996-11-26 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Electronic program guide and text channel data controller
US5485221A (en) 1993-06-07 1996-01-16 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Subscription television system and terminal for enabling simultaneous display of multiple services
TW235358B (en) 1993-06-11 1994-12-01 Philips Electronics Nv CD-I pointer device with 8 directions, 1 pixel/update
US5408465A (en) 1993-06-21 1995-04-18 Hewlett-Packard Company Flexible scheme for admission control of multimedia streams on integrated networks
US5621456A (en) 1993-06-22 1997-04-15 Apple Computer, Inc. Methods and apparatus for audio-visual interface for the display of multiple program categories
US5544342A (en) 1993-06-30 1996-08-06 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for prefetching information in a processing system
EP0632397A3 (en) 1993-07-02 1995-08-16 Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Book data service system with data delivery by broadcasting.
US5442390A (en) 1993-07-07 1995-08-15 Digital Equipment Corporation Video on demand with memory accessing and or like functions
US5329590A (en) 1993-07-08 1994-07-12 Uniden America Corporation Automatic pay-per-view reception in a satellite receiver
US5621658A (en) 1993-07-13 1997-04-15 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for communicating an electronic action from a data processing system to another data processing system via an audio device
US5355162A (en) 1993-07-13 1994-10-11 Pacific Ray Video Limited Multi-standard cable television system
US6173335B1 (en) 1993-07-30 2001-01-09 Apple Computer, Inc. Structure and protocol for routing information in a system
US5481296A (en) 1993-08-06 1996-01-02 International Business Machines Corporation Apparatus and method for selectively viewing video information
US5437552A (en) 1993-08-13 1995-08-01 Western Publishing Co., Inc. Interactive audio-visual work
IL106746A (en) 1993-08-19 1997-02-18 News Datacom Ltd CATV systems
US5666493A (en) 1993-08-24 1997-09-09 Lykes Bros., Inc. System for managing customer orders and method of implementation
US5442626A (en) 1993-08-24 1995-08-15 At&T Corp. Digital communications system with symbol multiplexers
US5581560A (en) 1993-08-27 1996-12-03 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Communication apparatus and method for simultaneous communication of audio and data signals with improved audio control
US5377258A (en) 1993-08-30 1994-12-27 National Medical Research Council Method and apparatus for an automated and interactive behavioral guidance system
JPH0764893A (en) 1993-08-31 1995-03-10 Canon Inc Network system
FI97517C (en) 1993-09-06 1996-12-27 Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd Packet data transmission in a digital cellular network
US5589892A (en) 1993-09-09 1996-12-31 Knee; Robert A. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US5499330A (en) 1993-09-17 1996-03-12 Digital Equipment Corp. Document display system for organizing and displaying documents as screen objects organized along strand paths
WO1995008894A1 (en) 1993-09-20 1995-03-30 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for trunked telephone access to a cable network
JP2781345B2 (en) 1993-09-20 1998-07-30 松下電器産業株式会社 Information playback device
US5410344A (en) 1993-09-22 1995-04-25 Arrowsmith Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method of selecting video programs based on viewers' preferences
US5491785A (en) 1993-09-30 1996-02-13 Hewlett-Packard Company Information retrieval device for displaying and directly refreshing the display of a dynamically modifiable document
US5689641A (en) 1993-10-01 1997-11-18 Vicor, Inc. Multimedia collaboration system arrangement for routing compressed AV signal through a participant site without decompressing the AV signal
JPH07175868A (en) 1993-10-15 1995-07-14 Internatl Business Mach Corp <Ibm> Method and system for output of digital information to medium
WO1995011566A1 (en) 1993-10-20 1995-04-27 Videoconferencing Systems, Inc. Adaptive videoconferencing system
US5572625A (en) 1993-10-22 1996-11-05 Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. Method for generating audio renderings of digitized works having highly technical content
US5631693A (en) 1993-10-25 1997-05-20 Antec Corporation Method and apparatus for providing on demand services in a subscriber system
US5481294A (en) 1993-10-27 1996-01-02 A. C. Nielsen Company Audience measurement system utilizing ancillary codes and passive signatures
JPH07177277A (en) 1993-11-02 1995-07-14 Ricoh Co Ltd Image document circulation device
US5524201A (en) 1993-11-03 1996-06-04 Apple Computer, Inc. Method of preparing an electronic book for a computer system
US6243071B1 (en) 1993-11-03 2001-06-05 Apple Computer, Inc. Tool set for navigating through an electronic book
US5771354A (en) 1993-11-04 1998-06-23 Crawford; Christopher M. Internet online backup system provides remote storage for customers using IDs and passwords which were interactively established when signing up for backup services
US5481542A (en) 1993-11-10 1996-01-02 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Interactive information services control system
US5903867A (en) 1993-11-30 1999-05-11 Sony Corporation Information access system and recording system
US5473362A (en) 1993-11-30 1995-12-05 Microsoft Corporation Video on demand system comprising stripped data across plural storable devices with time multiplex scheduling
US9053640B1 (en) 1993-12-02 2015-06-09 Adrea, LLC Interactive electronic book
US5519780A (en) 1993-12-03 1996-05-21 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. System and method for providing compressed digital teletext services and teletext support services
JP3237362B2 (en) 1993-12-27 2001-12-10 松下電器産業株式会社 Program guide display device
US5594493A (en) 1994-01-19 1997-01-14 Nemirofsky; Frank R. Television signal activated interactive smart card system
US5509074A (en) 1994-01-27 1996-04-16 At&T Corp. Method of protecting electronically published materials using cryptographic protocols
US5531227A (en) 1994-01-28 1996-07-02 Schneider Medical Technologies, Inc. Imaging device and method
US5534888A (en) 1994-02-03 1996-07-09 Motorola Electronic book
US5466158A (en) 1994-02-14 1995-11-14 Smith, Iii; Jay Interactive book device
JPH07231309A (en) 1994-02-17 1995-08-29 Hitachi Ltd Information distribution system
US6298441B1 (en) 1994-03-10 2001-10-02 News Datacom Ltd. Secure document access system
TW236744B (en) 1994-03-23 1994-12-21 Thomson Consumer Electronics
US5598523A (en) 1994-03-31 1997-01-28 Panasonic Technologies, Inc. Method and system for displayed menu activation using a matching distinctive arrangement of keypad actuators
US5500794A (en) 1994-03-31 1996-03-19 Panasonic Technologies, Inc. Distribution system and method for menu-driven user interface
US5572652A (en) 1994-04-04 1996-11-05 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy System and method for monitoring and controlling one or more computer sites
US5602596A (en) 1994-04-08 1997-02-11 U S West Technologies, Inc. Method for navigating a complex multimedia structure at an interactive user station
US5537141A (en) 1994-04-15 1996-07-16 Actv, Inc. Distance learning system providing individual television participation, audio responses and memory for every student
US5768521A (en) 1994-05-16 1998-06-16 Intel Corporation General purpose metering mechanism for distribution of electronic information
US5630125A (en) 1994-05-23 1997-05-13 Zellweger; Paul Method and apparatus for information management using an open hierarchical data structure
US5521631A (en) 1994-05-25 1996-05-28 Spectravision, Inc. Interactive digital video services system with store and forward capabilities
US5477263A (en) 1994-05-26 1995-12-19 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Method and apparatus for video on demand with fast forward, reverse and channel pause
WO1995034170A1 (en) 1994-06-08 1995-12-14 Futurevision Of America Corp. Interactive broadband multimedia system
US5425102A (en) 1994-06-09 1995-06-13 Datasonix Corporation Computer security apparatus with password hints
US5475682A (en) 1994-06-10 1995-12-12 At&T Corp. Method of regulating backpressure traffic in a packet switched network
US5526469A (en) 1994-06-14 1996-06-11 Xerox Corporation System for printing image data in a versatile print server
JPH088853A (en) 1994-06-24 1996-01-12 Sony Corp Scrambling device and descrambling device
US5453796A (en) 1994-06-28 1995-09-26 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Signal swap apparatus for a television receiver having an HDTV main picture signal processor and an NTSC Pix-in-Pix signal processor
US5787171A (en) 1994-06-28 1998-07-28 Sony Corporation Data transmitter and receiver
US5624265A (en) 1994-07-01 1997-04-29 Tv Interactive Data Corporation Printed publication remote contol for accessing interactive media
US7181692B2 (en) 1994-07-22 2007-02-20 Siegel Steven H Method for the auditory navigation of text
US5538430A (en) 1994-07-26 1996-07-23 Smith; B. Gary Self-reading child's book
US5555441A (en) 1994-08-02 1996-09-10 Interim Design Inc. Interactive audiovisual distribution system
US5640193A (en) 1994-08-15 1997-06-17 Lucent Technologies Inc. Multimedia service access by reading marks on an object
US5515098A (en) 1994-09-08 1996-05-07 Carles; John B. System and method for selectively distributing commercial messages over a communications network
US5586264A (en) 1994-09-08 1996-12-17 Ibm Corporation Video optimized media streamer with cache management
EP0701220B1 (en) 1994-09-12 2001-07-04 Adobe Systems Inc. Method and apparatus for viewing electronic documents
US5697084A (en) 1994-09-16 1997-12-09 Bose Corporation Reducing multipath fading using adaptive filtering
US5604824A (en) 1994-09-22 1997-02-18 Houston Advanced Research Center Method and apparatus for compression and decompression of documents and the like using splines and spline-wavelets
US5715314A (en) 1994-10-24 1998-02-03 Open Market, Inc. Network sales system
US5608449A (en) 1994-10-31 1997-03-04 Rtc Industries, Inc. Wireless interactive consumer video system
WO1996015517A2 (en) 1994-11-02 1996-05-23 Visible Interactive Corporation Interactive personal interpretive device and system for retrieving information about a plurality of objects
US5724521A (en) 1994-11-03 1998-03-03 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for providing electronic advertisements to end users in a consumer best-fit pricing manner
US5600368A (en) 1994-11-09 1997-02-04 Microsoft Corporation Interactive television system and method for viewer control of multiple camera viewpoints in broadcast programming
US5727065A (en) 1994-11-14 1998-03-10 Hughes Electronics Deferred billing, broadcast, electronic document distribution system and method
US5638443A (en) 1994-11-23 1997-06-10 Xerox Corporation System for controlling the distribution and use of composite digital works
US7613659B1 (en) 1994-11-28 2009-11-03 Yt Acquisition Corporation System and method for processing tokenless biometric electronic transmissions using an electronic rule module clearinghouse
US6460036B1 (en) 1994-11-29 2002-10-01 Pinpoint Incorporated System and method for providing customized electronic newspapers and target advertisements
US5758257A (en) 1994-11-29 1998-05-26 Herz; Frederick System and method for scheduling broadcast of and access to video programs and other data using customer profiles
US5774170A (en) 1994-12-13 1998-06-30 Hite; Kenneth C. System and method for delivering targeted advertisements to consumers
US5799157A (en) 1994-12-13 1998-08-25 Elcom Systems, Inc. System and method for creating interactive electronic systems to present information and execute transactions
US5512934A (en) 1994-12-29 1996-04-30 At&T Corp. System and method for transmission of programming on demand
US5754172A (en) 1995-01-09 1998-05-19 Sony Corporation Information display method
JP2827946B2 (en) 1995-02-09 1998-11-25 日本電気株式会社 Video search system
US5892900A (en) 1996-08-30 1999-04-06 Intertrust Technologies Corp. Systems and methods for secure transaction management and electronic rights protection
US5530235A (en) 1995-02-16 1996-06-25 Xerox Corporation Interactive contents revealing storage device
US5696906A (en) 1995-03-09 1997-12-09 Continental Cablevision, Inc. Telecommunicaion user account management system and method
US5635918A (en) 1995-03-16 1997-06-03 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling message delivery to wireless receiver devices
US5630103A (en) 1995-03-20 1997-05-13 Smith; Patrick C. Radio transmission system for distribution of newspaper copy in computer format to personal computers for viewing
US5937162A (en) 1995-04-06 1999-08-10 Exactis.Com, Inc. Method and apparatus for high volume e-mail delivery
US5906397A (en) 1995-04-07 1999-05-25 Steve C. MacWilliams File folder and method
US6230202B1 (en) * 1995-05-01 2001-05-08 Donald A Lewine Method for performing transactions on the world-wide web computer network
US5721832A (en) 1995-05-12 1998-02-24 Regal Greetings & Gifts Inc. Method and apparatus for an interactive computerized catalog system
US5721956A (en) 1995-05-15 1998-02-24 Lucent Technologies Inc. Method and apparatus for selective buffering of pages to provide continuous media data to multiple users
US5721908A (en) * 1995-06-07 1998-02-24 International Business Machines Corporation Computer network for WWW server data access over internet
US5740549A (en) 1995-06-12 1998-04-14 Pointcast, Inc. Information and advertising distribution system and method
DE29510170U1 (en) 1995-06-22 1995-11-30 Siemens Ag Pen-oriented small calculator in the form of a notepad
US5778374A (en) 1995-08-03 1998-07-07 International Business Machines Corporation Compressed common file directory for mass storage systems
US5815662A (en) 1995-08-15 1998-09-29 Ong; Lance Predictive memory caching for media-on-demand systems
US5710887A (en) 1995-08-29 1998-01-20 Broadvision Computer system and method for electronic commerce
US6486895B1 (en) 1995-09-08 2002-11-26 Xerox Corporation Display system for displaying lists of linked documents
JP3441306B2 (en) 1995-09-12 2003-09-02 株式会社東芝 Client device, message transmission method, server device, page processing method, and relay server device
US5844600A (en) 1995-09-15 1998-12-01 General Datacomm, Inc. Methods, apparatus, and systems for transporting multimedia conference data streams through a transport network
US5682206A (en) 1995-09-25 1997-10-28 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Consumer interface for programming device
CA2233023A1 (en) 1995-09-25 1997-04-03 Edward A. Taft Optimum access to electronic documents
DE69529071T2 (en) 1995-09-29 2003-08-21 Hewlett Packard Co Flying over electronically stored information
US5796954A (en) 1995-10-13 1998-08-18 Apple Computer, Inc. Method and system for maximizing the use of threads in a file server for processing network requests
US5788504A (en) 1995-10-16 1998-08-04 Brookhaven Science Associates Llc Computerized training management system
US6061504A (en) 1995-10-27 2000-05-09 Emc Corporation Video file server using an integrated cached disk array and stream server computers
US5737747A (en) 1995-10-27 1998-04-07 Emc Corporation Prefetching to service multiple video streams from an integrated cached disk array
US5870717A (en) 1995-11-13 1999-02-09 International Business Machines Corporation System for ordering items over computer network using an electronic catalog
ES2312915T3 (en) 1995-11-13 2009-03-01 Gemstar Development Corporation METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE VISUAL PRESENTATION OF TEXT DATA TO GRAPHICS ON THE TELEVISION RECEIVERS SCREEN.
US5742680A (en) 1995-11-13 1998-04-21 E Star, Inc. Set top box for receiving and decryption and descrambling a plurality of satellite television signals
US5793414A (en) 1995-11-15 1998-08-11 Eastman Kodak Company Interactive video communication system
US5802526A (en) 1995-11-15 1998-09-01 Microsoft Corporation System and method for graphically displaying and navigating through an interactive voice response menu
US5726909A (en) 1995-12-08 1998-03-10 Krikorian; Thomas M. Continuous play background music system
US5697793A (en) 1995-12-14 1997-12-16 Motorola, Inc. Electronic book and method of displaying at least one reading metric therefor
US5663748A (en) 1995-12-14 1997-09-02 Motorola, Inc. Electronic book having highlighting feature
US5893132A (en) 1995-12-14 1999-04-06 Motorola, Inc. Method and system for encoding a book for reading using an electronic book
US5761681A (en) 1995-12-14 1998-06-02 Motorola, Inc. Method of substituting names in an electronic book
US6675384B1 (en) 1995-12-21 2004-01-06 Robert S. Block Method and apparatus for information labeling and control
US5918213A (en) 1995-12-22 1999-06-29 Mci Communications Corporation System and method for automated remote previewing and purchasing of music, video, software, and other multimedia products
US5737725A (en) 1996-01-09 1998-04-07 U S West Marketing Resources Group, Inc. Method and system for automatically generating new voice files corresponding to new text from a script
WO1997025798A1 (en) 1996-01-11 1997-07-17 Mrj, Inc. System for controlling access and distribution of digital property
US5790935A (en) 1996-01-30 1998-08-04 Hughes Aircraft Company Virtual on-demand digital information delivery system and method
US5631694A (en) 1996-02-01 1997-05-20 Ibm Corporation Maximum factor selection policy for batching VOD requests
US5930768A (en) 1996-02-06 1999-07-27 Supersonic Boom, Inc. Method and system for remote user controlled manufacturing
US5761606A (en) 1996-02-08 1998-06-02 Wolzien; Thomas R. Media online services access via address embedded in video or audio program
US6115482A (en) 1996-02-13 2000-09-05 Ascent Technology, Inc. Voice-output reading system with gesture-based navigation
US5862325A (en) 1996-02-29 1999-01-19 Intermind Corporation Computer-based communication system and method using metadata defining a control structure
US5978841A (en) 1996-03-08 1999-11-02 Berger; Louis Look ahead caching process for improved information retrieval response time by caching bodies of information before they are requested by the user
JP3862315B2 (en) 1996-03-13 2006-12-27 キヤノン株式会社 Image display apparatus and control method thereof
US5893109A (en) 1996-03-15 1999-04-06 Inso Providence Corporation Generation of chunks of a long document for an electronic book system
DE19611142A1 (en) 1996-03-21 1997-09-25 Bayer Ag Process for the preparation of hydroxymethylcyclopropane
US6025837A (en) 1996-03-29 2000-02-15 Micrsoft Corporation Electronic program guide with hyperlinks to target resources
US5862329A (en) 1996-04-18 1999-01-19 International Business Machines Corporation Method system and article of manufacture for multi-casting audio visual material
US5890177A (en) 1996-04-24 1999-03-30 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for consolidating edits made by multiple editors working on multiple document copies
US6016484A (en) 1996-04-26 2000-01-18 Verifone, Inc. System, method and article of manufacture for network electronic payment instrument and certification of payment and credit collection utilizing a payment
WO1997041688A1 (en) 1996-04-29 1997-11-06 Agostino Richard J D Video directory entertainment and marketing method and apparatus
US6469753B1 (en) 1996-05-03 2002-10-22 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Information system
DE69719858T2 (en) 1996-05-13 2003-12-24 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Document display system and electronic dictionary
US5761468A (en) 1996-05-15 1998-06-02 Sun Microsystems Inc Hardware mechanism for optimizing instruction and data prefetching by forming augmented prefetch instructions
US5815671A (en) 1996-06-11 1998-09-29 Command Audio Corporation Method and apparatus for encoding and storing audio/video information for subsequent predetermined retrieval
US5956483A (en) * 1996-06-28 1999-09-21 Microsoft Corporation System and method for making function calls from a web browser to a local application
US5884288A (en) 1996-07-01 1999-03-16 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Method and system for electronic bill payment
US5850520A (en) 1996-07-01 1998-12-15 Electronic Data Systems Corporation Method and system for electronic publication distribution including return receipt
US5760771A (en) * 1996-07-17 1998-06-02 At & T Corp System and method for providing structured tours of hypertext files
US6279017B1 (en) 1996-08-07 2001-08-21 Randall C. Walker Method and apparatus for displaying text based upon attributes found within the text
US5956034A (en) 1996-08-13 1999-09-21 Softbook Press, Inc. Method and apparatus for viewing electronic reading materials
US5850629A (en) 1996-09-09 1998-12-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. User interface controller for text-to-speech synthesizer
US5926624A (en) 1996-09-12 1999-07-20 Audible, Inc. Digital information library and delivery system with logic for generating files targeted to the playback device
IL128979A (en) 1996-09-25 2004-06-20 Sylvan Learning Systems Inc Automated testing and electronic instructional delivery and student management system
US5881269A (en) 1996-09-30 1999-03-09 International Business Machines Corporation Simulation of multiple local area network clients on a single workstation
US6012890A (en) 1996-10-04 2000-01-11 Instabook Corporation Electronic bookstore vending machine
US5923656A (en) 1996-10-22 1999-07-13 Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Scalable broad band input-queued ATM switch including weight driven cell scheduler
US6052717A (en) 1996-10-23 2000-04-18 Family Systems, Ltd. Interactive web book system
US6039575A (en) 1996-10-24 2000-03-21 National Education Corporation Interactive learning system with pretest
US6313828B1 (en) 1996-11-12 2001-11-06 Carlos Landetta Chombo Electronic book
US5870767A (en) * 1996-11-22 1999-02-09 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for rendering hyper-link information in a printable medium from a graphical user interface
US5903652A (en) 1996-11-25 1999-05-11 Microsoft Corporation System and apparatus for monitoring secure information in a computer network
GB9626752D0 (en) 1996-12-23 1997-02-12 Northern Telecom Ltd Management of data structures
JP2751923B1 (en) 1997-02-05 1998-05-18 日本電気株式会社 Multipoint video conference system and multipoint video conference device
US6452933B1 (en) 1997-02-07 2002-09-17 Lucent Technologies Inc. Fair queuing system with adaptive bandwidth redistribution
US5850218A (en) 1997-02-19 1998-12-15 Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P. Inter-active program guide with default selection control
US6091930A (en) 1997-03-04 2000-07-18 Case Western Reserve University Customizable interactive textbook
US5787254A (en) * 1997-03-14 1998-07-28 International Business Machines Corporation Web browser method and system for display and management of server latency
US20040219494A1 (en) 1997-03-21 2004-11-04 Boon John F. Authoring tool and method of use
US5844890A (en) 1997-03-25 1998-12-01 International Business Machines Corporation Communications cell scheduler and scheduling method for providing proportional use of network bandwith
US5959945A (en) 1997-04-04 1999-09-28 Advanced Technology Research Sa Cv System for selectively distributing music to a plurality of jukeboxes
US6452614B1 (en) 1997-04-14 2002-09-17 Siements Information And Communication Networks, Inc. Organizing a user interface using different personae
US6034680A (en) * 1997-04-25 2000-03-07 Foundation For Concepts In Education, Inc. Supplying supplementary information for printed books
US5892915A (en) 1997-04-25 1999-04-06 Emc Corporation System having client sending edit commands to server during transmission of continuous media from one clip in play list for editing the play list
US6606603B1 (en) 1997-04-28 2003-08-12 Ariba, Inc. Method and apparatus for ordering items using electronic catalogs
US5864823A (en) 1997-06-25 1999-01-26 Virtel Corporation Integrated virtual telecommunication system for E-commerce
US5898852A (en) 1997-06-26 1999-04-27 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Load instruction steering in a dual data cache microarchitecture
US6029141A (en) * 1997-06-27 2000-02-22 Amazon.Com, Inc. Internet-based customer referral system
CA2239339C (en) 1997-07-18 2002-04-16 Lucent Technologies Inc. Method and apparatus for providing speaker authentication by verbal information verification using forced decoding
US5991594A (en) 1997-07-21 1999-11-23 Froeber; Helmut Electronic book
US5957697A (en) 1997-08-20 1999-09-28 Ithaca Media Corporation Printed book augmented with an electronic virtual book and associated electronic data
US6301584B1 (en) * 1997-08-21 2001-10-09 Home Information Services, Inc. System and method for retrieving entities and integrating data
US5987482A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-11-16 International Business Machines Corporation Computer system and method of displaying hypertext documents with internal hypertext link definitions
US6044385A (en) * 1997-09-10 2000-03-28 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for efficiently managing the manipulation of large documents displayed within a computer screen
US6252879B1 (en) 1997-09-17 2001-06-26 Sony Corporation Single counter for controlling multiple finite state machines in a multi-port bridge for local area network
US6470386B1 (en) 1997-09-26 2002-10-22 Worldcom, Inc. Integrated proxy interface for web based telecommunications management tools
US5986677A (en) 1997-09-30 1999-11-16 Compaq Computer Corporation Accelerated graphics port read transaction merging
US6101216A (en) 1997-10-03 2000-08-08 Rockwell International Corporation Splitterless digital subscriber line communication system
US6112049A (en) 1997-10-21 2000-08-29 The Riverside Publishing Company Computer network based testing system
US6847403B1 (en) 1997-11-05 2005-01-25 Polycom, Inc. Integrated portable videoconferencing unit
US6029176A (en) 1997-11-25 2000-02-22 Cannon Holdings, L.L.C. Manipulating and analyzing data using a computer system having a database mining engine resides in memory
US6029045A (en) 1997-12-09 2000-02-22 Cogent Technology, Inc. System and method for inserting local content into programming content
US6006183A (en) 1997-12-16 1999-12-21 International Business Machines Corp. Speech recognition confidence level display
US6006236A (en) 1997-12-22 1999-12-21 Adobe Systems Incorporated Virtual navigator that produces virtual links at run time for identifying links in an electronic file
US6359881B1 (en) 1997-12-31 2002-03-19 At&T Corp. Hybrid fiber twisted pair local loop network service architecture
US6385614B1 (en) 1998-01-14 2002-05-07 Netlibrary Inc. Electronic bookshelf with multi-user features
US6331867B1 (en) 1998-03-20 2001-12-18 Nuvomedia, Inc. Electronic book with automated look-up of terms of within reference titles
US6101485A (en) 1998-03-26 2000-08-08 International Business Machines Corporation Electronic solicitations for internet commerce
US6009401A (en) 1998-04-06 1999-12-28 Preview Systems, Inc. Relicensing of electronically purchased software
US6657654B2 (en) 1998-04-29 2003-12-02 International Business Machines Corporation Camera for use with personal digital assistants with high speed communication link
US6339842B1 (en) 1998-06-10 2002-01-15 Dennis Sunga Fernandez Digital television with subscriber conference overlay
US6177936B1 (en) * 1998-08-20 2001-01-23 International Business Machines Corporation Browser hierarchical contextual information for web pages
US6415316B1 (en) 1998-09-01 2002-07-02 Aidministrator Nederland B.V. Method and apparatus for implementing a web page diary
US6535505B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2003-03-18 Cisco Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing a time-division multiplexing (TDM) interface among a high-speed data stream and multiple processors
US6611531B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2003-08-26 Cisco Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for routing integrated data, voice, and video traffic
US6295542B1 (en) 1998-10-02 2001-09-25 National Power Plc Method and apparatus for cross-referencing text
GB9822022D0 (en) 1998-10-09 1998-12-02 Roke Manor Research Method and apparatus for receiving a media broadcast
US6351750B1 (en) 1998-10-16 2002-02-26 Softbook Press, Inc. Dynamic conversion of byte ordering for use on different processor platforms
US6331865B1 (en) 1998-10-16 2001-12-18 Softbook Press, Inc. Method and apparatus for electronically distributing and viewing digital contents
US6195667B1 (en) 1998-10-16 2001-02-27 Softbook Press, Inc. On-line menu updating for an electronic book
US6314474B1 (en) 1998-10-16 2001-11-06 Softbook Press, Inc. Efficient information exchange between an electronic book and a cartridge
US6363418B1 (en) 1998-10-16 2002-03-26 Softbook Press, Inc. On-line image caching control for efficient image display
US6167435A (en) * 1998-10-30 2000-12-26 Netcreations, Inc. Double opt-in™ method and system for verifying subscriptions to information distribution services
US6334109B1 (en) 1998-10-30 2001-12-25 International Business Machines Corporation Distributed personalized advertisement system and method
US6260024B1 (en) 1998-12-02 2001-07-10 Gary Shkedy Method and apparatus for facilitating buyer-driven purchase orders on a commercial network system
US7653870B1 (en) 1998-12-08 2010-01-26 Idearc Media Corp. System and method of dynamically generating index information
US6269483B1 (en) 1998-12-17 2001-07-31 International Business Machines Corp. Method and apparatus for using audio level to make a multimedia conference dormant
US6683631B2 (en) 1998-12-31 2004-01-27 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for selecting and deselecting information in an electronic document
US6025871A (en) 1998-12-31 2000-02-15 Intel Corporation User interface for a video conferencing system
US6556561B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2003-04-29 Nortel Networks Corporation Data network for real time information
JP2002536736A (en) 1999-01-27 2002-10-29 ディスカバリー・コミニュケーションズ・インコーポレーテッド E-book with library catalog menu and search function
US6813249B1 (en) 1999-02-16 2004-11-02 Efficient Networks, Inc. System and method for prefetching data
US7051351B2 (en) 1999-03-08 2006-05-23 Microsoft Corporation System and method of inserting advertisements into an information retrieval system display
US6249785B1 (en) 1999-05-06 2001-06-19 Mediachoice, Inc. Method for predicting ratings
WO2001018665A1 (en) 1999-09-08 2001-03-15 Discovery Communications, Inc. Video conferencing using an electronic book viewer
US6320591B1 (en) 1999-09-10 2001-11-20 Gateway, Inc. System and method for the utilization of an electronic book
AU7830200A (en) 1999-09-21 2001-04-24 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book security and copyright protection system
US6510531B1 (en) 1999-09-23 2003-01-21 Lucent Technologies Inc. Methods and systems for testing parallel queues
US6886000B1 (en) 1999-09-29 2005-04-26 International Business Machines Corporation On-line negotiations with dynamic profiling
US6493734B1 (en) 1999-10-15 2002-12-10 Softbook Press, Inc. System and method to efficiently generate and switch page display views on a portable electronic book
US7185274B1 (en) * 1999-12-07 2007-02-27 Microsoft Corporation Computer user interface architecture wherein users interact with both content and user interface by activating links
US6597314B1 (en) * 1999-12-07 2003-07-22 Microsoft Corporation Method and apparatus for providing help and settings control to users of an electronic book
US6344853B1 (en) 2000-01-06 2002-02-05 Alcone Marketing Group Method and apparatus for selecting, modifying and superimposing one image on another
US6990464B1 (en) 2000-01-11 2006-01-24 Ncr Corporation Apparatus, system and method for electronic book distribution
US7725812B1 (en) 2000-03-31 2010-05-25 Avid Technology, Inc. Authoring system for combining temporal and nontemporal digital media
JP2001357219A (en) 2000-06-15 2001-12-26 Media Vision:Kk Method and system for generating and selling book by using network
US6725203B1 (en) 2000-10-12 2004-04-20 E-Book Systems Pte Ltd. Method and system for advertisement using internet browser to insert advertisements
US6891551B2 (en) 2000-11-10 2005-05-10 Microsoft Corporation Selection handles in editing electronic documents
US20040039934A1 (en) 2000-12-19 2004-02-26 Land Michael Z. System and method for multimedia authoring and playback
US6985913B2 (en) 2000-12-28 2006-01-10 Casio Computer Co. Ltd. Electronic book data delivery apparatus, electronic book device and recording medium
US20020120635A1 (en) 2001-02-27 2002-08-29 Joao Raymond Anthony Apparatus and method for providing an electronic book
US7039643B2 (en) 2001-04-10 2006-05-02 Adobe Systems Incorporated System, method and apparatus for converting and integrating media files
US7020663B2 (en) 2001-05-30 2006-03-28 George M. Hay System and method for the delivery of electronic books
US6976028B2 (en) 2001-06-15 2005-12-13 Sony Corporation Media content creating and publishing system and process
US20030018543A1 (en) 2001-06-25 2003-01-23 Alger Jeffrey H. Client portal
GB2381086A (en) 2001-07-30 2003-04-23 Tentendigital Ltd Learning content management system
US7103848B2 (en) 2001-09-13 2006-09-05 International Business Machines Corporation Handheld electronic book reader with annotation and usage tracking capabilities
JP2003150813A (en) 2001-11-13 2003-05-23 Sony Corp Information processing device and method, information processing system and method, and program
TW565811B (en) 2001-12-31 2003-12-11 Ji-Ching Jou Computer digital teaching method
US20030236836A1 (en) 2002-03-21 2003-12-25 Borthwick Ernest Mark System and method for the design and sharing of rich media productions via a computer network
US20030200145A1 (en) 2002-04-18 2003-10-23 Brad Krassner Internet-based system and method for creating and distributing customized rich media marketing and sales materials via e-mail
US8392834B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2013-03-05 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Systems and methods of authoring a multimedia file
US20050114784A1 (en) 2003-04-28 2005-05-26 Leslie Spring Rich media publishing
US20060204942A1 (en) 2005-03-10 2006-09-14 Qbinternational E-learning system
US20060259239A1 (en) 2005-04-27 2006-11-16 Guy Nouri System and method for providing multimedia tours
JP2007025959A (en) 2005-07-14 2007-02-01 Fujifilm Holdings Corp Multimedia data processor, multimedia data processing method and multimedia data processing program

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995015649A1 (en) * 1993-12-02 1995-06-08 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book selection and delivery system
US5761485A (en) * 1995-12-01 1998-06-02 Munyan; Daniel E. Personal electronic book system
WO1999012349A1 (en) * 1997-09-04 1999-03-11 Discovery Communications, Inc. Apparatus for video access and control over computer network, including image correction
WO1999044144A1 (en) * 1998-02-26 1999-09-02 Monec Mobile Network Computing Ltd. Electronic device, preferably an electronic book

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
RAUCH T ET AL: "Enabling the book metaphor for the World-Wide-Web: disseminating on-line information as dynamic Web documents" IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION, IEEE INC. NEW YORK, US, vol. 40, no. 2, June 1997 (1997-06), pages 111-128, XP002142136 ISSN: 0361-1434 *

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003034136A2 (en) * 2001-10-16 2003-04-24 Hewlett-Packard Company High resolution display
WO2003034136A3 (en) * 2001-10-16 2004-03-11 Hewlett Packard Co High resolution display
FR2834603A1 (en) * 2002-01-07 2003-07-11 Egg Solution Optronics Method for transmission of signals containing at least a wide angle image component in an uncorrected noise state that improves interaction between a local signal processing line and the broadcasting organizations
WO2004059979A1 (en) * 2002-12-31 2004-07-15 British Telecommunications Public Limited Company Video streaming
CN1732690B (en) * 2002-12-31 2012-04-18 英国电讯有限公司 Video streaming
US7733808B2 (en) 2006-11-10 2010-06-08 Microsoft Corporation Peer-to-peer aided live video sharing system
WO2010054465A1 (en) * 2008-11-13 2010-05-20 Max Readtime Limited Method and system for enabling video reading sessions
WO2010144361A1 (en) * 2009-06-09 2010-12-16 Skiff, Inc. System and method for providing spatial and temporal content in an electronic device
US8280954B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2012-10-02 Scomm, Inc. Method and system for providing live real-time communication via text between mobile user devices
US9565262B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2017-02-07 Scomm, Inc. Method and system for providing live real-time communication via text between mobile user devices
US10257130B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2019-04-09 Scomm, Inc. Method and system for providing live real-time communication via text between mobile user devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7849393B1 (en) 2010-12-07
AU2001247201A1 (en) 2001-09-17
WO2001067302A3 (en) 2002-04-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7849393B1 (en) Electronic book connection to world watch live
CA2177154C (en) Electronic book selection and delivery system
US7835989B1 (en) Electronic book alternative delivery systems
US7861166B1 (en) Resizing document pages to fit available hardware screens
US7865567B1 (en) Virtual on-demand electronic book
US5986690A (en) Electronic book selection and delivery system
US8095949B1 (en) Electronic book with restricted access features
US7716349B1 (en) Electronic book library/bookstore system
JP4555481B2 (en) E-book with electronic link
US7865405B2 (en) Electronic book having electronic commerce features
US20110185191A2 (en) Electronic book electronic links
US20020040472A1 (en) Electronic book selection and delivery system having encryption and security features
EP1330728B1 (en) Method for virtual on-demand electronic book
CA2371379A1 (en) Electronic book alternative delivery methods

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 03071561

Country of ref document: CO

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP